Ricoh Fax Machine 340 User Guide

340/350/450

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Modes

User Tools (System Settings)

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy

for future reference.

For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

RWARNING:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in

death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-

structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-

scribed in the Safety Information in the “Copy Reference”.

RCAUTION:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-

nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury

when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this

symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety

Information in the “Copy Reference”.

* The statements above are notes for your safety.

Important

If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be

damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

Preparation

This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-

erating.

Note

This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-

eration.

Limitation

This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,

or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

Reference

This symbol indicates a reference.

[

]

Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.

{ }

Keys built into the machine's operation panel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MANUALS FOR THIS MACHINE................................................................. 1

MACHINE TYPES ......................................................................................... 2

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY OPTIONAL MEMORY UNITS 3

Copy Mode.................................................................................................... 3

Facsimile Mode (Option)............................................................................... 4

1.MODES

CHANGING MODES..................................................................................... 5

MULTI-ACCESS............................................................................................ 6

COPY MODE............................................................................................... 10

Changing To Copy Mode ............................................................................ 10

FAX MODE.................................................................................................. 12

Changing To Facsimile Mode ..................................................................... 12

Printing A Received Fax.............................................................................. 12

Sending A Fax............................................................................................. 13

2.USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)

KEYS FOR USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS) .................................... 15

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS

(SYSTEM SETTINGS)................................................................................. 16

Exiting from User Tools............................................................................... 17

USER TOOLS MENU (SYSTEM SETTINGS) ............................................ 18

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS ..................... 19

System Settings ¹/₆..................................................................................... 19

System Settings ²/₆..................................................................................... 20

System Settings ³/₆..................................................................................... 21

System Settings ⁴/₆..................................................................................... 23

System Settings ⁵/₆..................................................................................... 25

System Settings ⁶/₆..................................................................................... 26

INDEX........................................................................................................ 27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MANUALS FOR THIS MACHINE

This is a multi-functional machine combining copying and facsimile functions.

This manual describes procedures common to these functions. Each function's

reference describes the operational procedures separately for the copying and

facsimile functions. Please consult the manual that suits your needs.

❖

System Settings (this manual)

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions

of the machine. It also introduces the options allowing you to use additional

functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-

chine easier to use.

When using as a copier

• Copy Reference

Describes the various copying functions from basic copying to more ad-

vanced functions such as reducing/enlarging copies or combining origi-

nals into one copy.

❖

When using as a facsimile

• Facsimile Reference (option)

Describes the operational procedures and functions to use the machine as

a facsimile.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MACHINE TYPES

There are three models of this machine. The main differences between them are

memory capacity and copy speed. To make sure which model you have, see the

inside front cover.

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Copy speed

Memory capacity

Fax unit

35 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

35 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

45 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

4 MB

12 MB

(8 MB optional

memory available)

Option

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY

OPTIONAL MEMORY UNITS

You can expand the capabilities of this machine to include fax functions. When

you want to add a function, contact your sales or service representative.

Copy Mode

In copy mode you can make basic copies and also copy using more sophisticated

techniques, such as reduction/enlargement or combining several originals onto

one copy. You can install an optional memory expansion for storage of docu-

ment images, thereby making the best use of memory with various copy func-

tions.

Expansion Memory (option)

❖

8 MB copier memory unit (Electric sort kit) (option for Type 1)

Provides various functions including Image Rotate, Sort, and Duplex Copy.

Copier hard disk (Image enhance kit)

Provides various functions such as:

• Archive File (copying stored images)

• Following functions using the Enhanced Image Copy:

Sort/Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack/Shift Sort/Shift Stack/Staple

Combine

Duplex

Repeat

Image Rotate

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Facsimile Mode (Option)

You can send and receive fax messages in facsimile mode. Installation of option-

al expansion memory allows more functions to be used, and more data to be

stored.

Options for Memory Expansion

❖

4 MB memory card

Provides a variety of memory-based functions including confidential recep-

tion, envelope reception, and two-sided printing. Also increases the number

of personal codes, groups, speed dials, files in memory, special stations, etc.

❖

Fax hard disk

Increases memory capacity, allowing you to increase the number of transmit

originals and receive images to be stored in memory.

400 dpi high resolution card

Allows sending/receiving in super fine mode. Also allows JBIG compression.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. MODES

CHANGING MODES

You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax machine as

well. Press the {Copy} key to use copy functions, or press the {Fax} key to use

facsimile functions.

Copy Mode

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Facsimile Mode

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND0X02EE

Limitation

❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:

• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.

• During immediate transmission.

• When accessing the user tools.

• During interrupt copying.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODES

MULTI-ACCESS

You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is

being performed.

This allows you to handle your jobs efficiently regardless of how the machine is

being used. For example:

• While making copies, the machine can send a fax message that has been

stored in memory.

• You can make copies while receiving fax data.

Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called Multi-accessing.

Limitation

❒ You cannot use Multi-accessing during interrupt copying.

Note

❒ You can choose which mode has highest priority for print jobs. The default is

the current mode shown on the display. See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒ P.23

“System Settings ⁴/₆”.

❒ When your machine is equipped with the optional internal tray 2, you can

specify the tray used for each function so that completed documents are not

mixed. For example, set one tray for faxes and another tray for copies. If you

require the optional internal tray 2, contact your local dealer or service repre-

sentative. See “15. Output Tray” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MULTI-ACCESS

-Multi-accessing example

The order of multi-accessing operations is as follows:

Time

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

Mode

Operation

Job

Copying

1st

2nd

Start

2 originals

copy

Printing

the

Printing

the

Received

data

Printing 2

received

faxes

1st

2nd

processing

received

fax

received

fax

Memory

transmission

operation

(2 pages)

Start

Scanning the

1st page

Scanning the

2nd page

Start

receiving

Completion

1st page

2nd page for

for

Memory

memory

reception

reception *1

reception

MULTI2EE

This job runs in the background, regardless of any current data scanning/writing op-

erations.

Note that you can also receive faxes into memory with such a job.

-Sample operations

This chart is based on the following conditions:

• When “16. Print priority” is set to “Interleave” (See “16. Print Priority” in ⇒

P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”)

• For details on operations under other conditions, contact your service repre-

sentative.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODES

Mode after Copy

you select

Facsimile

Transmission

Reception

Mode before

you select

Copy

Copying

❍

✩

❍

✩

❍

En-

hanced

Image

Copy

Memory

Copy

❍

✩

❍

Sort

❍

✩

❍

Stapling

❍

Scan-

✩

ning An

Original

for

Memory

Trans-

mission

Memory

Trans-

mission

✩

Immedi-

ate

Trans-

mission

Memory

Recep-

tion

✩

Printing

Re-

→

✩

→

✩

ceived

Data

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MULTI-ACCESS

✩…means that these functions can be used together.

❍…means that you can interrupt the current job with Function keys or the {In-

terrupt} key to proceed to a subsequent job.

→…means that another job will automatically start after the current job is fin-

ished.

×…means that you will manually start another job after the current job is fin-

ished (i.e. these functions cannot be used together).

Simultaneous operations are only available when copies are being made after their

originals are all scanned.

You might fail to print received data, depending on size or orientation of the original.

Priority is given to the subsequent job; after the subsequent job is finished, the inter-

rupted operation is automatically resumed.

If the optional copier hard disk is installed, you can make interrupt copies with the

{

Interrupt} key.

If you are making stapling copies on paper larger than A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" with the op-

tional 1000-sheet finisher, the subsequent operation is disabled until the current job

is finished. After you start interrupt copying with the {Interrupt} key, the Output Tray

is automatically changed to “Internal Tray”.

During parallel receptions, any subsequent job is disabled until the receptions are

completed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODES

COPY MODE

A Press the {Interrupt} key.

Changing To Copy Mode

If the machine is scanning origi-

nals, it will immediately stop the

scanning job. On the other hand, if

the machine is performing a copy

or print job, it will still continue the

job until you press the {Start} key

after pressing the {Interrupt} key.

When the current job stops, the in-

terrupt copy display appears on

the panel display.

You can always make a copy when

the machine isn't printing or scanning

a fax data.

A Press the {Copy} key.

The copy display appears on the

panel display.

Note

❒ When you interrupt a copying

job, remove the previous origi-

nal.

Reference

For details, see the “Copy Refer-

ence”.

B Make your copies.

Important

Interrupt Copying To Make Urgently

Needed Copies

❒ If the remaining memory space

is 0 %, the machine fails to re-

ceive fax data. Wait until the

machine completes printing a

received fax, then start making

copies.

You can interrupt the current copying

job or printing of a received fax to

make a copy.

Limitation

Note

❒ When the optional copier hard disk

is not installed, you cannot use the

following functions during inter-

rupt copying:

❒ While copying, a received fax

document is stored in memory

and the Receive File indicator is

lit.

• Duplex

C After interrupt copying is com-

pleted, remove the original and

delivered copies.

• Combine

• Sort

• Copying archive files

D Press the {Interrupt} key again.

❒ You cannot use the interrupt copy

The machine resumes the printing

job of the received fax document.

function in the following cases:

• during fax immediate transmis-

sion

• while scanning an original for

memory transmission

• during interrupt copying

ìí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPY MODE

Resuming the interrupted

copying job

A Reset the previous original.

B Press the {Start} key.

The machine resumes the inter-

rupted copy run.

Copying And Multi-accessing

Note

❒ Machine operations are different

depending “16. Print Priority” (See

⇒ P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”) or “18.

User Code Manage” (See ⇒ P.25

“System Settings ⁵/₆”) settings.

Reference

⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”

❖

When “Print Priority” = “Fax” or “Dis-

play” (default)

The machine completes the opera-

tion of the function set by Print pri-

ority before performing the

operation of another function.

Limitation

❒ While the machine is perform-

ing two-sided printing in fax

mode, you cannot make two-

sided copies until the printing

ends.

❖

When “Print Priority” = “Interleave”

The machine performs the opera-

tions in the order in which they are

initiated. If another function is ini-

tiated during operation, the ma-

chine completes the current

operation before performing the

operation of the function initiated.

ìì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODES

FAX MODE

Changing To Facsimile Mode

Printing A Received Fax

You can always use the machine as a

facsimile when you are not copying.

When you are not copying, a received

fax is printed automatically. You do

not need to switch to Facsimile mode.

If you wish to print a received fax

while copying, see below.

A Press the {Fax} key.

The facsimile display appears on

the panel display.

Preparation

Machine operations are different

depending “16. Print Priority” (See

⇒ P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”) or “18.

User Code Manage” (See ⇒ P.25

“System Settings ⁵/₆”) settings.

Note

❒ The Memory Transmission/Re-

ception function is performed

automatically even when an-

other function is being used.

You need not switch the dis-

play. When data is received in

memory, the Receive File indi-

cator is lit.

Reference

See ⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”.

Printing a received fax while copying

❖

When “Print Priority” = “Fax” or “Dis-

play” (default)

The machine once interrupts the

copying and receives a fax. Upon

completing the fax reception, it re-

sumes the interrupted copying job.

Reference

For details, see the “Facsimile

Reference”.

❖

When “Print Priority” = “Interleave”

The machine performs the opera-

tions in the order in which they are

initiated. If another function is ini-

tiated during operation, the ma-

chine completes the current

operation before performing the

operation of the function initiated.

❖

Printing a received fax in a hurry

Press the {Fax} key to switch to the

facsimile display. The copying job

is interrupted and the machine

starts printing the received fax au-

tomatically. After printing the fax,

ìë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FAX MODE

press the {Copy} key and do the

previous job again.

Sending A Fax

Sending a fax while printing a received

fax

Scanning originals for memory

transmission

The machine can scan your originals

for memory transmission even while

printing a received fax.

A Complete the usual operations

for sending a fax, then press the

{Start} key.

Immediate transmission

Immediate transmission interrupts

the job of printing a received fax. This

is because the page memory is occu-

pied as your originals are scanned.

A Complete the usual operations

for sending a fax, then press the

{Start} key.

Sending a fax while copying

While scanning copy originals

A Press the {Clear/Stop} key and

then the {Fax} key.

Copying is stopped and the dis-

play is switched to the Facsimile

mode.

Note

❒ Remove the copy originals.

ìê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MODES

While outputting copy

A Press the {Fax} key to switch to

the facsimile display.

You can send a fax while copying.

Note

❒ Remove any originals of your

copy job.

B Complete the usual operations

for sending a fax, then press the

{Start} key.

C After the transmission has fin-

ished, press the {Copy} key.

D Reset the copy job originals, then

press the {Start} key.

The machine resumes the inter-

rupted copy run.

ìé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. USER TOOLS (SYSTEM

SETTINGS)

KEYS FOR USER TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

Main

Power

Standard

Detail

Book

2-Sided

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Staple

Stack

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Start

Manual RX Status

TX File

TEL

Mode

2-Sided 2-Sided

Speed Dial

Super Fine

User Tools

Counter

Clear Stop

ABC

DEF

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

On Hook Dial

Copy

Fax

GHI

JKL

MNO

Zoom

Start

Pause

Redial

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

PRS

TUV

WXY

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Enter

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

Tone

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

OPER

ND2A01EE

1. {User Tools/Counter} key

2. Panel Display

3. {Selection} keys

Press the key under the item you wish to

select.

4. < and > keys (Cursor keys)

Press to select an item on the panel dis-

play.

5. {Number} keys

Use to enter a numeric value.

6. {#} key

Press to set a value you have entered.

7. {Clear/Stop} key

Press to delete a number you have en-

tered.

ìè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS

(SYSTEM SETTINGS)

This section is for the key operators in

C Search for the desired menu. En-

charge of this machine. You can

change or set the machine's default

settings.

ter its number with the {Number

}

keys.

Preparation

After using the user tools, be sure

to exit it to return to Copy mode.

The settings are not canceled even

if the operation switch is turned off

or the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver

}

key is pressed.

Limitation

❒ Function names displayed in a

faint font become available when

the machine is expanded.

Reference

For information on Copy and Fax

User Tools, see the appropriate ref-

erence manual.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

The User Tools Main Menu ap-

pears.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0103

Note

B Enter {

1} with the {Number} keys.

❒ [↓Next]: Press to go to the next

The system settings menu appears.

page.

❒ [↑Prev.]: Press to go back to the

previous page.

Reference

⇒ P.18 “User Tools Menu (Sys-

tem Settings)”

ìç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

$&&(66,1*ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

D Change the settings by following

Exiting from User Tools

the instructions on the panel dis-

play. Then press the [OK] key.

A After changing the user tools set-

Reference

⇒ P.19 “Settings You Can Change

With The User Tools”

tings, press the

{

User Tools/

Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Note

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

❒ [OK]: Press to set the new set-

tings and return to the previous

menu.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

ND2L0103

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the

previous menu without chang-

ing any data.

Note

❒ You can also exit from user tools

by pressing the [Exit] key on the

User Tools Main Menu.

ìæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

USER TOOLS MENU (SYSTEM SETTINGS)

ìå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE

USER TOOLS

Reference

For how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.16 “Accessing The User Tools (System

Settings)”.

System Settings ¹/₆

Description

01. Function Priority

(facsimile option re-

quired)

You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after

the operation switch is turned on or System Reset mode is

turned on.

Note

❒ Default: Copy

02. Panel Beeper

03. Ready·Beeper

The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.

This beeper can be turned on or off.

Note

❒ Default: ON

Choose whether the machine beeps when it becomes ready

for a copy run after power up.

Note

❒ Default: ON

04. Copy Count Display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies

made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be

made (count down).

Note

❒ Default: Up (count up)

ìä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

System Settings ²/₆

Description

05. System Reset

The machine returns to its prioritized mode automatically

after your job is finished, after the selected time. This func-

tion is called “System Reset”. The time can be set from 10 to

999 seconds, or no system reset.

Note

❒ Default: YES (60 seconds)

❒ You can specify the prioritized mode with the user tools.

See “01. Function Priority” in ⇒ P.19 “System Settings ¹/₆”

06. Function Switch

(facsimile option re-

quired)

How long the machine waits before switching to the default

mode if no operation has been performed after an operation

has finished.

Note

❒ Default: 3 seconds

07. Low Pwr. Shift Time The machine enters Low Power mode automatically after

your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can be

set from 1 to 240 minutes.

In Low Power mode, power consumption is saved about 35

% as compared with Stand-by mode. This value is a refer-

ence applicable to Type 1 (mainframe only).

Note

❒ Default: 15 minutes

08. Low Power Timer

The machine enters to Energy Saver mode automatically af-

ter your job is finished, after the selected time. The time can

be set from 10 to 999 seconds, or off.

Note

❒ Default: Yes (60 seconds)

ëí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6

System Settings ³/₆

Description

09. Energy Saver Mode The machine enters Energy Saver mode in the following

cases:

•

If you hold down the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key for

about a second or more.

•

When the preset time selected with the Low Power Timer

has passed.

Reference

See “08. Low Power Timer” in ⇒ P.20 “System Settings

²/₆”.

In Energy Saver mode, power consumption is saved as

shown below, as compared with Stand-by mode.

•

Level 1 (default): Saving about 25 %

Level 2: Saving about 30 %

Warm-up time required for Energy Saver mode to return to

the ready condition is as follows:

•

Level 1 (default): About 3 seconds

Level 2: About 10 seconds

Note

❒ Default: Level 1

❒ The values above are references applicable to Type 1

(mainframe only).

10. Auto Off Timer

The machine turns itself off automatically to conserve ener-

gy after your job is finished, after the selected time. This

function is called “Auto Off ”. The time can be set from 1 to

240 minutes.

Note

❒ Default: 60 minutes

❒ Auto Off might not be effective when the machine is in

the following conditions:

•

An error message is displayed.

The remaining memory space for facsimile mode is

less than 100%.

❒ To return to the ready condition from Auto Off, the ma-

chine requires the same warm-up time as the time for be-

coming ready after its power is turned on.

❒ When the machine receives a fax in Auto Off mode, it au-

tomatically prints the fax.

ëì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

Description

11. Paper Size-Tray

Select the size of the copy paper set in the paper tray.

Note

❒ If the specified paper size differs from the size of paper

actually set in the paper tray, a paper misfeed might oc-

cur because the paper size is not detected correctly.

Reference

See “Changing The Paper Size” in the “Copy Reference”.

12. Pap.Tray Priority

(for Copy mode only)

You can select the paper tray which will be selected as a de-

fault in the following conditions:

•

When the operation switch is turned on.

When System Reset or Auto Reset mode is turned on.

When the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key is pressed.

When the Auto Paper Select mode is not selected.

Tray1

Tray2

Tray3

LCT

Tray4

Optional Trays

ND6A0200

Note

❒ Default: Tray 1

❒ Tray 3, Tray 4, and LCT (Large Capacity Tray) are op-

tions.

ëë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6

System Settings ⁴/₆

Description

13. Auto Tray Switch

If you load paper of the same size in two or more trays, the

machine automatically shifts another tray when the tray in

use runs out of paper. You can set or cancel this setting.

Note

❒ Default: Yes

❒ If you put recycled paper or special paper in paper trays

using the Special Paper Indicate menu, the Auto Tray

Switch function is available to these trays only when

their settings are identical.

Reference

See “14. Sp. Paper Ind.” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”

14. Sp. Paper Ind.

When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays,

paper type can be indicated on the panel display.

Note

❒ Default: No Display

❒ “Rcyd. ppr.” appears on the panel display when recycled

paper is selected, and “Sp. ppr.” appears when special

paper is selected.

15. Output Tray

You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered for

each mode (copy and facsimile).

External Tray

Internal Tray

Finisher

Internal Tray 2

Finisher

Proof

Finisher

ND0P0202

Note

❒ You can specify a single tray for two or more modes.

❒ With the optional 3000-sheet finisher installed, B4, 8¹/₂"

× 14" or larger paper will be automatically delivered to

the “Finisher Proof” even if you specified “Internal Tray”

as an output tray.

ëê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

Description

16. Print Priority (set-

ting the multi-accessing

function)

Sets the print priority for each mode.

•

“Display”

Print priority is given to the mode displayed on the dis-

play.

•

“Copy”

Print priority is given to the copy function.

“Fax”

Print priority is given to the fax function.

“Interleave”

Prints jobs in the order in which they are initiated regard-

less of mode/function.

Different function's print output might be mixed. If you

want to avoid such mixing, specify an independent tray for

each feature using “Output Tray”. When using different

functions, attaching internal tray 2 allows you to specify an

independent tray for each function. If you want to attach

one, contact your local dealer.

Note

❒ Interrupt printing is disabled functions that have “User

Code Manage” set to “Yes”. The machine switches the

display after the time specified by “Function Switch” and

starts printing with the function.

Reference

⇒ P.6 “Multi-Access”

“15. Output Tray” in ⇒ P.23 “System Settings ⁴/₆”

“18. User Code Manage” in ⇒ P.25 “System Settings ⁵/₆”

“06. Function Switch” in ⇒ P.20 “System Settings ²/₆”

ëé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6(77,1*6ý<28ý&$1ý&+$1*(ý:,7+ý7+(ý86(5ý722/6

System Settings ⁵/₆

Description

You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.

17. Contrast

18. User Code Manage

If the machine is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user

codes before the machine can operate. The machine keeps count of the number of cop-

ies made under each user code.

Note

❒ Enter a previously registered key operator code with the {Number} keys.

Reference

“Key Operator Code”

Code Manage-Copy

Specify whether to employ user codes to restrict copier us-

ers and manage the number of copies made.

Note

❒ Default: No

19. Management Setting

Use these settings to manage use of the machine.

Note

❒ Enter a previously registered key operator code with the {Number} keys.

Reference

“Key Operator Code”

Show/PrintCounter

You can check and print the number of copies made under

each function.

Print CounterList

You can print the counter data for all functions.

Key Operator Code

If you select “Yes”, only operators who know the key oper-

ator code can access the “18. User Code Manage” and “19.

Management Setting” user tools.

Note

❒ Default: No

❒ If you select “Yes”, you should register the key operator

code. See below.

Reg/Chg KeyOpCode Use to register or change the key operator code (up to 8 dig-

its).

ëè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

86(5ý722/6ýõ6<67(0ý6(77,1*6ô

System Settings ⁶/₆

Description

22. ADF Orig. Ejection As a default setting, the scanned originals from the docu-

ment feeder (ADF) are ejected to the ADF external tray. But,

if there is no space to attach an ADF external tray, you can

change the output tray to the ADF tray. However, if the out-

put tray is set to the ADF tray, it takes a little more time than

to the ADF external tray.

Note

❒ Default: ADF External Tray

Currently three types of F size are available; 8¹/₂" × 13", 8¹/₄"

24. <F/F4>Size Setting

× 13" and 8" × 13".

The document feeder or platen cover sensor cannot distin-

guish these 3 types of originals.

This function sets the F size from the document feeder or

platen cover sensor.

Auto Paper Select or Auto Reduce/Enlarge in the case of F

size originals functions based on this setting.

Note

❒ Default: 8¹/₂" × 13"L

ëç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Symbols

# key, ìè

Number keys, ìè

ADF Orig. Ejection, ëç

Auto Off Timer, ëì

Auto Tray Switch, ëê

Output Tray, ëê

Panel Beeper, ìä

Panel Display, ìè

Pap. Tray Priority, ëë

Paper Size-Tray, ëë

Print CounterList, ëè

Print Priority, ëé

Clear/Stop key, ìè

Code Manage-Copy, ëè

Contrast, ëè

Copy Count Display, ìä

Copy Mode, ì, ê, ìí

Cursor keys, ìè

Ready·Beeper, ìä

Reg/Chg KeyOpCode, ëè

Energy Saver Mode, ëì

Selection keys, ìè

Show/PrintCounter, ëè

Sp. Paper Ind., ëê

System Reset, ëí

F/F4 Size Setting, ëç

Facsimile Mode, ì, é, ìë

Function Priority, ìä

Function Switch, ëí

User Code Manage, ëè

Interrupt Copying, ìí

User Tools (System Settings), ìè

User Tools/Counter key, ìè

Key Operator Code, ëè

Keys for User Tools (System Settings), ìè

Low Power Timer, ëí

Low Pwr. Shift Time, ëí

Management Setting, ëè

Modes, è

Multi-Access, ç

ëæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note to users in the United States of America

Notice:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-

ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur

in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-

ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.

Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host com-

puter (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.

2. AC adapter with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Ricoh Corporation, 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006

201-882-2000

Note to users in Canada

Warning:

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equip-

ment Regulations.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel

brouilleur du Canada.

In accordance with ISO Standard 7001, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power

switch:

a means POWER ON.

c means STAND BY.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama,

Minato-ku, Tokyo

Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111

Overseas Affiliates

U.S.A.

Spain

RICOH CORPORATION

5 Dedrick Place

RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.

Guitard, 45

West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006

(TEL) 973-882-2000

08014 Barcelona

(TEL) 490-09-60

Netherlands

Italy

RICOH EUROPE B.V.

Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114

1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland

(TEL) 020-5474111

RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.

Via della Metallurgia, 12

(zona Basson) - 37139 VERONA

(TEL) 045-851 00 44

United Kingdom

Hong Kong

RICOH U.K. LTD.

Ricoh House

1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,

Middlesex, TW13 7HG

(TEL) 181-261-4000

RICOH HONG KONG LTD.

23/F., China Overseas Building,

139, Hennessy Road,

Wan Chai, Hong Kong

(TEL) 2862-2888

Germany

France

RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GMBH

Mergenthalerallee 38-40,

65760 Eschborn

RICOH FRANCE S.A.

383 Avenue du Général de Gaulle,

B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex

(TEL) 01-4094-3838

(TEL) (06196) 906-0

Singapore

RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.

#15-01/02 The Heeren,

260 Orchard Road,

Singapore 238855

(TEL) 65-830-5888

Printed in China

UE USA A2308607

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

340/350/450

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

COPY REFERENCE

ND0A0101

Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy

for future reference.

For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get

maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in

this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related

to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.

- Notes:

Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.

Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Operator Safety:

This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine con-

tains two 5-milliwat, 760 - 800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diodes. Direct (or indirect reflect-

ed) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock

mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical unit

in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite

equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser

chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis

and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement or the optical subsystem is re-

quired.

Warning:

Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual

might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notes:

The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-

chine before reading this manual. (For details, see ⇒ P.1 “Machine Types”.)

•

Type 1: Aficio 340

Type 2: Aficio 350

Type 3: Aficio 450

Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the Inch version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other

than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.

Power Source:

120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more

Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,

see ⇒ P.167 “Power Connection”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAFETY INFORMATION

When using your machine, the following safety precautions should be always be

followed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

RWARNING:

Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death.

RCAUTION:

Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.

Examples Of Indications

Symbols Rmean a situation that requires you take care.

Symbols vmean “Hot surface”.

Do NOT carry out the operation represented by this symbol m.

This example means “Do not take apart”.

Symbols ●mean you MUST perform this operation.

This example means “You must remove the wall plug”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWARNING:

• Only connect the machine to the power source described on

the inside front cover of this manual.

• Avoid multi-wiring.

• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the pow-

er cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend

it more than necessary. These actions could cause an elec-

tric shock or fire.

• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet.

Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely ac-

cessible so that in event of an emergency it can be un-

plugged easily.

• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those spec-

ified in this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high

voltage and could give you an electric shock. Also, if the ma-

chine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye

contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage.

When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or re-

paired, contact your service representative.

• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this ma-

chine. There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss

of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of

serious eye damage.

• If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is

coming out, there is a strange smell or anything looks un-

usual, immediately turn off the operation and main power

switches then unplug the power cord from the wall. Do not

continue using the machine in this condition. Contact your

service representative.

• If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn

off the operation and main power switches, and unplug the

main power cord. Contact your service representative. Do

not keep using the machine with a fault or defect.

• Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water

(e.g. vases, flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the con-

tents fall inside the machine, a fire or electric shock could

occur.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust

might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the

used toner containers according to local regulations for

plastics.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

R CAUTION:

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an elec-

tric shock might occur.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it top-

ples over, it could cause injury.

• After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Other-

wise, the machine might move or come down to cause a personal

injury.

• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.

• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the

power cord.

• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid

damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a

continuous air turnover.

• Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-

containing paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire

might occur.

• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section be-

cause it could be very hot.

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

• Do not eat or swallow toner.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of

children.

• This equipment is only to be installed by a qualified service per-

sonnel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Deliver to collection point for waste products. Do not be disposed

of via domestic refuse collection.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENERGY STAR

As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets

Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency.

This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with

copying equipment by means of energy saving feature such as Auto Off mode.

For details, see the following pages.

❖

Auto Off Timer

See “10. Auto Off Timer” in “System Settings ³/₆” in the System Settings.

Low Pwr. Shift Time

See “07. Low Pwr. Shift Time” in “System Settings ²/₆” in the System Settings.

Duplex Priority

See “10. Duplex Priority” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General Features ³/₄”.

-Recycled Paper

Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled

paper types that may be used in this machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

Symbols

In this manual, the following symbols are used:

RWARNING:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in

death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-

structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-

scribed in the Safety Information section.

RCAUTION:

This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-

nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury

when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this

symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety

Information section.

* The statements above are notes for your safety.

Important

If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be

damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.

Preparation

This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-

erating.

Note

This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-

eration.

Limitation

This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,

or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

Reference

This symbol indicates a reference.

[

]

Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.

{ }

Keys built into the machine's operation panel.

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE

(COPY MODE)

Directional Size

Magnification(inch

⇒ Page 69.

Directional

Magnification(%)

⇒ Page 71.

Enhanced Image Copy ⇒ Page 38.

Clear Image Copy

)

Map

Positive / Negative ⇒ Page 98.

OHP Slip Sheet ⇒ Page 96.

Image Repeat ⇒ Page 99.

Series Copies

Double Copies

⇒ Page 82.

1 2

Image Repeat

R R R R

Cover / Paper Designate

⇒ Page 91.

Front Cover

Archive File ⇒ Page 102.

Both Covers

Store

MAP

Paper Designate

Memory

Recall

ND0X0400

YLLL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto Reduce / Enlarge

⇒ Page 42.

Sort ⇒ Page 45.

Staple ⇒ Page 49.

8¹/₂x 11"

11" x 17"

*3 *4

Duplex ⇒ Page 85.

Zoom ⇒ Page 67.

R^R^RRRR

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Program

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

Speed Dial

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

On Hook Dial

Copy

Fax

Zoom

*1 Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray.

*2 The optional copier hard disk is required

*3 Type 1 reguires the optional 8MB copier

memory unit.

Pause

Redial

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

Tone

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

*4 The optional finisher is required.

*5 Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit,

interchange unit and 8MB copier memory

unit.

Text·Photo Mode ⇒ Page 39.

Combine ⇒ Page 78.

Photo + Text

Clear Image Copy

1 2

3 4

The game of go

Photo Mode ⇒ Page 39.

Photo

Clear Image Copy

Erase Center / Border

Margin Adjustment

⇒ Page 75.

Erase Center

⇒ Page 73.

Erase Border

ND0X0401

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MACHINE TYPES....................................................................................... 1

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS ........................................................................ 2

Guide............................................................................................................. 5

OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 7

Type 1 ........................................................................................................... 7

Type 2 and Type 3 ........................................................................................ 8

FUNCTION LIST BASED ON OPTIONS.................................................... 9

OPERATION PANEL................................................................................ 12

PANEL DISPLAY...................................................................................... 14

Displays And Key Operations ..................................................................... 14

Display Panel Layout .................................................................................. 16

1.BASICS

STARTING THE MACHINE ...................................................................... 17

Turning On The Power................................................................................ 17

Turning Off The Power................................................................................ 18

CHANGING MODES................................................................................ 19

ORIGINALS............................................................................................... 20

Sizes And Weights Of Recommended Originals......................................... 20

Sizes Difficult To Detect.............................................................................. 21

Original Sizes And Scanning Area/Missing Image Area ............................. 22

COPY PAPER........................................................................................... 23

Recommended Paper Sizes And Types ..................................................... 23

Non-recommended Paper........................................................................... 25

Paper Storage............................................................................................. 26

TONER...................................................................................................... 27

Handling Toner............................................................................................ 27

Toner Storage ............................................................................................. 27

Used Toner ................................................................................................. 27

2.COPYING

BASIC PROCEDURE ............................................................................... 29

SETTING ORIGINALS.............................................................................. 31

Setting Originals On The Exposure Glass .................................................. 31

Setting Originals In The Document Feeder................................................. 32

Using SADF, Mixed Sized, and Thin Paper modes .................................... 33

BASIC FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 37

Adjusting Copy Image Density.................................................................... 37

Enhanced Image Copy................................................................................ 38

Selecting Original Type Setting................................................................... 39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting Copy Paper ................................................................................. 40

Auto Reduce/Enlarge—Having The Machine Choose The Reproduction

Ratios.......................................................................................................... 42

SORT/STACK/STAPLE............................................................................ 43

Sort—Sorting Into Sets (123, 123, 123)...................................................... 45

Stack—Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111, 222, 333) .............. 47

Staple.......................................................................................................... 49

COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY.................................................... 55

When copying onto OHP transparencies or thick paper ............................. 58

PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY SETTINGS IN MEMORY ............ 60

Storing Your Settings .................................................................................. 60

Deleting A Program..................................................................................... 61

Recalling A Program ................................................................................... 62

OTHER FUNCTIONS................................................................................ 63

Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy ......................................................... 63

Interrupt—Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else.......... 63

User Codes ................................................................................................. 63

Auto Start—Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period....... 64

Original Beeper ........................................................................................... 64

PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING AND ENLARGING USING

PRESET RATIOS...................................................................................... 65

ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1 % STEPS......................... 67

DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION (INCH)—STRETCHING AND

SQUEEZING THE IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA ................................ 69

DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING

THE IMAGE IN 1 % STEPS...................................................................... 71

MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE MARGIN .......................... 73

ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE

BORDER................................................................................................... 75

COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY ...................... 78

SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED COPIES FROM VARIOUS

ORIGINALS............................................................................................... 82

Book → 1-Sided—Making One-sided Copies From Two Facing Page Of A

Bound Original (Book)................................................................................. 82

2-Sided→1-Sided—Making One-sided Copies From Two-sided

Originals...................................................................................................... 84

DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES.............................................. 85

1-Sided → 2-Sided—Making Two-sided Copies From One-sided

Originals...................................................................................................... 86

Book → 2-Sided—Making Two-Sided Copies From Facing Pages Of A Bound

Original (Book) ............................................................................................ 89

2-Sided → 2-Sided—Making Two-sided Copies From Two-sided

Originals...................................................................................................... 90

COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS ...... 91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Front Cover—Copying Or Adding A Front Cover........................................ 91

Both Covers—Copying Or Adding Front And Back Covers ........................ 93

Paper Designate—Copying Designated Pages Of Originals Onto Slip

Sheets......................................................................................................... 94

OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING SLIP SHEET................ 96

POSITIVE/NEGATIVE—COPYING IN COMPLEMENTALY COLORS.... 98

IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE............................................ 99

Double Copies—Copying The Image Twice On One Page ........................ 99

Image Repeat—Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy ................... 100

ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO

MEMORY ................................................................................................ 102

Storing The Images................................................................................... 103

Deleting The Stored Images ..................................................................... 105

Printing A List Of The Stored Images........................................................ 106

Recalling The Stored Images.................................................................... 107

COMBINATION CHART ......................................................................... 108

3.WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

IF YOUR MACHINE DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT ............... 111

Message.................................................................................................... 111

Display ...................................................................................................... 112

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES............................................. 113

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT ............................... 115

Adjust Image ............................................................................................. 116

Combine.................................................................................................... 117

Duplex....................................................................................................... 118

B LOADING PAPER.............................................................................. 119

Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray .............................................. 120

D ADDING TONER................................................................................ 121

x CLEARING MISFEEDS ..................................................................... 124

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE .............................................................. 132

d ADDING STAPLES............................................................................ 134

1000-Sheet Finisher.................................................................................. 134

3000-Sheet Finisher.................................................................................. 136

e REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES...................................................... 139

1000-Sheet Finisher.................................................................................. 139

3000-Sheet Finisher.................................................................................. 141

y REMOVING PUNCH WASTE ............................................................ 144

4.USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)......................... 145

Exiting From User Tools............................................................................ 146

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)............................................ 148

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS.................. 150

1. General Features ¹/₄............................................................................. 150

1. General Features ²/₄............................................................................. 152

1. General Features ³/₄............................................................................. 153

1. General Features ⁴/₄............................................................................. 154

2. Adjust Image ¹/₂.................................................................................... 155

2. Adjust Image ²/₂.................................................................................... 157

3. Input/Output ¹/₂...................................................................................... 160

3. Input/Output ²/₂...................................................................................... 162

4. Shortcut Keys ¹/₁................................................................................... 164

5.REMARKS

DO'S AND DON'TS................................................................................. 165

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE........................................................ 166

Machine Environment ............................................................................... 166

Power Connection..................................................................................... 167

Access To Machine................................................................................... 168

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE ........................................................... 169

Cleaning The Exposure Glass .................................................................. 169

Cleaning The Platen Cover....................................................................... 169

Cleaning The Document Feeder............................................................... 169

6.SPECIFICATION

MAINFRAME........................................................................................... 171

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)........................................................... 176

PAPER TRAY UNIT (OPTION)............................................................... 177

INTERNAL TRAY 2 (1 BIN TRAY) (OPTION)........................................ 178

1000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION) ........................................................ 179

3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION) ........................................................ 180

PUNCH KIT (OPTION)............................................................................ 182

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (LCT) (OPTION) .......................................... 183

DUPLEX UNIT (OPTION) ....................................................................... 184

BYPASS TRAY (OPTION)...................................................................... 185

8 MB COPIER MEMORY UNIT (ELECTRIC SORT KIT) (OPTION) ...... 186

COPIER HARD DISK (IMAGE ENHANCE KIT)..................................... 187

INDEX...................................................................................................... 188

xiii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

xiv

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MACHINE TYPES

There are three models of this machine. The main differences between them are

memory capacity and copy speed. To make sure which model you have, see the

inside front cover.

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Copy speed

Memory capacity

Fax unit

35 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

35 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

45 copies/minute

(A4K, 8¹/₂" ×

11"K)

4 MB

12 MB

(8 MB optional

memory available)

Option

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS

Main

Power

On/Off

ND0A02EE

if the main power switch is turned on.

If it is off, turn it on.

1. Platen cover (option) or Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF) (option)

Lower the platen cover over originals

placed on the exposure glass for copying.

5. ADF external tray

Originals are delivered here.

If you have the document feeder, insert a

stack of originals here. They will be fed

automatically.

(The illustration shows the document

feeder.)

6. Main Powerindicator

This indicator lights up when the main

power switch is turned on, and goes off

when the switch is turned off.

7. Onindicator

2. Exposure glass

This indicator lights up when the opera-

tion switch is turned on, and goes off

when the switch is turned off.

Position originals here face down for

copying. See ⇒ P.20 “Originals”.

3. Internal tray

Copied paper is delivered here face down.

8. Operarion switch

Press this switch to turn the power on

(the Onindicator lights up). To turn the

power off, press this switch again (the On

indicator goes off).

4. Main power switch

Do not touch this switch. This switch is

used only by a service representative

when the optional fax unit is installed.

9. Operation panel

See ⇒ P.12 “Operation Panel”.

Note

❒ If the machine does not operate after

10. Duplex unit (Unit for two-sided

copies) (option for Type 1)

Makes two-sided copies.

turning on the operation switch, check

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. Front cover

Open to access the inside of the machine.

12. Paper tray

Set paper here. See ⇒ P.119 “B Loading

Paper”.

13. Paper tray unit (option)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ND6A0101

1. Bypass tray (option for Type 1)

2. Right side cover

Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,

adhesive labels, translucent paper, post

cards, and non-standard size paper. See

⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.

Open this cover before making 2-sided

copies on B4, 8 ¹/₂" × 14" or larger copy

paper.

3. Lower right cover

Open this cover to remove jammed paper

which fed from the optional paper tray

unit.

ND8A0102

an object near it. If the machine over-

heats, a fault might occur.

1. Ventilation hole

Prevents overheating. Do not obstruct

the ventilation hole by placing or leaning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Guide

The guides of the internal tray minimize curled copies when they are delivered.

Raise these guides when you make copies on A3, 11" × 17" or thin paper.

❖

To copy onto A3, 11"

Raise the end fence.

× 17" paper

ND3P0100

❖

If either side of the OHP transparencies or thin paper is curled

Raise the left end of the guide until it clicks.

ND3P0200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖

If the end of the sheet is curled

A Remove the guide.

ND3P0300

B Reinstall the guide in the opposite direction.

ND3P0400

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTIONS

Type 1

9 10

ND0P01EE

1. 1000-sheet finisher

Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.

7. Paper tray unit

Consists of two paper trays.

2. External tray

8. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

If you selected this as the output tray,

copied paper is delivered here face

down. See “15. Output Tray” in the Sys-

tem Settings.

Holds 1,500 sheets of paper.

9. Bypass tray

Use to copy onto OHP transparencies,

adhesive labels, translucent paper, post

cards, and non-standard size paper. See

⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.

3. Platen cover

Lower this cover over originals for copy-

ing.

10. Duplex unit

Use to make two-sided copies.

4. Document feeder (ADF)

Insert a stack of originals here.

They will be fed automatically.

Other options:

• Interchange unit

5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)

• 8 MB copier memory unit (Electric

sort kit)

If you selected this as the output tray,

copied paper is delivered here face

down. See “15. Output Tray” in the Sys-

tem Settings.

• Copier hard disk (Image enhance

kit)

6. Bridge unit

Relays copies to the external tray or fin-

isher. (The Punch function is optional.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Type 2 and Type 3

ND0P02EE

1. 1000-sheet finisher

Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.

6. 3000-sheet finisher (only for Type

Sorts, stacks, staples copies, and makes

punch holes (The Punch function is op-

tional).

2. External tray

If you selected this as the output tray,

copied paper is delivered here face

down. See “15. Output Tray” in the Sys-

tem Settings.

• 1: Proof tray

• 2: Shift tray

3. Platen cover

Lower this cover over originals for copy-

ing.

7. Bridge unit

Relays copies to the external tray or fin-

isher.

4. Document feeder (ADF)

Insert a stack of originals here.

They will be fed automatically.

8. Paper tray unit

Consists of two paper trays.

9. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

Holds 1,500 sheets of paper.

5. Internal tray 2 (1 bin tray)

If you selected this as the output tray,

copied paper is delivered here face

down. See “15. Output Tray” in the Sys-

tem Settings.

Other options:

• Copier hard disk (Image enhance

kit)

• Punch kit (only for Type 3 with

3000-sheet finisher)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST BASED ON OPTIONS

The function that are available to you depend on your machine configuration

and which options you have. See the table below.

❍…Available

×…Not available

Model

Place originals

Adjusting Image Density

Selecting Original Type

Auto Paper Select

❍

Selecting Copy Paper

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Enhanced Image Copy

❍

Sort

❍

Rotate Sort/Rotate Stack

Shift Sort/Shift Stack

Stapling

❍

Copying from the Bypass Tray

Program

❍

Reduce/Enlarge

Zoom

Directional Size

Magnification (inch)

Directional Magnification (%)

Margin Adjustment

❍

Erase Center/Border

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Model

Place originals

Combine

2 pages → 1-sided

4 pages → 1-sided

8 pages → 2-sided

❍

4 pages → 2-sided

❍

16 pages → booklet

Series Cop- Book → 1-sided

❍

ies

2-sided→ 1-sided

Duplex

1-sided → 2-sided

Book → 2-sided

2-sided → 2-sided

❍

*4 *7

Cover/Paper Designate

OHP Slip Sheet

Positive/Negative

❍

Repeat

Double copies

Image Repeat

Archive File

Standard setting.

Set the paper of the same size KL in the paper trays.

Finisher required.

Bypass tray required.

Duplex unit and interchange unit required.

Document Feeder required.

Only a set of copies can be made.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION PANEL

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Standard

Detail

Book

2-Sided

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Staple

Stack

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Start

Manual RX Status

TX File

TEL

Mode

2-Sided 2-Sided

Super Fine

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

15 16 18

1. Operation panel for facsimile

mode (for machine with optional fax

function)

6. Panel display

Shows operation status, error messages,

and function menus. See ⇒ P.14 “Panel

Display”.

See the “Facsimile Reference”.

7. {Program} key

2. {Sorter} key

Press to select the program mode. See ⇒

P.60 “Program—Storing Your Copy Set-

tings In Memory”.

Sort/Rotate Sort/Shift Sort: automatical-

ly sorts copies.

Rotate Stack/Shift Stack: stacks together

copies of each page.

Staple: staples each set of copies together.

8. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key

Press to clear the previously entered copy

job settings. Also use to switch to and

from Energy Saver mode. See ⇒ P.63

“Energy Saver Mode—Saving Energy”.

3. {Duplex} key

Makes two-sided copies. See ⇒ P.85 “Du-

plex—Making Two-Sided Copies”.

9. {Interrupt} key

4. {User Tools/Counter} key

• User Tools

Press to make interrupt copies during a

copy run. See ⇒ P.63 “Interrupt—Tempo-

rarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something

Else”.

Press to change the default settings

and conditions to meet your re-

quirements.

10. Main Powerindicator

This indicator lights up when the main

power switch is turned on, and goes off

when the switch is turned off.

• Counter

Press to check or print the total

number of copies made.

See ⇒ P.145 “USER TOOLS (COPY FEA-

TURES)”.

11. Onindicator

This indicator lights up when the opera-

tion switch is turned on, and goes off

when the switch is turned off.

5. Indicators

These indicators show errors or the status

of the machine.

See ⇒ P.111 “WHAT TO DO IF SOME-

THING GOES WRONG”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Program

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

Interrupt

Main

Power

Speed Dial

Clear Stop

ABC

DEF

On Hook Dial

GHI

JKL

MNO

Start

Pause

Redial

PRS

TUV

WXY

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Enter

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

Tone

OPER

21 22

25 26

12. Operation switch

20. {Lighter} and {Darker} keys and

Auto Image Density} key

Adjusts the copy image density.

{

Press this switch to turn the power on

(the Onindicator lights up). To turn the

power off, press this switch again (the On

indicator goes off).

21. Selection keys

Press the key under the item you wish to

select.

13. {Enhanced Image} key

Reproduces copies with a better image

quality.

22. <> keys (Cursor keys)

Press to select an item on the panel dis-

play.

14. {Menu} key

Displays the names of available func-

tions.

23. Operation panel for facsimile

mode (for machines with optional

fax function)

15. Shortcut keys

Press to use the stored functions you fre-

quently use.

See the “Facsimile Reference”.

24. {Number} keys

Use to enter the desired number of copies

and data for selected modes.

16. {Zoom} key

Changes the reproduction ratio in 1 %

steps.

Use the { } key to enter data in selected

modes.

17. {Auto Reduce/Enlarge} key

Enlarges or reduces the image automati-

cally according to the specified paper

size.

25. {Start} key

Press to start copying. Use to set the Auto

Start. See ⇒ P.64 “Auto Start—Entering

Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Pe-

riod”.

18. Function keys

Press to change modes. To use copy func-

tions, press the {Copy} key.

26. {Clear/Stop} key

While entering numbers, press to cancel a

number to have entered. While copying,

press to stop copying.

19. {Original Type} key

Press to select the type of your originals.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PANEL DISPLAY

The panel display shows operational status, error messages, and function menus.

Important

❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N (about 3 kgf) or more to

the panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.

Note

❒ When you select or specify an item on the panel display, it is highlighted like

Auto

❒ Keys appearing as

cannot be used.

❒ By default, the machine is in Copy mode when you switch on. This can be

changed. See “Settings You Can Change With The User Tools” of the System

Settings.

Displays And Key Operations

Note

❒ The following illustrations are examples for the machine with the optional

paper tray unit and large capacity tray installed.

❖

Copy initial display

GAMEN00

1. The function items for the selected function are displayed.

2. Number of originals set.

3. Displays operational status or messages.

4. These keys correspond to the item on the display.

Press a relevant key to select a function.

• To move the selection to the left, press the < key.

• To move the selection to the right, press the > key.

5. Displays items which can be selected or specified.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❖

Function menu display

GAMEN01

1. When you select a function name, ' mark appears before the name.

2. Displays operational status or message.

3. Displays items which can be selected or specified.

❖

Common keys

]

[

Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the previ-

ous display.

[

Cancel

]

Cancels a selected function or entered value and returns to the pre-

vious display.

[↑Prev.][↓Next

]

When there are too many items fit on the display, use these keys

to move between pages.

Press to highlight the selection you wish to select.

Press to return to the previous menu.

[

]

Exit

]

Sets a selected function or entered value and returns to the initial

display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display Panel Layout

The basic elements used on the display are shown below. Understanding their

meaning helps you exploit this machine's features quickly and easily.

❖

Sample Display for Erasing the Center/Border

GAMEN02

1. Operational status or message.

2. Selectable/specifiable functions are displayed.

3. Screened key means to press it.

kPress the [Center] key.

GAMEN03

1. Selectable/specifiable functions are displayed.

2. Cancels the settings and returns to the previous display.

3. Confirms the settings and returns to the previous display.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. BASICS

STARTING THE MACHINE

To start the machine, turn on the op-

eration switch.

Turning On The Power

Note

A Make sure that the power cord is

plugged into the wall outlet firm-

ly and the Main Powerindicator

is lit.

❒ This machine automatically enters

Energy Saver mode or turns itself

off if you do not use the machine

for a while. See “09. Energy Saver

Mode”, “10. Auto Off Timer” of

the System Settings.

B Press the operation switch to

make the Onindicator light up.

Main

Power

-Power switches

This machine has two power switch-

es: See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To Components”.

r / Stop

❖

Operation switch (right side of the op-

eration panel)

Turn on this switch to activate the

machine. When the machine has

warmed up, you can make copies

or send faxes.

ND1M01EE

The panel display will come on.

❖

Main power switch (left side of the ma-

chine)

Do not touch the main power

switch. It should be used only by a

service representative when the

optional fax unit is installed.

Note

❒ During the warm-up period,

you can use the Auto Start func-

tion. See ⇒ P.64 “Auto Start—

Entering Copy Job Settings Dur-

ing The Warm-up Period”.

Important

❒ If you leave the main power switch

off for more than about one hour,

all fax files in memory will be lost.

See “Turning Off The Power” of

the Facsimile Reference.

❒ Warm-up period is as follows:

• Type 1 and Type 2: less than

85 seconds

• Type 3: less than 100 seconds

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

When the machine is set for user codes

Turning Off The Power

A Enter your user code using the

A Press the operation switch to

{

Number} keys. Then press the {#

}

make the Onindicator go off.

key.

Note

Main

❒ To prevent others from making

copies with your user code,

press the {Clear Modes/Energy

Power

r / Stop

Saver} key and the {Clear/Stop

}

key simultaneously after copy-

ing.

ND1M01EE

Reference

For setting user codes, see ⇒

P.154 “1. General Features ⁴/₄”.

Important

❒ If you want to unplug the pow-

er cord or turn off the main

power switch, make sure that

the remaining memory space

indicates 100 % on the display

for facsimile mode.

When the

indicator is lit

Clear Modes/Energy Saver

{ }

The machine is in Energy Saver

mode.

❒ Fax files stored in memory will

be lost an hour after you turn

the main power switch off or

you unplug the power cord. See

“Turning Off The Power” of the

Facsimile Reference.

A Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-

er} key.

The machine will return to the

ready condition.

Note

❒ The machine will also return to

the ready condition when an

original is set in the document

feeder, or when the platen cover

or document feeder is opened.

Reference

See “08. Low Power Timer” of

the System Settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHANGING MODES

You can use this machine not only as a copier, but optionally as a fax machine as

well. Press the {Copy} key to use functions, or press the {Fax} key to use facsim-

ile functions.

Copy Mode

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Facsimile Mode

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND0X02EE

Limitation

❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:

• When scanning in a fax message for transmission.

• During immediate transmission.

• When accessing the user tools.

• During interrupt copying.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

ORIGINALS

Sizes And Weights Of Recommended Originals

❖

Metric version

Where original is set

Exposure glass

Original Size

Original Weight

Up to A3

52 – 128 g/m²

52 – 105 g/m²

41 – 128 g/m²

Document feeder

1-sided originals:

A3L – B6KL

2-sided originals:

A3L – A5KL

Thin Paper mode:

A3L – A5KL

❖

Inch versions

Where original is set

Exposure glass

Original Size

Original Weight

Up to 11" × 17"

Document feeder

1-sided originals: 11" ×

14 – 34 lb

17"L – 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"KL

2-sided originals: 11" ×

14 – 28 lb

11 – 34 lb

17"L – 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"KL

Thin Paper mode: 11" ×

17"L – 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"KL

Non-recommended originals for the document feeder

Setting the following originals in the document feeder might cause paper mis-

feeds or damage to the originals. Set these originals on the exposure glass.

• Originals other than those specified in ⇒ P.20 “Sizes And Weights Of Recom-

mended Originals”

• Stapled or clipped originals

• Perforated or torn originals

• Curled, folded, or creased originals

• Pasted originals

• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, alu-

minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper

• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts

• Sticky originals such as translucent paper

• Thin original that has low stiffness

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ORIGINALS

• Originals of inappropriate weight ⇒ P.20 “Sizes And Weights Of Recommended

Originals”

• Bound originals such as books

• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper

Sizes Difficult To Detect

It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so se-

lect the paper size manually.

• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts

• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper

• Dark originals with many letters and drawings

• Originals which partially contain solid image

• Originals which have solid image at their edges

• Originals other than those (with ❍) in the table below. See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes de-

tectable by the Auto Paper Select”.

Sizes detectable by the Auto Paper Select

❖

Metric version

Size A3 B4 A4

8¹/₂"× 8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"×

A5 11 " ×

KL KL KL 17"L

8¹/₂"KL

Place of

original

14"L 11"KL

13"L

Exposure

glass

❍

Docu-

ment

❍

feeder

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13", 8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the user tool (system

settings). See "24. <F/F4> Size Setting" in the System Settings.

❖

Inch version

8¹/₂"× 8¹/₂" × 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"×

A5 11 " ×

Size A3 B4 A4

KL KL KL 17"L

8¹/₂"KL

Place of

14"L 11"KL

13"L

original

Exposure

glass

❍

Docu-

ment

❍

feeder

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13", 8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the user tool (system

settings). See "24. <F/F4> Size Setting" in the System Settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

Original Sizes And Scanning Area/Missing Image Area

❖

Exposure glass

Reference

position

Horizontal size

Maximum Scanning area

A3 (297x420mm)

11"x17"

(279x432mm)

A4 A3

CP01AEE

❖

Document feeder

Horizontal size

Maximum Scanning area

(297x432mm)

A4 A3

CP02AEE

Limitation

❒ Even if you correctly set originals in the document feeder or on the exposure

glass, 3 mm margins on all four sides might not be copied.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPY PAPER

Recommended Paper Sizes And Types

The following limitations apply to each tray:

Metric version Inch version

Paper weight Paper

capacity

64 – 105 g/m²,

Paper tray

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL,

500 sheets

A5L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 20 – 28 lb

8¹/₂" × 11"KL, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L,

7¹/₄" × 10¹/₂"L, 8" × 13"L,

8¹/₂" × 13"L, 8¹/₄" × 13"L

Note

Paper tray unit

(option)

❒ You have to specify paper

size using the user tools. See

⇒ P.132 “Changing The Paper

Size”.

52 – 157 g/m²,

16 – 42 lb

Bypass Standard A3L, A4L,

A3L,

50 sheets (52

– 90 g/m², 16

– 20 lb),

25 sheets (91

– 157 g/m²,

20 – 42 lb)

A5L, 8¹/₂" ×

tray

size

11" × 17"L,

8¹/₂" × 14"L,

13"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L,

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

52 – 157 g/m²,

16 – 42 lb

Non-stan- Vertical: 100 – Vertical: 4.0" –

1 sheet

dard size 297 mm

11.7"

Horizontal:148 Horizontal:

– 432 mm 6.0" – 17.0"

Postcards, adhesive labels,

translucent paper

8¹/₂" × 11"K

64 – 105 g/m²,

20 – 28 lb

Large capacity tray A4K

(option)

1,500 sheets

When you set non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, you have to specify the

size. See ⇒ P.55 “Copying From The Bypass Tray”.

Important

❒ If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try

turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement,

change to copy paper with less curl.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

Note

❒ When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper direc-

tion to L.

❒ Post cards should be fed from the bypass tray.

❒ If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in two or more

trays, the machine automatically shifts to another tray when the tray in use

runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switch. (If you put recy-

cled paper or special paper in paper trays using the Special Paper Indicate

menu, this function is not available to these trays unless their settings are

identical.) This saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper even when

you make a large number of copies. You can cancel this setting. See “13. Auto

Tray Switch” and “14. Sp. Paper Ind.” of the System Settings.

Reference

If you want to add paper, see ⇒ P.119 “B Loading Paper”.

If you want to change the paper size, see ⇒ P.132 “Changing The Paper Size”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPY PAPER

Non-recommended Paper

R CAUTION:

• Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-

containing paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire

might occur.

Important

❒ Do not use paper with any kind of coating such as:

• Thermal fax paper

• Art paper

• Aluminum foil

• Carbon paper

• Conductive paper

Otherwise, a fault might occur.

❒ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on. Otherwise, a fault

might occur.

Note

❒ Do not use the following type of paper because a paper misfeed might occur.

• Bent, folded, or creased paper

• Torn paper

• Slippery paper

• Perforated paper

• Rough paper

• Thin paper that has low stiffness

• Paper with much paper dust on its surface

❒ If you make a copy on rough grain paper, the copy image might be blurred.

❒ Do not use paper which has been copied or printed on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

Paper Storage

Note

❒ When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.

• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70 % or less).

• Store on a flat surface.

❒ Keep open reams of papers in the package, and store as you would unopened

paper.

❒ Under high temperature and high humidity, or low temperature and low hu-

midity conditions, store papers in a vinyl bag.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TONER

Handling Toner

R WARNING:

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust

might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the

used toner containers according to local regulations for

plastics.

R CAUTION:

• Do not eat or swallow toner.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of

children.

R CAUTION:

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

Important

❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.

Reference

If you want to add toner, see ⇒ P.121 “D Adding Toner”.

Toner Storage

Note

❒ When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.

• Do not store toner where it will be exposed to heat.

• Do not eat or swallow toner, and keep it out of reach of children.

• Store on a flat surface.

Used Toner

Note

❒ Used toner cannot be re-used.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASICS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. COPYING

BASIC PROCEDURE

Note

F Enter the number of copies re-

quired with the {Number} keys.

❒ As default, Type 1 with the duplex

unit, Type 2, and Type 3 are initial-

ly in Duplex mode (1-sided → 2-

sided). You can cancel Duplex

mode by pressing the {Duplex} key.

You can also change the default

value. See “10. Duplex Priority” in

⇒ P.153 “1. General Features ³/₄”.

eed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

n Hook Dial

GHI

JKL

Start

ause /

edial

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

one

OPER

A When the machine is set for user

code, enter the user code with the

ND2R02EE

{

Number} keys and then press the

{

#} key.

Note

❒ The maximum copy quantity

can be set between 1 and 999

(default: 999). See “05. 0D[ï

&RS\ý4öW\” in ⇒ P.152 “1. Gener-

al Features ²/₄”.

Reference

See ⇒ P.63 “User Codes”.

B Make sure that the machine is in

Copy mode.

❒ To change the number entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new number.

G Press the {Start} key.

Note

The machine starts copying.

❒ If not, press the {Copy} key.

Note

❒ To stop the machine during the

multi-copy run, press the {Clear/

Stop} key.

C Make sure that there are no previ-

ous settings remaining.

Note

❒ To return the machine to the ini-

tial condition after copying,

press the {Clear Modes/Energy

Saver} key.

❒ To clear settings, press the

{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.

D Set your originals.

Reference

See ⇒ P.31 “Setting Originals”.

E Set your desired settings.

ëä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

-Auto Reset

The machine returns to its initial con-

dition automatically after your job is

finished, after a certain period of

time. This function is called “Auto

Reset”.

Note

❒ You can change the Auto Reset

time. See “11. Auto Reset” in ⇒

P.153 “1. General Features ³/₄”.

-Auto Off

The machine turns itself off automat-

ically after your job is finished, after a

certain period of time. This function is

called “Auto Off”.

Note

❒ You can change the Auto Off time.

See “10. Auto Off Timer" in the

System Settings.

❒ You can change the default set-

tings for basic functions. See ⇒

P.150 “Settings You Can Change

With The User Tools” and “USER

TOOLS (SYSTEM SETTINGS)” in

the System Settings.

êí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTING ORIGINALS

Limitation

Setting Originals On The

Exposure Glass

❒ Set the original after correction flu-

id and ink has completely dried.

Not taking this precaution could

mark the exposure glass and cause

marks to be copied.

A Lift the platen cover or the docu-

ment feeder.

Note

❒ Basically the originals should be

aligned to the rear left corner.

However, some copy functions

may produce different results de-

pending on the direction of the

originals. For details, see explana-

tions of each function.

❒ Be sure to open the platen cover

or the document feeder by more

than 30°, otherwise the original

size might not be detected cor-

rectly.

B Set the original face down on the

exposure glass. The original

should be aligned to the rear left

corner.

Originals

Set in the

document

feeder

Set on the

exposure

glass

set1EE

ND1C01EE

1: Reference mark

2: Scale

C Lower the platen cover or the doc-

set2EE

ument feeder.

Reference

See ⇒ P.20 “Originals”.

êì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder

Setting Originals In The

Document Feeder

A Adjust the guide to the original

Note

size.

❒ Do not stack originals above the

limit mark.

B Set the aligned originals face up

into the document feeder.

❒ When copying thin originals (41 –

52 g/m², 11 – 14 lb), select [DF Set-

ting] and set to Thin Paper mode,

or set your originals on the expo-

sure glass to avoid damage due to

a multi-sheet feed (if several sheets

are fed together at the same time).

See ⇒ P.35 “Thin paper mode”.

❒ The original might become dirty if

it is written with a pencil or similar

tools.

ND1D01EE

❒ For 1-sided originals, you can se-

lect the ADF tray or the ADF exter-

nal tray as an output tray. See “22.

ADF Orig. Ejection” in the System

Settings.

1: Limit mark

2: Document guide

Note

❒ To avoid a multi-sheet feed,

shuffle the originals before set-

ting them in the document feed-

er.

When SADF mode is selected

ND1D04EE

Reference

See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”.

1: ADF tray

2: ADF external tray

A Set one original face up into the

❒ Copying or scanning speed might

be a little reduced if the ADF tray is

selected as an output tray.

document feeder. Then, press the

{Start} key.

The Auto Feed indicator is lit.

Reference

B Set the next original while the

Regarding originals that the docu-

ment feeder can handle, see ⇒ P.20

“Originals”.

Auto Feed indicator is lit.

êë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTING ORIGINALS

The second and subsequent origi-

nals can be fed automatically with-

out pressing the {Start} key.

Using SADF, Mixed Sized, and

Thin Paper modes

SADF mode

If you set one original at a time in the

document feeder, the second and sub-

sequent originals can be fed automat-

ically without pressing the {Start

}

key.

ND1D0201

Limitation

Note

❒ Copying or scanning speed might

❒ You can adjust the time the ma-

chine waits before being ready

for the next original. See “SADF

Auto Reset” in ⇒ P.160 “3. In-

put/Output ¹/₂”.

be a little reduced.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [DF Set-

ting] is displayed.

ND2C0102

êê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

C Select [DF Setting] with the <>

Mixed sizes mode

Limitation

keys, then press the [Select] key.

❒ The weight of originals that can be

set with this function is 52 – 81 g/

m², 14 – 20 lb.

❒ The paper sizes that can be set with

this function are as follows:

ND2C0109

Metric version

Inch version

B5 – A3

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" – 11"

× 17"

D Press the [Select] key.

❒ You can set originals of two differ-

ent sizes at a time.

❒ Copying speed and scanning

speed will be reduced.

❒ For smaller originals, the copy im-

age might be slanted since the orig-

inals might not be correctly

aligned with the original guide.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ To deselect [SADF], press the

A Press the {Menu} key.

[Select] key again.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

E Press the [Exit] key.

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

ND2C0103

B Press the [↓Next] key until [DF Set-

ting] is displayed.

ND2C0102

êé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTING ORIGINALS

C Select [DF Setting] with the <>

keys, then press the [Select] key.

B4 A3

CP19AEE

1: Set into the document feeder

(ADF).

ND2C0109

Important

D Select [Mixed Sizes] with the <>

❒ If the originals are of different

vertical sizes, put the longer

original on the bottom; other-

wise the original size might not

be detected correctly.

keys, then press the [Select] key.

G Adjust the guide to the widest

original size.

H Set the aligned originals face up

ND2C0109

into the document feeder.

Note

❒ To deselect [Mixed Sizes], press

Thin paper mode

Note

the [Select] key again.

E Press the [Exit] key.

❒ Set to Thin Paper mode when you

place thin paper into the document

feeder; otherwise your originals

may be damaged.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

ND2C0103

Copy

Fax

Zoom

F Align the rear and left edges of

the originals as shown in the il-

lustration.

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

êè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

B Press the [↓Next] key until [DF Set-

ting] is displayed.

ND2C0102

C Select [DF Setting] with the <>

keys, then press the [Select] key.

ND2C0109

D Select [Thin Paper] with the <>

keys, then press the [Select] key.

ND2C0109

Note

❒ To deselect [Thin Paper], press

the [Select] key again.

E Press the [Exit] key.

ND2C0103

êç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

The following basic functions are ex-

plained in this section.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

❖

Adjusting Copy Image Density

Auto and Manual Image Density

You can adjust the copy image densi-

ty to match your originals.

There are three types in this function:

❖

Enhanced Image Copy

This function provides clearer

copy image.

❖

Auto Image Density

The machine automatically adjusts

the image density.

❖

Selecting Original Type Setting

Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Copied

original, Low density original

Manual Image Density

If you require darker or lighter

copies, adjust the image density

yourself.

Selecting Copy Paper

Auto Paper Select and Manual Pa-

per Select

❖

Combined Auto and Manual Image

Density

Auto Reduce/Enlarge

Use when copying originals with a

dirty background (such as news-

papers). You can adjust the fore-

ground density while leaving the

background unchanged.

The machine can choose an appro-

priate reproduction ratio based on

the paper and original sizes you se-

lect.

Note

Reference

❒ You can select functions to be acti-

vated when Auto Reset is turned

on, when Energy Saver is turned

off, or after the machine is pow-

ered on. See ⇒ P.150 “1. General

Features ¹/₄”.

You can change the density level

with the user tools. See “12. Densi-

ty Pattern” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General

Features ³/₄”.

A Select one of Image Density

❒ You can change default settings for

basic functions. See ⇒ P.150 “Set-

tings You Can Change With The User

Tools”.

modes.

Auto Image Density

A Make sure that the Auto Image

Density indicator is lit.

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C0201

Note

❒ If not, press the {Auto Image

Density} key.

êæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Manual Image Density

Enhanced Image Copy

A Press the {Auto Image Density

}

This function reproduces copies of

better image quality. It is useful when

copying detailed originals such as

maps.

key to cancel it.

B Press the {Lighter} or {Darker

}

key to adjust the image density.

This function is turned on automati-

cally if you have the optional copier

hard disk.

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C0202

Limitation

❒ The optional copier hard disk is re-

quired to use this image enhanced

feature with the following func-

tions:

Combined Auto and Manual

Image Density

A Make sure that the Auto Image

• Rotate Copy

Density indicator is lit.

• Sort/Stack/Staple

• Combine Copy

• Double Copy

B Press the {Lighter} or {Darker

}

key to adjust the density.

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

• Sort involving cover/slip sheets

• Double Copy

ND2C0202

• Repeat Copy

Note

❒ Copying speed decreases from the

normal speed as follows. Howev-

er, the copying speed remains un-

changed with the optional copier

hard disk.

Type 1, Type 2 35 → 30 copies/min

Type3

45 → 40 copies/min

for A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K

êå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

A Press the {Enhanced Image} key.

Selecting Original Type

Setting

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Select one of the following types to

match your originals:

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

❖

Text

Select this mode when your origi-

nals contain only letters (no pic-

tures).

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0201

Text·Photo

Select Text·Photo when your origi-

nals contains photographs or pic-

tures with letters.

Photo

Delicate tones of photographs and

pictures can be reproduced with

this mode.

Special original (Copied original)

If your originals are copies (gener-

ation copies), the copy image can

be reproduced sharply and clearly.

To use this mode, activate the En-

hanced Image Copy function first.

❖

Special original (Low density original)

Select this mode for originals that

have lighter lines written in pencil,

or for faint copied slips. The faint

lines will be clearly copied.

To use this mode, activate the En-

hanced Image Copy function first.

If you do not select any mode, your

originals will be scanned with the set-

tings suitable for text originals (Text

mode).

A Press the {Original Type} key and

select the original type.

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C0203

êä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Note

Selecting Copy Paper

❒ Press the {Original Type} key to

step through the following

types:

There are two ways to select copy pa-

per:

No indicator lit

Top indicator lit

Text

❖

Auto Paper Select

Text·Photo

Photo

The machine selects a suitable size

of copy paper automatically based

on the original size and the repro-

duction ratio.

Center indicator

lit

Bottom indicator Special Origi-

lit

Note

nal

❒ When the original is set at a dif-

ferent direction from the copy

paper in the paper tray with

Auto Tray Switch mode ON, the

machine automatically rotates

the original image by 90° to

match the copy paper direction.

This applies to the following pa-

per sizes:

❒ To use Special Original mode,

press the {Enhanced Image} key

first.

Special Original

A Select [Copied Orig.] or [Low

Dens. Orig.] with the <> keys,

then press the [OK] key.

Metric version

Inch version

A4 KL, B5 KL

8¹/₂" × 11" KL

Reference

For Auto Tray Switch, see “13.

Auto Tray Switch” in the Sys-

tem Settings.

ND2C0109

❖

Manual Paper Select

You can select the desired copy pa-

per size manually. You can also se-

lect the bypass tray.

Reference

See ⇒ P.55 “Copying From The

Bypass Tray”.

Note

❒ When you use Auto Paper Select,

refer to the following table for pos-

sible copy paper sizes and direc-

tions. (if the ratio is 100 %)

éí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

❖

Metric version

A Select the copy paper.

Where original

is set

Paper size and di-

rection

Auto Paper Select

Exposure glass

A3 L, B4 L, A4

KL, B5 KL, 8¹/₂"

× 13" L ^*1

A Make sure that the Auto (Auto

Paper Select) is selected.

Document feeder A3 L, B4 L, A4

KL, B5 KL, A5

KL, 11" × 17" L,

8¹/₂" × 11" KL, 8¹/₂"

× 13"L

Manual Paper Select

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13",

8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the

user tool (system settings). See "24.

<F/F4> Size Setting" in the System

Settings.

A Select the paper tray or bypass

tray by pressing the [Paper] or

<>keys.

❖

Inch version

Where original

is set

Paper size and di-

rection

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" ×

Exposure glass

14" L, 8¹/₂" ×

ND2C0109

11"KL

Document feeder A4 KL, 11" × 17"

L, 8¹/₂" × 14" L,

8¹/₂" × 11"KL, 5¹/₂"

× 8¹/₂" KL, 8¹/₂" ×

13" L ^*1

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13",

8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the

user tool (system settings). See "24.

<F/F4> Size Setting" in the System

Settings.

❒ For some originals, the original

size might not be detected correct-

ly. See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult To

Detect”.

❒ When you set special paper, such

as recycled paper, in the paper

tray, you can have the kind of pa-

per shown on the display. See “14.

Sp. Paper Ind.” of the System Set-

tings.

éì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Where orig-

inal is set

AutoReduce/Enlarge—Having

The Machine Choose The

Reproduction Ratios

Original size and direction

A4 KL, 11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" ×

Document

feeder

14" L, 8¹/₂" × 11" KL, 5¹/₂" ×

8¹/ "KL, 8¹/₂" × 13"L

The machine can choose an appropri-

ate reproduction ratio based on the

paper and original sizes you select.

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13",

8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the

user tool (System Settings). See

“24. <F/F4>Size Setting” in the

System Settings.

❒ The reproduction ratios the ma-

chine will select are as follows:

• Type 1, Type 2

Metric version: 25 – 400 %

Inch version: 25 – 400 %

• Type 3

Metric version: 35 – 400 %

Inch version: 32 – 400 %

Note

❒ For some originals, the original size

might not be detected correctly. See

⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult To Detect”.

❒ You can set originals of different

sizes in the document feeder at a

time. See ⇒ P.34 “Mixed sizes mode”.

❒ When you use Auto Reduce/En-

large, refer to the following table

for possible original sizes and di-

rections:

❖

Metric version

Where origi-

nal is set

A Press the {Auto Reduce/Enlarge} key.

Original size and direction

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Exposure

glass

A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL, B5 KL,

8¹/₂" × 13" L

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Document

feeder

A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL, B5 KL,

A5 KL, 11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" ×

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

11" KL, 8¹/₂" × 13" L

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

You can select from 8¹/₂" × 13",

8¹/₄" × 13" and 8" × 13" using the

user tool (System Settings). See

“24. <F/F4>Size Setting” in the

System Settings.

ND2L0202

B Select the paper tray by pressing

the [Paper] or <>.

❖

Inch version

Where orig-

inal is set

Original size and direction

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" × 14" L,

8¹/₂" × 11" KL

Exposure

glass

ND2C0109

éë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

Type 1 requires the optional 8 MB copier memory unit to use these functions.

The machine can scan your originals

into memory and automatically sort

the copies.

❖

Punch (the optional 3000-sheet finish-

er and punch kit required)

• Makes punch holes in combina-

tion with Sort/Stack/Staple.

❖

Sort

• Sort

Limitation

❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher

• Rotate Sort

and punch kit are for Type 3 only.

• Shift Sort

❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

(the optional finisher required)

with this function.

❖

Stack

Note

• Rotate Stack

❒ The maximum tray capacity is as

follows. When the number of cop-

ies exceeds the tray capacity, re-

move copies from the tray.

• Shift Stack

(the optional finisher required)

Staple (the optional 1000-sheet finish-

er required)

❖

Metric version

• Top 2

Internal tray 1

•

B4 or larger: 250

sheets (80 g/m²)

•

A4 or smaller: 500

sheets (80 g/m²)

❖

Staple (the optional 3000-sheet finish-

er required)

125 sheets (80 g/m²)

Internal tray 2

External tray

• Top 1

• Top 2

• Top 3

• Double

1000-sheet fin-

isher

•

B4 or larger: 500

sheets (80 g/m²)

•

A4 or smaller: 1,000

sheets (80 g/m²)

3000-sheet fin-

isher (without

punch)

•

Except A4: 1,500

sheets (80 g/m²)

A4: 3,000 sheets (80

g/m²)

éê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❖

Inch version

8¹/₂" ×14" or larger:

250 sheets (20 lb)

8¹/₂" × 11" or small-

Internal tray 1

-Punching (Type 3 only, the

optional 3000-sheet finisher

and punch kit required)

•

er: 500 sheets (20 lb)

You can make punch holes in combi-

nation with Sort/Stack/Staple.

Internal tray 2 125 sheets (20 lb)

Limitation

External tray

125 sheets (20 lb)

❒ You cannot make punch holes

•

8¹/₂" ×14" or larger:

1000-sheet fin-

isher

with Rotate Sort or Rotate Stack.

500 sheets (20 lb)

8¹/₂" × 11" or small-

er: 1,000 sheets (20

lb)

Note

•

❒ Originals orientation and punch

holes position are as follows:

3000-sheet fin-

isher (without

punch)

Original setting

Punch

hole posi-

tion

•

Except 8¹/₂" × 11":

1,500 sheets (20 lb)

8¹/₂" × 11": 3,000

sheets (20 lb)

Exposure Auto Doc-

glass

ument

Feeder

❒ The maximum tray capacity might

be less than the above when you

use the Rotate Sort, Punch, or Sta-

ple function.

❒ The maximum tray capacity might

also be reduced when copy paper

is considerably curled.

Reference

If the punch waste box is full, see

⇒

P.144 “y Removing Punch

Waste”.

For the size and thickness (paper

weight) of paper to which punch-

ing is applicable, see ⇒ P.182

“Punch Kit (Option)”.

éé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

the finisher provides this function

by sliding from side to side.

Sort—Sorting Into Sets (123,

123, 123)

Note

❒ To switch among Sort, Rotate Sort,

and Shift Sort modes, access the

user tools. See “6. Sort” in ⇒ P.162

“3. Input/Output ²/₂”.

Copies can be assembled as sets in se-

quential order.

❖

Sort

❒ The paper sizes that can be used in

Sort function are as follows:

Metric version

A3LB4LA4KL

B5KLA5L

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" ×

Inch version

14" L, 11" × 8¹/₂"

KL, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

Rotate Sort

❒ The paper sizes that can be used in

Rotate Sort function are as follows:

Metric version

Inch version

A4KLB5KL

8¹/₂" × 11"KL

❒ To use the Rotate Sort function,

two paper trays identical in size

and different in direction (K L)

are required.

Shift Sort

❒ The paper sizes that can be used in

Shift Sort function are as follows:

1000-sheet

finisher

3000-sheet

finisher

There are three types in the Sort func-

tion:

Metric A3L, B4L,

A3L, B4L,

version A4KL, B5K A4KL,

B5KL

❖

Sort

Inch

version

11" × 17" L,

Copies can be assembled as sets in

sequential order.

8¹/₂" × 14" L, 8¹/₂" × 14" L,

8¹/₂" × 11"

❖

Rotate Sort

Every other copy set is rotated by

90°KL and delivered to the copy

tray.

Reference

For the paper capacity of the op-

tional finisher, see ⇒ P.49 “Staple”.

❖

Shift Sort (optional finisher required)

Every other copy set is shifted for

ease of separation. The shift tray of

éè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

A Press the {Sorter} key until the

D Enter the number of copy sets

Sortindicator (top) is lit.

with the {Number} keys.

Limitation

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

❒ The maximum number of sets is

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

999.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

E Set your originals.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0101

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

B To make punch holes, press the

[Punch] key.

A Set a stack of originals in the

document feeder, then press

the {Start} key.

After all the originals are

scanned, the copies are deliv-

ered to the tray.

Note

ND2C0101

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

Limitation

❒ If an original is misfed dur-

ing sorted copying, reset

your originals in the docu-

ment feeder according to the

instruction on the display.

The display will indicate the

number of originals you

should return.

❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher

and punch kit are required to

use this function (Type 3 only).

❒ You cannot make punch holes

with Rotate Sort.

Note

❒ If you do not make punch holes,

go to Step D.

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

C Make sure that [ON] is selected,

then press the [OK] key.

Reference

See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”

A Set the original, then press the

{Start} key.

Note

ND2C0104

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

éç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

Note

Stack—Stacking Together All

Copies Of A Page (111, 222,

333)

❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.

C After all originals are scanned,

press the {#} key.

The copies are delivered to the

tray.

Copies can be assembled with each

page set.

❖

Rotate Stack

❖

Shift Stack

There are two types in the Stack func-

tion:

❖

Rotate Stack

Every other page set is rotated

90°KL and delivered to the copy

tray.

❖

Shift Stack (optional finisher re-

quired)

Every other page set is shifted for

ease of separation. The shift tray of

the finisher provides this function

by sliding from side to side.

Note

❒ To select Rotate Stack or Shift Stack,

access the user tools. See “7. Stack”

in ⇒ P.162 “3. Input/Output ²/₂”.

❒ The sizes that can be used in this

function are as follows:

éæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Metric version

Inch version

A3LB4LA4KL

Limitation

B5KLA5L

❒ The optional 3000-sheet finisher

and punch kit are required to

use this function (Type 3 only).

11" × 17" L, 8¹/₂" ×

14" L, 11" × 8¹/₂"

KL, 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

❒ You cannot make punch holes

with Rotate Stack.

Note

❒ The paper sizes that can be used in

the Rotate Stack function are as fol-

lows:

❒ If you do not wish to make

punch holes, go to Step D.

Metric version

Inch version

A4KL, B5KL

8¹/₂" × 11" KL

C Make sure that [ON] is selected.

Then, press the [OK] key.

❒ To use the Rotate Stack function,

two paper trays identical in size

and different in direction (KL)

are required.

Reference

For the maximum tray capacity of

the optional finisher, see ⇒ P.49

“Staple”.

ND2C0104

D Enter the number of copies with

the {Number} keys.

A Press the {Sorter} key until the

Stackindicator (bottom) is lit.

E Set your originals.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

A Set a stack of originals in the

document feeder, then press

the {Start} key.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0101

After all the originals are

scanned, the copies are deliv-

ered to the tray.

B To make punch holes, press the

[Punch] key.

Note

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

ND2C0101

éå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

Staple

The optional finisher is required to use

this function.

Reference

See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”

Each copy set can be stapled together.

A Set the original, then press the

{Start} key.

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

Note

Limitation

❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.

❒ You cannot use the following pa-

per in this function:

C After all originals are scanned,

• Post cards

press the {#} key.

• Translucent paper

• OHP transparencies

• Adhesive labels

• Curled paper

The copies are delivered to the

tray.

• Low stiffness paper

Note

❒ For this mode, the following limi-

tation apply. When the number of

copies exceeds the tray capacity,

copying stops. In this case, remove

the copies from the shift tray and

then resume copying.

éä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❒ In the following cases, the copies

will be delivered to the shift tray

without stapling.

❖

Metric version

1000-sheet

finisher

3000-sheet

finisher

• When the number of copies for

one set is over the stapler capac-

ity.

Paper

size

A3L, B4L, A3L, B4L,

A4KL,

B5K

A4KL,

B5KL

• When memory reaches 0 % dur-

ing copying.

Stapler

capacity

•

A4 or

•

A4 or

smaller:

30 sheets

(80 g/m²)

smaller:

50 sheets

(80 g/m²)

• When “Add Staple” is dis-

played during copying.

❒ When you select Staple, Sort mode

•

B4 or

•

B4 or

is automatically selected.

larger: 20

sheets (80

g/m²)

larger: 30

sheets (80

g/m²)

Reference

If you want to add staples, see ⇒

P.134 “d Adding Staples”.

(without

punch)

When staple is jammed, see ⇒ P.139

“e Removing Jammed Staples”.

Shift tray 1,000 sheets 3,000 sheets

capacity

(A4K)

(80 g/m²)

❖

Inch version

1000-sheet

finisher

3000-sheet

finisher

Paper

size

11" × 17"L, 11" × 17"L,

8¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" ×

14"L, 8¹/₂" 14"L, 8¹/₂"

× 11"KL × 11"KL

8¹/₂" ×

11" or

•

8¹/₂" ×

11" or

Stapler

capacity

•

smaller:

30 sheets

(20 lb)

smaller:

50 sheets

(20 lb)

•

8¹/₂" ×

14" or

•

8¹/₂" ×

14" or

larger: 20

sheets (20

lb)

larger: 30

sheets (20

lb)

(without

punch)

Shift tray 1,000 sheets 3,000 sheets

capacity (20 lb)

(8¹/₂" ×

(20 lb)

11"K)

èí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

❖

3000-sheet finisher

When your machine is equipped

with the 3000-sheet finisher, sta-

pling positions when there is copy

paper that is identical in size and

direction as your original are as

follows:

-Stapling position and original

setting

❖

1000-sheet finisher

When your machine is equipped

with the 1000-sheet finisher, the

stapling position will be fixed to

‘Top 2’.

Original setting

Stapling

position

Expo-

sure

Docu-

ment

Original setting

Stapling

position

glass

Feeder

Expo-

sure

glass

Docu-

ment

Feeder

Note

❒ Original images are not rotated.

❒ To staple in combination with

Combine: 2 pages → 1-sided or

4 pages → 2-sided, or with Dou-

ble Copies, select L paper for

K originals, or select K paper

for L originals.

èì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Note

B Select one of four stapling posi-

tions.

❒ You cannot change stapling po-

sitions during copying.

❒ When the original image is ro-

tated, the stapling direction

turns by 90°.

❒ When you select 1 staple mode

(Top or Bottom), the paper of

which size is the same but the

direction is different from the

originals.

ND2C0105

Note

❒ The maximum original image

size that can be rotated is as fol-

lows:

❒ When

your

machine

equipped with the 1000-sheet

finisher, this display is not

available. Go to Step E.

Metric version

Inch version

8¹/₂" × 11"

C To make punch holes, press the

[

Punch] key.

❒ The copy image can not be ro-

tated if you select [Top 2] or

[Double].

❒ To staple at the Top 2 or Double

position in combination with

Combine: 2 pages → 1-sided or

4 pages → 2-sided, or with Dou-

ble Copies, select L paper for

K originals, or select K paper

for Loriginals.

ND2C0101

Note

❒ If you do not wish to make

punch holes, go to Step D.

A Press the {Sorter} key until the

Sort (top) and Staple (center)

indicators are lit.

D Press the [OK] key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2C0104

ND2L0101

E Enter the number of copy sets

with the {Number} keys.

F Set your originals.

èë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SORT/STACK/STAPLE

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

To resume scanning

A Press the [No] key.

A Set a stack of originals in the

document feeder, then press

the {Start} key.

Scanning is resumed.

After all the originals are

scanned, the copies are deliv-

ered to the tray.

Note

❒ The last page should be on

ND2C0103

the bottom.

Note

❒ Scanned images in memory

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

are not cleared.

To clear scanned images of the

originals

Reference

See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”

A Set the original, then press the

A Press the [Yes] key.

Scanning is stopped with the

images cleared.

{Start} key.

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

Note

ND2C0104

❒ Set the original in the same

direction as the first one.

C After all originals are scanned,

When memory reaches 0 %

press the {#} key.

Scanning will be stopped if the size of

scanned image data exceeds memory

capacity.

The copies are delivered to the

tray.

To stop scanning

Note

❒ There is enough memory to store

approximate 50 originals of A4

size. (Type 1 requires the optional

8 MB copier memory unit.)

When you are using the Sort, Stack, or

Staple function, the originals are

scanned into memory.

A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

èê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❒ See ⇒ P.187 “Copier Hard Disk (Im-

age Enhance Kit)” for the number of

originals that can be stored with

the optional copier hard disk.

Reference

Scanning will stop when memory

reaches 0 % during sorted copying.

However, you can change this set-

ting so that all the scanned pages

are copied and delivered to the

tray first, then the machine auto-

matically continues scanning the

remaining originals. See “8.

Mem.full-AutoStrt” in ⇒ P.162 “3.

Input/Output ²/₂”.

A Press the {Start} key.

The scanned pages are delivered to

the tray. Then, the image data in

memory is cleared.

B Remove the copies and continue

copying by following the instruc-

tions on the display.

èé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY

To use this function on Type 1, the optional bypass tray is required.

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP

B Open the bypass tray.

transparencies, adhesive labels, trans-

lucent paper, post cards, and copy pa-

per that cannot be set in the paper

tray.

Limitation

❒ You cannot use the bypass tray for

the Duplex function.

Note

ND6H0300

❒ The machine can automatically de-

tect the following sizes as standard

C Adjust the guides to copy paper

size copy papers:

size.

Metric version A3L, A4 L, A5L,

8¹/₂" × 13"L

Important

❒ If the guides are not flush with

the copy paper, a skew image or

paper misfeeds might occur.

A3L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂"

Inch version

× 14"L, 8¹/₂" × 11"L,

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

D Lightly insert the copy paper face

❒ If you do not use the standard size

copy paper, you should input ver-

tical and horizontal dimensions.

The sizes that you can input are as

follows:

down until the beeper sounds.

The k indicator on the display is

automatically selected.

Metric version

Inch version

Reference

•

Vertical: 100 – 297

•

Horizontal: 148 –

432 mm

Vertical: 4.0" – 11.7"

•

Horizontal: 6.0" –

17.0"

ND6H04EE

1: Horizontal size

2: Vertical size

3: Extender

For details about paper capacity of

the bypass tray, see ⇒ P.23 “Copy

Paper”.

4: Paper guide

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

mode.

èè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

D Press the [OK] key.

Note

❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark; otherwise a skew image

or paper misfeeds might occur.

❒ If the beeper is turned off, light-

ly insert the copy paper until it

stops. See “Settings You Can

Change With The User Tools”

in the System Settings.

ND2C0104

E Enter the vertical size of the pa-

❒ When the platen cover is open,

set the direction of the copy pa-

per to L.

per with the {Number} keys,

then press the {#} key.

❒ Swing out the extender to sup-

port larger size copy paper larg-

er than A4L, 8¹/₂" × 11"L.

❒ Fan paper to get air between the

sheets and avoid a multi-sheet

feed.

Note

❒ To change the number en-

tered, press the {Clear/Stop

}

key and enter the new num-

ber.

When copying onto non-standard

size copy paper

F Enter the horizontal size of the

paper with the {Number} keys,

then press the [OK] key.

Important

❒ You should specify the size of

copy paper to avoid paper mis-

feeds.

A Make sure the k indicator is

selected.

ND2C0104

Note

B Press the {

C Press the [Ppr. Size] key.

#} key.

❒ To change the number en-

tered, press the {Clear/Stop

}

key and enter the new num-

ber.

❒ When you specify the paper

size, !appears on the dis-

play to indicate bypass tray

copying.

ND2C0101

èç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY

G Press the [Exit] key.

E Select the desired size with the

<> keys, then press the [OK

key.

]

ND2C0104

ND2C0109

When copying onto standard size

copy paper

A Make sure the k indicator is

selected.

ND2C0109

B Press the {#} key.

C Press the [Ppr. Size] key.

ND2C0109

F Press the [Exit] key.

ND2C0101

D Press the [↓Next] key until your

desired size is displayed.

ND2C0104

E Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

ND2C0102

èæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❒ To avoid paper misfeeds, shuf-

fle a stack of paper before set-

ting it in the tray.

When copying onto OHP

transparencies or thick paper

D Press the {

#} key.

To make copies onto OHP transpar-

encies or thick paper, you need to

specify the paper type.

E Press the [Ppr. Type] key.

Note

❒ Select [Thick Paper] if the paper

weight is more than 91 g/m²(20

lb).

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

mode.

ND2C0102

F Select [OHP] or [Thick Paper] with

B Open the bypass tray, and adjust

the <> keys. Then, press the

the guides to the paper size.

[

OK] key.

Important

❒ If the guides are not flush with

the copy paper, a skew image or

paper misfeeds might occur.

C Lightly insert the OHP transpar-

encies or thick paper face down

until the beeper sounds.

ND2C0109

The kindicator on the display is

automatically selected.

G Press the [Exit] key.

ND2C0104

Reference

ND5H05EE

To go on to specify a paper size,

press the [Ppr. Size] key.

Note

See ⇒ P.56 “When copying onto

❒ When you set a OHP transpar-

encies, make sure that its front

and back faces are properly po-

sitioned.

non-standard size copy paper”ï

See ⇒ P.57 “When copying onto

standard size copy paper”.

èå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING FROM THE BYPASS TRAY

H Set your originals and press the

{Start} key.

Important

❒ When copying onto OHP trans-

parencies, remove copied sheets

one by one.

èä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY

SETTINGS IN MEMORY

You can store frequently used copy

C Press the [Store] key.

job settings in machine memory, and

recall them for future use.

❖

Storing Your Settings

You can store your settings you

frequently use.

❖

Deleting A Program

You can delete a stored program.

ND2C0101

Recalling A Program

You can recall a stored program.

D Select the program number you

want to store these settings in

with the <> keys. Then, press

the [OK] key.

Note

❒ You can store up to ten programs.

When the settings are successfully

stored, the mindicator appears.

❒ Paper settings are stored based on

paper size. So if you place more

than one paper tray of a same size,

the paper tray prioritized with the

user tools will be selected first. See

“12. Pap.Tray Priority” of the Sys-

tem Settings.

❒ Programs are not cleared by turn-

ing the power off or by pressing

the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.

They are canceled only when you

delete or overwrite them with an-

other program.

ND2C0109

Note

❒ Program numbers with m al-

ready have settings in them.

❒ If this program number is al-

ready being used, the machine

will ask you if you wish to over-

Storing Your Settings

write it - press the [Yes] or [No

]

A Edit the copy settings so that all

functions you want to store in this

program are selected.

key.

B Press the {Program} key.

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

eed Dial

ND2R01EE

çí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAM—STORING YOUR COPY SETTINGS IN MEMORY

E To delete another program, repeat

Deleting A Program

steps C and D.

You can delete a stored program.

F Press the [Exit] key.

A Press the {Program} key.

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

eed Dial

ND2R01EE

B Press the [Delete] key.

ND2C0103

ND2C0102

C Select the program number you

want to delete with the <> keys.

Then press the [OK] key.

ND2C0109

D Press the [Yes] key.

ND2C0103

Note

❒ To cancel the deletion, press the

[No] key.

çì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Recalling A Program

You can recall a stored program.

A Press the {Program} key.

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

eed Dial

ND2R01EE

B Select the program number you

want to recall with the <> keys.

Then, press the [OK] key.

The stored settings are displayed.

ND2C0109

Note

❒ Only programs with mcontain

a program.

C Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

çë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Energy Saver Mode—Saving

Energy

Interrupt—Temporarily

Stopping One Job To Copy

Something Else

If you do not operate the machine for

a certain period after copying, or

when you press and hold the {Clear

Modes/Energy Saver} key for more than

one second, the display disappears

and the machine enters Energy Saver

mode. When you press the {Clear

Modes/Energy Sever} key again, when

the originals are set in the document

feeder, or when the platen cover or

document feeder is opened, the ma-

chine returns to the ready condition.

In Energy Saver mode, the machine

uses less electricity.

You can make urgently needed copies

during a multi-copy run.

A Press the {Interrupt} key.

The key indicator lights.

B Remove the originals currently

set for copying, and set your orig-

inals for interrupt copying. Make

your copies.

C After interrupt copying, remove

the originals for interrupt copy-

ing and the copies.

The Energy Saver mode makes a two-

step reduction in electricity: one for

the period up to the time set for Low

Power mode, the other for the period

after that time.

D Press the {Interrupt} key again.

The key indicator goes off.

E Reset the previous originals.

Then, press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ The period for which the machine

remains in Energy Saver mode (i.e.

the period until the mode is turned

off to return to the ready condi-

tion) varies with the effectiveness

of energy saving.

Note

❒ The previous copy settings are

recalled and the previous copy

job can be resumed by pressing

the {Start} key.

❒ If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy

Saver} key during the operation,

the current settings will be cleared.

User Codes

If the machine is set to use the User

Code function, operators must input

their user codes before the machine

can be operated. The machine keeps

count of the number of copies made

under each user code.

Reference

See “8. Low Power Timer” of the

System Settings.

Note

❒ When the machine is set for user

codes, the machine will prompt

çê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

you for your user codes after the

operation switch is on or the Auto

Reset comes into effect.

Original Beeper

The beeper sounds and an error mes-

sage is displayed when you leave

your originals on the exposure glass

for about two seconds after copying.

❒ To prevent others from making

copies using your user code, press

the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} and

{

Clear/Stop} keys simultaneously

after copying.

Note

❒ To cancel this function, see “06.

Original beeper” in ⇒ P.152 “1.

General Features ²/₄”.

Reference

For setting user codes, see ⇒ P.154

“1. General Features ⁴/₄”.

Auto Start—Entering Copy

Job Settings During The

Warm-up Period

If you press the {Start} key during the

warm-up period, the {Start} key will

blink, and your copies will be made

as soon as warm-up finishes.

A Make any adjustments to copy

settings during the warm-up peri-

od.

B Set your originals.

C Press the {Start} key.

The {Start} key indicator alternate-

ly flashes red and green.

Note

❒ To cancel Auto Start, press the

{Clear/Stop} key.

çé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING AND ENLARGING USING PRESET RATIOS

PRESET REDUCE/ENLARGE—REDUCING

AND ENLARGING USING PRESET RATIOS

You can select a preset ratio for copy-

ing.

❖

Metric version

Original → Copy paper

size

Ratio (%)

400 (enlarge --

area by 16)

200 (enlarge A5→Α3

area by 4)

141 (enlarge A4→Α3, Α5→Α4

area by 2)

122

115

F→Α3, Α4→Β4

B4→Α3

Note

❒ You can select one of 12 present ra-

tios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduc-

tion ratios).

A little reduced.

A3→Β4

❒ You can change the preset ratios to

other ratios you frequently use. See

“08. Reproduction Ratio” in⇒

P.152 “1. General Features ²/₄”.

F→Α4, Β4→F

A3→Α4, Α4→A5

71 (reduce

area by ¹/₂)

A3→F

❒ You can select a ratio regardless of

the size of an original or copy pa-

per. With some ratios, parts of the

image might not be copied or mar-

gins will appear on copies.

50 (reduce

area by ¹/₄)

A3→Α5, F→Α5

35 ^*1

25 ^*2

❒ Copies can be reduced or enlarged

as follows:

Type 3 only

Type 1 and Type 2 only

çè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❖

Inch version

B Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

Ratio(%)

Original → Copy paper

size

400 (enlarge --

area by 16)

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"→11" × 17"

200 (enlarge

area by 4)

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"→8¹/₂" × 14"

155 (enlarge

area by 2)

8¹/₂" × 11"→11" × 17"

129

121

8¹/₂" × 14"→11" × 17"

A little reduced.

F→8¹/₂" × 11"

8¹/₂" × 14"→8¹/₂" × 11"

11" × 14"→8¹/₂" × 11"

11" × 17"→8¹/₂" × 11"

11" × 17"→5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

50 (reduce

area by ¹/₄)

32 ^*1

25 ^*2

Type 3 only

Type 1 and Type 2 only

A Press the [Enlarge] or [Reduce] key

to select a ratio.

ND2C0110

Note

❒ Another preset ratio is dis-

played every time you press the

key.

çç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1 % STEPS

ZOOM—REDUCING AND ENLARGING IN 1

% STEPS

You can change the reproduction ra-

A Press the {Zoom} key.

tio in 1 % steps.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

Image

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0204

B Enter the ratio.

Note

❒ The following ratios can be select-

ed:

When using the [n] or [o] key

• Type 1, Type 2

A Enter the desired reproduction

Metric version: 25 – 400 %

Inch version: 25 – 400 %

ratios with the [o] or [n] key.

• Type 3

Metric version: 35 – 400 %

Inch version: 32 – 400 %

❒ You can select a ratio regardless of

the size of an original or copy pa-

per. With some ratios, parts of the

image might not be copied or mar-

gins will appear on copies.

ND2C0100

Note

❒ You can select a preset ratio which

is near the desired ratio, then press

the {Zoom} key and adjust the ratio

with the [n] or [o] key.

❒ To change the ratio in 1 %

steps, just press the [n] or

[o] key. To change the ratio

in 10 % steps, press and hold

down the [n] or[o] key.

When using the {Number} keys

A Enter the desired ratio with the

{Number} keys.

çæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Note

❒ To change the ratio entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new ratio.

C Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

çå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION (INCH)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE

IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA

DIRECTIONAL SIZE MAGNIFICATION

(INCH)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE

IMAGE INTO THE COPY AREA

The suitable reproduction ratios will

be automatically selected when you

enter the horizontal and vertical

lengths of the original and copy im-

age you want.

of the image might not be copied

or blank margins will appear on

copies.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Preparation

Specify the vertical and horizontal

sizes of the original and those of the

copy, as shown in the illustration.

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [Select] key.

CP2M01EE

1: Horizontal original size

2: Vertical original size

3: Horizontal copy size

4: Vertical copy size

ND2C0104

C Enter the vertical size of the origi-

nal with the {Number} keys. Then,

Note

press the {#} or > key.

❒ You can enter sizes within the fol-

lowing ranges:

Metric version

1 – 999 mm (in 1

mm steps)

Inch version

0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1"

steps)

Note

❒ To change the value entered:

❒ If the calculated ratio is over the

maximum or under the minimum

ratio, it is corrected within the

range of the ratio automatically.

However, with some ratios, parts

• If you have not pressed the

{

#} key yet, press the {Clear/

Stop} key and enter the new

value.

çä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

• If you have already pressed

the key, select the

{

[

Orig.:Vrt.] with the <> keys

and enter the new value.

D Enter the vertical size of the copy

with the {Number} keys. Then,

press the {#} or >key.

E Enter the horizontal size of the

original with the {Number} keys.

Then, press the {#} or >key.

F Enter the horizontal size of the

copy with the {Number} keys.

Then, press the [OK] key.

G Set your originals, then press the

{

Start} key.

æí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE IMAGE IN

1 % STEPS

DIRECTIONAL MAGNIFICATION (%)—

STRETCHING AND SQUEEZING THE IMAGE

IN 1 % STEPS

Copies can be reduced or enlarged at

A Press the {Menu} key.

different reproduction ratios horizon-

tally and vertically.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Select the [Direct Mag. (%)] key with

< or > keys. Then, press the [Se-

lect] key.

CP2P01EE

1: Horizontal %

2: Vertical %

Note

❒ The following ratios can be select-

ed:

• Type 1, Type 2

ND2C0109

Metric version: 25 – 400 %

Inch version: 25 – 400 %

C Enter the desired vertical ratio

with the {Number} keys. Then,

• Type 3

press the {#} key or the > key.

Metric version: 35 – 400 %

Inch version: 32 – 400 %

❒ You can select a ratio regardless of

the size of an original or copy pa-

per. With some ratios, parts of the

image might not be copied or

blank margins will appear on cop-

ies.

æì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

D Enter the desired horizontal ratio

with the {Number} keys. Then,

press the [OK] key.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ To change the number entered,

press the {#} key or the <>

keys, then enter the new num-

ber.

E Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

æë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE MARGIN

MARGIN ADJUSTMENT—ADJUSTING THE

MARGIN

You can shift the image either left or

A Press the {Menu} key.

right to make a binding margin.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

Limitation

B Select the [Margin Adjust.] with the

❒ If you set too wide margin, areas

you do not want to delete might be

erased.

<> keys. Then, press the [Select

]

key.

Note

❒ You can change the width of the

binding margin as follows:

Metric version

0 – 30 mm (in 1

mm steps)

ND2C0109

Inch version

0" – 1.0" (in 0.1"

steps)

C Select [Left] (left margin) or [Right

]

(right margin) with the <> keys.

❒ The margin width default is as fol-

lows. You can change this default

setting with the user tools. See “3.

Marg.Adjust.Front” in ⇒ P.155 “2.

Adjust Image ¹/₂”.

Metric version

•

Front: 5 mm

Left

•

Back: 5 mm

Right

ND2C0105

D Enter the desired margin width

Inch version

•

Front: 0.2" Left

Back: 0.2" Right

with the {Number} keys.

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

æê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

E To specify a binding margin for

back pages, press the [Back] key.

ND2C0101

Note

❒ You can specify the back margin

only when the Duplex or the

Two-Sided copy with Combine

is selected.

❒ If you do not need to specify the

back margin, press the [OK] key

and go to Step Hï

F Select [Left] (left margin) or [Right

]

(right margin) with the <> keys.

ND2C0105

G Enter the desired margin width

the {Number} keys. Then, press

the [OK] key.

H Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

æé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE BORDER

ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE

CENTER AND THE BORDER

This function erases the center and/

or all four sides of the original image,

such as book originals.

Metric version

Inch version

10 mm

0.4"

❒ The position of the margin to be

erased is determined according to

the original size and reproduction

ratio.

❖

Erase Center

Lcopy paper

Kcopy paper

CenterEE

❖

Erase Border

3~50mm

BorderEE

There are two types in this function:

❖

Center

1: Erased part

This mode erases the center mar-

gin of the original image.

❒ You can use the Erase Center and

Erase Border functions together.

❖

Border

A Press the {Menu} key.

This mode erases the surrounding

area of the original image.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Note

Copy

Fax

Zoom

❒ You can change the width of the

erased margin as follows:

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Metric version

3 – 50 mm (in 1

mm steps)

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

Inch version

0.1" – 2.0" (in 0.1"

steps)

ND2L0203

❒ The default setting of the erased

margin is as follows. You can

change this settings with the user

tools. See “1. Erase Border” and “2.

Erase Center” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust

Image ¹/₂”.

æè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

C Press the [Exit] key.

B Select the [Erase Ctr./Bdr.] with the

<> keys. Then, press the [Select

]

key.

ND2C0104

ND2C0109

Border

A Press the [Border] key.

C Select the part to be erased.

Center

A Press the [Center] key.

ND2C0102

B Enter the border width with

the {Number} keys. Then press

the [OK] key.

ND2C0101

B Enter the center width with the

{

Number} keys. Then press the

[

OK] key.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new value.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter the new value.

æç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERASE CENTER/BORDER—ERASING THE CENTER AND THE BORDER

C Press the [Exit] key.

ND2C0104

D Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

ææ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO

ONE COPY

The optional document feeder is required to use this function.

You can make 1 sheet of copies from 2

or more one-sided originals.

❖

16 pages

→

booklet

❖

2 pages→

1-sided

1 2

13 16

1 2

1 4 1 5

11 10

Combine1

Combine4

❖

4 pages→

1-sided, 4 pages

→

2-sided

1: Front

2: Back

There are five types in this function.

❖

2 pages

→

1-sided

This mode makes two facing pages

on one-sided copy.

Combine2

4 pages→

1-sided

4 one-sided pages are copied on to

1 one-sided sheet.

❖

8 pages→

2-sided

4 pages

→

2-sided (Type 1 requires the

optional 8 MB copier memory unit and

duplex unit.)

4 one-sided paper are copied onto

1 two-sided sheet, 2 original imag-

es on each side.

❖

8 pages

→

2-sided (Type 1 requires the

optional 8 MB copier memory unit and

Combine3

duplex unit.)

8 one-sided pages are copied on to

1 two-sided sheet, 4 original imag-

es on each side.

æå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY

❒ The machine uses ratios in the fol-

❖

16 pages

the optional 8 MB copier memory unit

→

booklet (Type 1 requires

lowing range:

and duplex unit.)

• Type 1, Type 2

This mode makes a booklet copy of

16 pages from 16 one-sided origi-

nals.

Metric version: 25 – 400 %

Inch version: 25 – 400 %

• Type 3

Setting Originals (Originals set in the

document feeder)

Metric version: 35 – 400 %

Inch version: 32 – 400 %

• Originals reading from left to right

❒ If the calculated ratio is under the

minimum ratio, it is corrected

within the range of the ratio auto-

matically. However, with some ra-

tios, parts of the image might not

be copied or blank margins appear

on copies.

Combine5

❒ Separation line between originals

can be printed with the user tools.

See “6. Combine Copy” in⇒ P.157

“2. Adjust Image ²/₂”.

• Originals reading from top to bot-

tom

❒ Even if the direction of originals is

different from that of the copy pa-

per, the machine will automatical-

ly rotate the image by 90° to make

copies properly.

Combine6

❒ You can make copies even if the

number of originals is less than the

number required in the selected

mode. You can also disable this

function with the user tools. See “2.

Comb. Auto Eject” in ⇒ P.160 “3.

Input/Output ¹/₂”.

Limitation

❒ You cannot use this function in

Duplex mode.

❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

❒ When the number of originals

placed is less than the number

specified for combining, the last

page (s) will be copied blank as

shown in the illustration.

with this function.

❒ The machine cannot copy originals

different in size and direction.

Note

❒ The number of originals copied

(combined) can be 2, 4, 8, or 16.

❒ In this mode, the machine selects

the reproduction ratio automati-

cally. This reproduction ratio de-

pends on the copy paper sizes and

the number of originals.

æä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

❒ In the 4 pages→2-sided mode or 8

pages→2-sided mode, you can

specify the orientation of originals

([Top to Top][Top to Bottom]). See ⇒

P.88 “Specifying Orientation of

Bound Originals”.

E Select the desired combine modes

with the <> keys. Then, press

the [OK] key.

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

mode.

B Press the {Menu} key.

ND2C0109

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

F Press the [Exit] key.

Copy

Fax

G Press the [Paper] key or <> keys

Zoom

to select the copy paper.

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

H Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

C Press the [↓Next] key until the

Combine] is displayed.

[

A Set the original, then press the

{Start} key.

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

ND2C0102

Note

D Press the [Select] key.

❒ To finish copying, press the

{#} key to eject the copy.

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

A Set your originals, then press

the {Start} key.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

åí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMBINE—COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY

-Making a booklet

If you want to make a booklet from 16

originals, fold copies as shown in the

illustration.

åì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED

COPIES FROM VARIOUS ORIGINALS

You can make one-sided copies from

two facing pages of bound (book)

originals and from two-sided origi-

nals.

❖

Metric version

Original

A3L

Copy paper

A4K × 2 sheets

B5K × 2 sheets

A5K × 2 sheets

There are two types in this function:

B4L

A4L

❖

Book

→

1-Sided

You can make one-sided copies

from two facing pages of a bound

original (book).

❖

Inch version

Original

Copy paper

❖

2-Sided

ument feeder is required.)

You can make one-sided copies

from two-sided originals.

→

1-Sided (The optional doc-

8¹/₂" × 11"K × 2

sheets

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K × 2

sheets

Limitation

❒ You cannot use this function in

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

mode.

Duplex mode.

Book

→

1-Sided—Making

B Press the {Menu} key.

One-sided Copies From Two

Facing Page Of A Bound

Original (Book)

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

Note

❒ Refer to the following table when

you select original and copy paper

sizes with 100 % ratio:

åë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SERIES COPIES—MAKING ONE-SIDED COPIES FROM VARIOUS ORIGINALS

C Press the [↓Next] key until [Series

]

Without the optional document

feeder

is displayed.

A Press the [OK] key.

ND2C0102

D Select [Series] with the <> keys.

ND2C0104

Then, press the [Select] key.

E Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

ND2C0109

With the optional document

feeder

A Select the [Book

the <> keys. Then, press the

OK] key.

→

1-Sided] with

[

ND2C0109

åê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

D Select [Series] with the <> keys.

2-Sided

One-sided Copies From Two-

sided Originals

→

1-Sided—Making

Then, press the [Select] key.

The optional document feeder is required

to use this function.

ND2C0109

E Press the [OK] key.

ND2C0104

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

mode.

F Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

B Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

C Press the [↓Next] key until [Series

]

is displayed.

ND2C0102

åé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES

Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit, interchange unit, and 8 MB copier memory

unit is required to use this function.

There are three ways in this function:

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"

Inch ver-

sion

Minimum

size

❖

1-sided

→

2-sided

Weight

20 – 28 lb

This mode makes two-sided copies

from one-sided originals.

❒ When you make 2-sided copies on

B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger copy pa-

per, open the right side cover. Also

open the bypass tray, if installed.

Book

→

2-sided

This mode makes two-sided copies

from facing pages of a bound orig-

inal (book).

❖

2-sided

→

2-sided

This mode makes two-sided copies

from two-sided originals.

Limitation

❒ You cannot use the following copy

paper in this function:

ND6H0200

• Paper smaller than A5, 5¹/₂" ×

8¹/₂"

• Translucent paper

• Adhesive labels

• OHP transparencies

• Post cards

❒ You cannot use the bypass tray

with this function.

❒ The optional copier hard disk is re-

quired to make enhanced-image

copies.

Note

❒ The following paper limitations

apply:

Metric ver- Minimum

sion

size

Weight

64 – 105 g/

m²

åè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

1-Sided → 2-Sided—Making

Two-sided Copies From One-

sided Originals

-Originals and copy direction

You can select the orientation ([Top to

Top], [Top to Bottom]). See ⇒ P.88

“Specifying Orientation of Bound Origi-

nals”.

• Top to Top

Duplex1

• Top to Bottom

Note

❒ If you set an odd number of 1-sid-

ed originals in the document feed-

er (ADF), the reverse side of the

last page is left blank. You can dis-

able this function to make the de-

livered last page not be blank. See

“1. Duplex Auto Eject” in ⇒ P.160

“3. Input/Output ¹/₂”.

Duplex2

❒ When original images are copied,

the images are shifted by a width

of binding margin. You can adjust

the binding margin or binding po-

sition. You can also change their

default values. See “4. Margin Ad-

just Back” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust Im-

age ¹/₂”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES

The illustrations show the directions

of copied images on the front and

back, not the directions of delivery.

-Original direction and

completed copies

The resulting copy image will differ

according to the direction in which

you set your original (lengthwise K

or widthwise L)

A Press the {Duplex} key until the 1-

Sided→2-Sided indicator (top)

is lit.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Result ^*1

Original

Orientation

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

• [Top to

2-Sided 2-Sided

Top

]

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0102

ABC

B Set your originals.

Duplex9

Duplex5

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

ABC

• [Top to

Bottom

]

Duplex3

Reference

See ⇒ P.33 “SADF mode”

A Set the original, then press the

{

Start} key.

Duplex6

Duplex10

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

• [Top to

copied.

Top

]

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

Duplex11

Duplex7

A Set your originals, then press

• [Top to

the {Start} key.

Bottom

]

Note

Duplex4

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

Duplex12

Duplex8

åæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

D Select the desired orientation

with the <>keys. Then, press

the [OK] key.

Specifying Orientation of Bound

Originals

You can specify the orientation of

bound originals (how you turn the

pages). The default setting is [Top to

Top].

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

ND2C0109

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Orienta-

tion] is displayed.

ND2C0102

C Select the [Orientation] with the

<> keys. Then press the [Select

]

key.

ND2C0109

åå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DUPLEX—MAKING TWO-SIDED COPIES

A Press the {Duplex} key until the

Book→2-Sided indicator (cen-

ter) is lit.

Book

→

2-Sided—Making

Two-Sided Copies From

Facing Pages Of A Bound

Original (Book)

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0102

B Set your originals.

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

A Set the original, then press the

Note

{Start} key.

❒ Refer to the following table when

you select original and copy paper

sizes with 100 % ratio:

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

❖

Metric version

B Set the next original, then

Original

A3L

Copy paper

A4 (2-sided)

B5 (2-sided)

A5 (2-sided)

press the {Start} key.

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

B4L

A4L

A Set your originals, then press

❖

Inch version

the {Start} key.

Original

Copy paper

Note

8¹/₂" × 11" (2-sid-

ed)

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

11" × 17"L

8¹/₂" × 11"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" (2-sid-

ed)

åä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

When setting a stack of originals

in the document feeder

2-Sided

Two-sided Copies From Two-

sided Originals

→

2-Sided—Making

A Set your originals, then press

the {Start} key.

Note

❒ The last page should be on

the bottom.

A Press the {Duplex} key until the 2-

Sided→2-Sided indicator (bot-

tom) is lit.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0102

B Set your originals.

When setting an original on the

exposure glass or in the

document feeder

A Set the original, then press the

{Start} key.

Note

❒ Start with the first page to be

copied.

B Set the next original, then

press the {Start} key.

äí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS

COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR

INSERTING SHEETS

In this function, you can add or insert

cover or paper designate.

Front Cover—Copying Or

Adding A Front Cover

There are three types in this function:

❖

Front Cover (Type 1 requires the op-

tional bypass tray)

The first page of your originals is

copied on a specific paper sheets

for covers.

Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray

to use this function.

The first page of your originals is cop-

ied on a specific paper sheets for cov-

ers.

Both Covers (Type 1 requires the op-

tional bypass tray)

The first and last pages of your

originals are copied on specific pa-

per sheets for covers.

❖

Copy

Blank

Note

Paper Designate

Any specified page of your origi-

nals is copied on specific paper

sheets for slip sheet.

Note

❒ The cover or slip sheets should be

identical in size and direction with

the copy paper.

❒ If Blank Cover mode is selected,

the cover will not be counted as a

copy.

❒ The optional 8 MB copier memory

unit is required to make 2 or more

sets of copies on Type 1.

❒ You can specify whether to make a

copy on a sheet for covers. If you

select [Copy], the first page will be

copied on the cover sheet. If you

select [Blank], a cover sheet will just

be inserted before the first copy.

äì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

A Press the {Menu} key.

E Specify whether to copy on a cov-

er sheet with the <> keys. Then,

press the [OK] key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

ND2C0109

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Cover/

F Press the [Exit] key.

Ppr.Des.] is displayed.

C Press the [Select] key.

ND2C0104

G Set cover sheets on the bypass

tray.

H Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

ND2C0104

D Press the [Front] key.

ND2C0101

äë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS

A Press the {Menu} key.

Both Covers—Copying Or

Adding Front And Back

Covers

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray

to use this function.

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

The first and last pages of your origi-

nals are copied on specific paper

sheets for covers.

ND2L0203

❖

Copy

Blank

Note

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Cover/

Ppr. Des.] is displayed.

ND2C0102

C Press the [Select] key.

❒ You can specify whether to make a

ND2C0104

copy on a cover sheet. If you select

[Copy], the first and last pages will

D Press the [Both] key.

be copied on the cover sheets. If

you select [Blank], a cover sheet

will just be inserted before the first

copy and another sheet after the

last copy.

ND2C0102

äê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

E Specify whether to copy on a cov-

er sheet with the <> keys. Then,

press the [OK] key.

Paper Designate—Copying

Designated Pages Of Originals

Onto Slip Sheets

Any specified page of your originals

is copied on specific paper sheets for

slip sheet.

ND2C0109

F Press the [Exit] key.

Note

ND2C0104

❒ You can specify up to 10 page

numbers.

G Set cover sheets on the bypass

❒ Before using this function, set the

special paper tray for slip sheets

using the user tools. See “09. Slip

Sheet Tray” in ⇒ P.153 “1. General

Features ³/₄”.

tray.

H Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

äé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COVER/PAPER DESIGNATE—ADDING OR INSERTING SHEETS

Note

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Cover/

Ppr. Des.] is displayed.

C Press the [Select] key.

D Press the [Ppr. Des.] key.

Note

❒ To change the value entered,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter the new value.

F To specify another page number,

repeat Step E.

G When you finish specifying the

page number (s), press the [OK

]

ND2C0102

ND2C0104

ND2C0103

key.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ To change the number entered,

select the desired item with the

<> keys, then enter the new

number.

H Press the [Exit] key.

❒ If your machine is not equipped

with the bypass tray, the dis-

play above does not appear. Go

to Step E.

ND2C0104

I Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

E Enter the page number you want

to copy onto a slip sheet with the

{

Number} keys. Then, press the

} key.

{

äè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING

SLIP SHEET

Type 1 requires the optional bypass tray.

Whenever a different original is cop-

A If Duplex mode is selected, press

ied in OHP Slip Sheet mode, a slip

the {Duplex} key to cancel the

sheet will be placed after each copy,

mode.

or a slip sheet will be fed and the

same original image is copied onto

B Press the {Menu} key.

this slip sheet.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

❖

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

❖

Blank

C Press the [↓Next] key until [OHP

Slip Sheet] is displayed.

Limitation

ND2C0102

❒ You cannot use this function in

Duplex mode.

D Select the [OHP Slip Sheet] with the

<> keys. Then, press the [Select

]

Note

key.

❒ Set slip sheets of the same size and

in the same orientation as OHP

transparencies.

❒ You can specify whether to make

copies onto the inserted slip sheets.

❒ If you do not copy onto a slip sheet,

the sheet is excluded from the

number of copies counted.

ND2C0109

äç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OHP SLIP SHEET—COPYING OR INSERTING SLIP SHEET

E Specify whether to copy on a slip

sheet with the <> keys. Then,

press the [OK] key.

ND2C0109

F Set OHP transparencies in the by-

pass tray.

G Set the slip sheets in the paper

tray, then select this tray pressing

the [Paper] key or the <> keys.

H Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

äæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

POSITIVE/NEGATIVE—COPYING IN

COMPLEMENTALY COLORS

If you use a black and white original,

C Press the [Select] key.

black and white areas of the original

are reversed.

ND2C0104

D Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Posi-

tive/Negative] is displayed.

ND2C0102

äå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE

You can copy the original image re-

peatedly, or make two copies of the

same image on one sheet.

❒ You cannot use the bypass tray for

the Double Copies function.

Note

There are two types in this function:

❒ Two copy images appear vertically

on K paper for L originals, and

horizontally on L paper for K

originals.

❖

Double Copies

The one original image is copied

twice on one copy.

❒ You can insert separate lines be-

tween repeated images. See “5.

Double Copy” in ⇒ P.157 “2. Ad-

just Image ²/₂”.

Image Repeat

The original image is copied re-

peatedly.

❒ Refer to the following table when

you select original and copy paper

sizes with 100 % ratio:

Double Copies—Copying The

Image Twice On One Page

❖

Metric version

The one original image is copied

twice on one copy as shown in the il-

lustration.

Original size and Copy paper size

direction

A5L

B6L

and direction

A4K

B5K

A4K

A5K

B6K

A3L

A4L

B5L

❖

Inch version

Original size and Copy paper size

direction

and direction

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"K

8¹/₂" × 11"K

8¹/₂" × 11"L

Limitation

11" × 17"L

❒ The following originals cannot be

detected properly on the exposure

glass. Be sure to select the copy pa-

per manually or set the originals in

the optional document feeder.

Metric version

Inch version

A5L, B6L

5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

ää

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

A Press the {Menu} key.

Image Repeat—Repeating An

Image Over The Entire Copy

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

The original image is copied repeat-

edly.

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Image

Repeat] is displayed.

Note

❒ The number of repeated images

depends on the original size, copy

paper size, and reproduction ratio.

Refer to the following table.

ND2C0102

❖

Original: 5¹/₂"

paper: 8¹/₂"

8¹/₂"

11"L

8¹/₂"K/Copy

C Select [Image Repeat] with the <>

11"Kor Original: 5¹/

keys. Then, press the [Select] key.

/Copy paper 8¹/₂"

4 repeats (71 %)

16 repeats (35 %)

ND2C0109

D Press the [OK] key.

Repeat1

Repeat2

ND2C0104

E Set your originals, then press the

{Start} key.

ìíí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMAGE REPEAT—REPEATING AN IMAGE

❖

Original: 5¹/₂"

paper: 8¹/₂"

8¹/₂"

11"K

8¹/₂"K/Copy

C Press the [↓Next] key until [Image

11"Lor Original: 5¹/

Repeat] is displayed.

/Copy paper 8¹/₂"

2 repeats

(100 %)

8 repeats

(50 %)

32 repeats

(25 %)

ND2C0102

D Select [Image Repeat] with the <>

keys. Then, press the [Select] key.

Repeat3

Repeat4

Repeat5

❒ Part of a repeated image might not

be copied depending on copy pa-

per size, copy paper direction or

reproduction ratio.

ND2C0109

❒ You can insert separate lines be-

tween repeated images. See “7. Im-

age Repeat” in⇒ P.157 “2. Adjust

Image ²/₂”.

E Select [Image Repeat] with the <>

keys. Then, press the [OK] key.

A Select the size of the copy paper

and the reproduction ratio.

B Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

ND2C0109

Zoom

F Set your original, then press the

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

{

Start} key.

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

ìíì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF

YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY

The optional copier hard disk is required to use this function.

You can store images you frequently

use, and recall and copy them any

time.

❒ The stored images are not cleared

by turning the power off or by

pressing the {Clear Modes/Energy

Saver} key. They are canceled only

when you delete or overwrite

them.

There are four types in this function:

❖

Storing The Images

Stores image pages you frequently

use.

Deleting The Stored Images

Deletes a set of image pages al-

ready stored.

Printing A List Of The Stored Images

Makes a combined copy of each

first page of all the stored files (8

pages into one 1-sided, or 16 pages

into one 2-sided).

❖

Recalling The Stored Images

Recalls a set of stored image pages

and copies them onto the A4, 8¹/₂"

× 11" copy paper.

Note

❒ The maximum capacity is 16 files

or 32 pages. If you store more than

two pages in one file, the maxi-

mum number of files might be less

than 16.

❒ Image pages to be stored should be

A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"Ksize.

❒ The functions that can be stored

are as follows:

• 1-sided copy or 2-sided copy

• Type of originals

• Image density

❒ Set your originals on the exposure

glass.

ìíë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY

D Press the [Store] key.

Storing The Images

You can store images you frequently

use.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

ND2C0101

Copy

Fax

Zoom

E Select the file number you want

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

to store the images in with the

<> keys. Then, press the [OK

]

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

key.

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Archive

File] is displayed.

ND2C0109

Note

❒ File numbers with m already

have images in them.

ND2C0102

To overwrite images already

stored

C Select [Archive File] with the <>

keys. Then, press the [Select] key.

A Check the stored content, and

select whether to overwrite it.

Note

❒ You can check the stored

content by printing a list of

the stored images. See ⇒

P.106 “Printing A List Of The

Stored Images”.

ND2C0109

B Press the [Yes] key to overwrite

the images, or press the [No

key not to overwrite them.

]

ìíê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

Note

H Press the [OK] key.

❒ When you overwrite with an-

other images, the previously

stored images will be lost.

F Select the type of originals with

the <> keys. Then, press the

[OK] key.

ND2C0104

ND2C0109

Note

❒ If you are using Type 1 without

the duplex unit installed, the

display above does not appear.

Go to Step G.

G Set your originals on the exposure

glass, then press the {Start} key.

The images will be scanned.

Note

❒ If you have more than one orig-

inal pages, repeat the steps

above.

❒ Start with the first page of your

originals.

CP138BEE

1: Reference position

ìíé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY

D Press the [Delete] key.

Deleting The Stored Images

You can delete images already stored.

Note

❒ Images are deleted on a file basis.

A Press the {Menu} key.

ND2C0102

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

E Select the file number you want

Copy

Fax

Zoom

to delete the images in with the

<> keys. Then, press the [OK

]

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

key.

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L0203

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Archive

File] is displayed.

ND2C0109

F Press the [Yes] key.

ND2C0102

C Select [Archive File] with the <>

keys. Then, press the [Select] key.

ND2C0103

Note

❒ To cancel deletion, press the

No] key.

[

G Press the [Exit] key.

ND2C0109

ND2C0103

ìíè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

D Press the [List] key.

Printing A List Of The Stored

Images

You can make a combined copy of

each first page of all the stored files (8

pages into one 1-sided, or 16 pages

into one 2-sided).

ND2C0103

Note

❒ If any file number has nothing

stored, its page will be copied in

blank with no image or number.

E Select the

[

8pages

→

1sided

]

[

16pages

→

2sided] with the <>

keys.

A Press the {Menu} key.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

ND2C0105

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

Note

❒ [16pages

→

2sided] is not avail-

ND2L0203

able, if your machine is Type 1

without the duplex unit.

B Press the [↓Next] key until [Archive

File] is displayed.

F Press the {Start} key.

ND2C0102

C Select [Archive File] with the <>

keys. Then, press the [Select] key.

ND2C0109

ìíç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARCHIVE FILE—STORING THE IMAGES OF YOUR ORIGINALS INTO MEMORY

D Select the desired file number

Recalling The Stored Images

with the <> keys.

You can recall stored images to copy

them onto A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" paper.

Note

❒ Copies are made on a file basis.

A Press the {Menu} key.

ND2C0105

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Note

Copy

Fax

Zoom

❒ Only files with m contain im-

ages.

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

E Enter the number of copies with

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

the {Number} keys.

Note

ND2L0203

❒ The maximum number of cop-

ies is 99.

B Press the [↓Next] key until the [Ar-

chive File] is displayed.

F Press the {Start} key.

ND2C0102

C Select the [Archive File] with the

<> keys. Then, press the [Select

]

key.

ND2C0109

ìíæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

COMBINATION CHART

The combination chart given below shows which modes can be used together.

When you read the chart, please refer to the following table.

✩

means that these modes can be used together.

→

means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode

after you select will be the mode you're working in.

means that these modes cannot be used together. The mode

before you select will be the mode you're working in.

The following shows the combinations of functions.

Mode after you Select

Selecting

Copy Paper

✩

Auto Paper Select

✩

→

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

Enhanced Image

Copy

✩

→

✩

→

✩

Sort

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

Rotate Sort/

Rotate Stack

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

✩

→

Shift Sort/

Shift Stack

→

✩

→

Staple

→

✩

Copying From The

Bypass Tray

✩

→

✩

Preset Reduce/

Enlarge

✩

→

Zoom

→

✩

→

Directional Size

Magnification (inch)

→

✩

→

Directional Magnifi-

cation (%)

→

✩

Margin Adjustment

✩

Erase Centre/

Border

✩

ìíå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMBINATION CHART

Mode after you Select

2 pages → 1-

✩

→

✩

sided

4 pages → 1-

sided

→

4 pages → 2-

sided

→

8 pages → 2-

sided

→

16 pages →

booklet

→

Book → 1-sid-

✩

2-sided → 1-

sided

✩

→

✩

1-sided → 2-

✩

→

✩

sided

Book →

2-sided

→

✩

→

2-sided → 2-

sided

→

✩

Cover/

Page Designate

✩

OHP Slip Sheet

✩

Positive/Negative

✩

→

Double

Copies

✩

Image Repeat

Interrupt

✩

→

✩

Available if the optional copier hard disk is installed.

When you select the mode after you select, the machine returns to Auto Reduce/En-

large mode. However, you can select the mode before you select again.

The Paper Designate function is available. The optional copier hard disk is required

to use the Cover function.

ìíä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPYING

ììí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING

GOES WRONG

IF YOUR MACHINE DOES NOT OPERATE AS

YOU WANT

Message

Machine's Condition

The machine instructs you The machine is warming

to wait. up.

Problem/Cause

Action

Wait for the machine to

warm-up.

Reference

You can use Auto Start

mode during warm-up

period. See ⇒ P.64 “Au-

to Start—Entering Copy

Job Settings During The

Warm-up Period”

The machine cannot detect Improper original is set.

Set non-standard size orig-

the original size.

See ⇒ P.21 “Sizes Difficult inal on the exposure glass.

To Detect”.

Input the both horizontal

and vertical sizes of the

non-standard original. See

⇒ P.31 “Setting Originals

On The Exposure Glass”.

Select paper manually, not

in Auto Paper Select mode.

Do not use Auto Reduce/

Enlarge mode.

Original is not set.

Set your originals.

The machine instructs you There is no copy paper that Set the original in the same

to check the original direc- is the same direction as the direction as the copy paper.

tion.

The machine instructs you Improper original size is

to check paper size. set.

originals.

Select the proper paper

size.

The machine cannot staple --

this size paper.

Select the proper paper size

that can be used in Staple

mode. See ⇒ P.49 “Staple”

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

Machine's Condition

Problem/Cause

Action

You cannot enter the de-

sired copy set number.

The number of copies ex-

ceeds the maximum copy mum copy quantity that

quantity.

You can change the maxi-

you can make at a time. See

“05. Maximum copy quan-

tity” in ⇒ P.152 “1. General

Features ²/₄”

The machine instructs you --

to set the duplex tray.

Reset the duplex tray cor-

rectly. See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To

Components”.

The machine instructs you The right cover of the du- When you make 2-sided

to open the right side cover plex unit is not open.

copies on B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or

of the duplex unit.

larger copy paper, open the

right cover of the duplex

unit. See ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—

Making Two-Sided Copies”.

Display

Problem

Cause

Action

The panel display is off.

The machine is in Energy

Saver mode.

Press the {Clear Modes/Ener-

gy Saver} key to cancel En-

ergy Saver mode.

The operation switch is

turned off.

Turn on the operation

switch.

Nothing happens when the The main power switch is Turn on the main power

operation switch is turned turned off.

on.

switch. See ⇒ P.2 “Guide To

Components”

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

Problem

Cause

Action

Copies appear dirty.

The image density is too

dark.

Adjust the image density.

⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Im-

age Density”.

Auto Image Density is not Select Auto Image Density.

selected.

The reverse side of an orig- The image density is too

inal image is copied. dark.

Adjust the image density.

⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Im-

age Density”.

Auto Image Density is not Select Auto Image Density.

selected.

A shadow appears on cop- The image density is too

Adjust the image density.

⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Im-

age Density”.

ies if you use the pasted

originals.

dark.

Change the direction of the

original.

Put mending tape on the

pasted part.

The same copy area is dirty The exposure glass, platen Clean them. ⇒ P.169 “Main-

whenever making copies. cover, or document feeder taining Your Machine”.

belt is dirty.

Copies are too light.

The image density is too

light.

Adjust the image density.

⇒ P.37 “Adjusting Copy Im-

age Density”.

Damp or rough grain pa-

per is used.

Use dry paper without

rough grain.

Toner cartridge is almost

empty.

Add toner. ⇒ P.121 “D

Adding Toner”.

Parts of the image are not The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. ⇒

copied.

rectly.

An improper paper size is Select the proper paper

selected. size.

The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. ⇒

rectly. P.31 “Setting Originals”.

P.31 “Setting Originals”.

Copies are blank.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

Problem

Cause

Action

A moire pattern is pro-

duced on copies.

Your original has dot pat- Place the original on the ex-

tern image or many lines.

posure glass at a slight an-

gle.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU

WANT

Problem

Cause

Action

Copies are not stapled.

There are jammed staples Remove jammed staples.

in the stapler.

See ⇒ P.139 “eRemoving

Jammed Staples”.

Note

❒ After removing jammed

staples, staples might

not be ejected the first

few times you try to use

the stapler.

The number of copies ex-

ceeds the capacity of the

stapler.

Check the stapler capacity.

See ⇒ P.49 “Staple”.

Staples are wrongly posi-

tioned.

Originals are not set cor-

rectly.

Set originals correctly. See

⇒ P.49 “Staple”.

Misfeeds occur frequently. Copy paper size setting is Set the proper paper size.

not correct.

See ⇒ P.132 “Changing The

Paper Size”.

You cannot combine sever- Selected functions cannot

Refer to the combination

chart. See ⇒ P.108 “Combi-

nation Chart”.

al functions.

be used together.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

Adjust Image

Problem

Cause

Action

In Double Copies mode,

Combination of original

Select the proper original

parts of the original image and copy paper is not cor- and copy paper. See ⇒ P.20

are not copied.

rect.

“Originals”.

In Center/Border mode,

parts of the original image margin.

are not copied.

You set the wide erased

Set the narrow margin with

the user tools. See “1. Erase

Border” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Ad-

Your original has narrow

margins on four sides.

just Image ¹/₂”. See “2. Erase

Center” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Ad-

just Image ¹/₂”.

In Margin Adjustment

mode, parts of the original margin.

image are not copied.

You set the wide erased

Set the narrow margin with

the user tools. See “3.

Marg.Adj.Front” in ⇒

P.155 “2. Adjust Image ¹/₂”.

See “4. Margin Adjust

Back” in ⇒ P.155 “2. Adjust

Image ¹/₂”.

In Image Repeat mode, the You selected the same size Select copy paper larger

original image is not cop-

ied repeatedly.

copy paper as originals,

and did not select the prop- P.99 “Image Repeat—Repeat-

er reproduction ratio.

than the originals. See ⇒

ing An Image”.

Select the proper reproduc-

tion ratio. See ⇒ P.99 “Im-

age Repeat—Repeating An

Image”.

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Combine

Problem

Cause

Action

You cannot make a booklet Combine Original Booklet Change the setting.⇒ P.78

from 16 originals by fold-

ing copies.

Format is not correct.

“Combine—Combining

Originals Into One Copy”

Parts of the image are not You specified an improper When you specify a repro-

copied. reproduction ratio that duction ratio using Manual

does not meet the sizes of Paper Select mode, make

your originals and copy pa- sure the ratio matches your

per.

originals and the copy pa-

per.

Note

❒ Select the correct repro-

duction ratio before us-

ing Combine mode.

Your originals are not iden- Use originals that are iden-

tical in size and direction. tical in size and direction.

Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the in- When setting a stack of

rect.

correct order.

original in the document

feeder, the last page should

be on the bottom.

If you set an original on the

exposure glass, start with

the first page to be copied.

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

Duplex

Problem

Cause

Action

Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the in- When setting a stack of

rect.

correct order.

originals in the document

feeder, the last page should

be on the bottom.

If you set an original on the

exposure glass, start with

the first page to be copied.

Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an in- Select the correct orienta-

to Top, or Top to Bottom) is correct direction or the ori- tion, or set originals cor-

not correct.

entation Setting is

incorrect.

rectly. ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—

Making Two-Sided Copies”

Note

❒ If you set A3, 11" × 17"

or B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" origi-

nals asshown below, for

example, take one of the

two actions described

below the illustration.

❒ Select [Top to Bottom] to

make copies in “Top to

Top” orientation. Select

[

Top to Top] to make cop-

ies in “Top to Bottom”

orientation.

❒ Alternate the originals

as shown below when

setting them.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B LOADING PAPER

Note

❒ If you want to change the paper

size, see ⇒ P.132 “Changing The Pa-

per Size”.

❒ Shuffle the paper before setting

it in the tray.

❒ Make sure that the leading cor-

ners of the paper are under the

corners.

Reference

Regarding paper types and sizes

that can be set, see ⇒ P.23 “Copy

Paper”.

D Reinstall the back fence.

E Push the paper tray in until it

A Pull out the paper tray until it

stops.

B Remove the back fence.

ND5T0802

C Square the paper and set it in the

tray.

ND5T0801

Important

❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

C Place the paper in the tray along

Loading Paper In The Large

Capacity Tray

the edge on the left.

A Press the {Down} key if it is not lit.

The key blinks while the bottom

plate is moving down.

ND6L0600

Note

❒ The Tray contains up to 1,500

sheets.

ND6L04EE

D Close the top cover.

1: Down key

B When the key stops blinking and

lights up, open the top cover.

ND6L0500

Note

❒ Make sure no paper sheet is in-

volved in the feeding part of the

Large Capacity Tray. Remove

the sheet, if any.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ADDING TONER

When D is displayed, it is time to supply toner.

R WARNING:

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust

might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the

used toner containers according to local regulations for

plastics.

R CAUTION:

• Do not eat or swallow toner.

• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of

children.

R CAUTION:

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

Important

❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, a fault might occur.

❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your set-

tings are cleared.

❒ Always add toner after the machine instructs you to add toner.

❒ Do not use used toner. This will damage the machine.

Note

❒ You can still make about 50 copies after the D appears, but replace the toner

early to prevent poor copy quality.

Reference

Regarding toner storage, see ⇒ P.27 “Toner Storage”.

•

1: Open the front cover of the machine.

2: Lift the green holder.

Toner1

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

•

3: Push the green lever, and gently pull

out the holder.

Toner2

•

4: Press the toner bottle backward to

raise its head, then gently pull out the

bottle.

Toner3

•

5: Hold a new bottle horizontally and

shake it 5 or 6 times.

Note

❒ Do not remove the black cap when

shaking.

•

6: Remove the black cap.

Toner4

Note

❒ Do not remove the inner cap.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

D ADDING TONER

•

7: Put the toner bottle on the holder,

then press its head forward.

Toner5

•

8: Push the holder until it clicks.

9: Push down the green holder.

10: Close the front cover of the ma-

chine.

Toner6

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

x CLEARING MISFEEDS

ND4X0200

R CAUTION:

• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section be-

cause it could be very hot.

Important

❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your

copy settings are cleared.

❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the ma-

chine.

❒ If paper misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.

Note

❒ More than one misfed areas may be indicated. In this case, check every appli-

cable area. Refer to the following charts: A, B, C, D, E, R, P, U, Y, Z.

❒ You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside of the

front cover, upper side of the finisher.

❒ When the machine instructs you to reset originals, reset your originals to the

feeding position.

The display will indicate the number of originals you should return.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x CLEARING MISFEEDS

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

When D is lit

5. Remove misfed paper.

6. Close the covers.

2. Remove misfed paper.

3. Close the cover.

1. Open the right cover of

the interchange unit to

the left.

4. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, open the

bottom covers of the

interchange unit.

When B is lit

2. Push up the lever and

open the cover.

1. Open the duplex unit.

3. Open the front cover of

the main frame.

4. Turn knob B

counterclockwise and

remove misfed paper.

When A is lit

1. Open the duplex unit.

2. Push up the lever and

open the cover.

3. Push handle A2 to the

left and remove misfed

paper.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x CLEARING MISFEEDS

When E is lit

2. Remove misfed paper.

1. Open the cover.

When C is lit

3. Open the front cover of

2. Push up the lever and

open the cover.

1. Open the duplex unit.

the main frame.

4. Turn knob C clockwise

and remove misfed

paper.

4. If you cannot remove misfed paper, open

the cover.

5. Turn knob A1 downward. 6. Push handle A2 to the

7. Open the bypass tray

and remove misfed

paper.

left and remove misfed

paper.

If your machine is equipped with the large

capacity tray, slide it to the right.

You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.

ND4X0302

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

When R is lit

3000-sheet finisher

When R1, R2, or R3 is lit

1. Open the front cover of

the finisher.

3. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, hold down

handle R2 and remove

misfed paper.

4. Hold up handle R3 and

remove misfed paper.

2. Hold up handle R1 and

remove misfed paper.

When R4, R5, or R6 is lit

1. Open the front cover of

the finisher.

3. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, hold up

handle R5 and remove

misfed paper.

4. Hold handle R6 and pull

out the staple unit, then

remove misfed paper.

2. Push handle R4 to the

left and remove misfed

paper.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x CLEARING MISFEEDS

1000-sheet finisher

4. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, pull out

the front cover and

1. Remove misfed paper.

2. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, open the

top cover.

3. Remove misfed paper.

remove misfed paper.

You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.

ND4X0402

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

When P is lit

2. Open the left cover of

the document feeder,

3. If the misfed original

does not come out, turn

the lever and remove it.

1. Open the right cover of

the document feeder,

remove misfed originals.

When Y is lit

1. Open the right cover of the paper tray unit.

If your machine is equipped with the large

capacity tray, slide it to the right and open

the right cover of the paper tray unit.

2. Remove misfed paper.

When U is lit

4. If you cannot remove

misfed paper, remove

misfed paper from the

left side of the large

capacity tray.

1. Slide the large capacity

tray to the right.

2. Open the top cover of

the large capacity tray.

3. Remove misfed paper.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

x CLEARING MISFEEDS

When Z is lit

1. Open the duplex unit.

2. Open cover Z1 and

remove misfed paper.

3. If you cannot find misfed

paper, open cover Z2 and

remove misfed paper.

You can make an enlarged copy of this page and stick it on wall.

ND4X0502

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

Important

Note

❒ Make sure to select paper size with

the user tools. Otherwise, misfeeds

might occur.

❒ A screwdriver is contained in

the front area of the top tray.

D Re-position the side fences to the

Reference

paper size you want to use.

For paper sizes, weight, and capac-

ity that can be set in each tray, see

⇒ P.23 “Copy Paper”.

A Make sure that the paper tray is

not being used.

B Pull the paper tray, then lift and

remove it.

ND5T1100

E Fasten the fences with screws.

ND5T0900

Note

❒ Remove any remaining copy

ND5T1001

paper.

F Adjust the back fence to the new

C Remove the screws fastening the

paper size.

side fences using the screwdriver.

ND5T1200

ND5T10EE

1: Screwdriver

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

Note

Reference

❒ For 11" × 17" paper, put the back

For details, see “User Tools

(System Settings)” in the Sys-

tem Settings .

fence inside A.

G Square the paper and set it in the

tray.

ND5T0801

Important

❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-

it mark.

Note

❒ Shuffle the paper before setting

it in the tray.

❒ Make sure the leading corners

of the paper are under the cor-

ners.

H Push the paper tray in until it

stops.

I Select the paper size with the user

tools.

To adjust the paper size

A Press the {User Tools/Counter

}

key.

B Enter “1” with the {Number

}

key.

C Press the [↓Next] key twice.

D Enter “1” and “1” with the

Number} key.

{

E Select your desired size. Then,

press the [OK] key.

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

dADDING STAPLES

R CAUTION:

• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier's

parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these

specified supplies.

Important

❒ If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or

staple jams might occur.

1000-Sheet Finisher

•

1: Open the front cover.

fin101EE

fin102EE

fin103EE

2: Remove the cartridge.

3: Take out the empty refill in the ar-

row direction.

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

dADDING STAPLES

•

4: Push in the new refill until it clicks.

fin104EE

fin105EE

fin106EE

5: Pull out the ribbon.

6: Reinstall the cartridge.

7: Close the front cover.

fin107EE

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

3000-Sheet Finisher

•

1: Open the front cover of the finisher.

2: Pull out the staple unit.

•

fin301EE

•

3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.

fin302EE

•

4: Pull out the cartridge gently.

fin303EE

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

dADDING STAPLES

•

5: Take out the empty refill in the direc-

tion of the arrow.

fin304EE

fin305EE

fin306EE

6: Align the arrows on the new refill

and the cartridge, then push in the re-

fill until it clicks.

7: Pull out the ribbon.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

•

8: Reinstall the cartridge.

fin307EE

•

9: Press down the cartridge until it

clicks.

fin308EE

•

10: Bring the staple unit back into

place.

11: Close the front cover of the finisher.

fin309EE

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

eREMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

Note

❒ Staples might be jammed because of curled copies. In this case, try turning the

copy paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy pa-

per with less curls.

❒ After removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few

times you try to use the stapler.

1000-Sheet Finisher

•

1: Open the front cover.

2: Remove the cartridge.

3: Open the face plate.

fin108EE

fin109EE

fin110EE

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

•

4: Remove the jammed staples.

5: Reinstall the cartridge.

6: Close the front cover.

fin111EE

•

fin112EE

•

fin113EE

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

eREMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

3000-Sheet Finisher

•

1: Open the front cover of the finisher.

2: Pull out the staple unit.

fin310EE

•

3: Lift the cartridge until it clicks.

fin311EE

4: Pull out the cartridge gently.

fin312EE

5: Open the face plate by pressing the

lock on the right.

fin313EE

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

•

6: Remove the jammed staples.

fin314EE

•

7: Close the face plate by pressing it un-

til it clicks.

fin315EE

•

8: Reinstall the cartridge.

fin316EE

•

9: Press down the cartridge until it

clicks.

fin317EE

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

eREMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

•

10: Bring the staple unit back into

place.

11: Close the front cover of the finisher.

fin318EE

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

yREMOVING PUNCH WASTE

Note

D Close the front cover of the finish-

er.

❒ While the ^yindicator is lit, you

cannot use the punch function.

The ^yindicator goes off.

A Open the front cover of the 3000-

Note

sheet finisher.

❒ If the indicator is still lit, rein-

stall the punch waste box .

ND7B2600

B Pull out the punch waste box and

remove punch waste.

ND7B2700

C Reinstall the punch waste box.

ND7B2701

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. USER TOOLS (COPY

FEATURES)

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY

FEATURES)

This section is for the key operators in

C Enter the number of the desired

change of this machine. You can

User Tools menu with the {Num-

change or set the machine's default

ber} keys.

settings.

Preparation

After using the user tools, be sure

to exit from user tools.

Reference

Note

Regarding about the user tools for

system setting, see “Accessing The

User Tools (System Settings)” in

the System Settings.

❒ To return to the previous menu,

press the [Menu] key.

D Search for the desired setting

with the [↓Next ] key. Enter its

number with the {Number} keys.

Regarding the user tools for the fax

mode, see each Operating Instruc-

tions.

Note

❒ [↓Next ]: Press to go to the next

A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

page.

❒ [↑Prev.]: Press to go back to the

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

previous page.

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

Reference

User Tools / Counter

See ⇒ P.145 “USER TOOLS

(COPY FEATURES)”.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L0103

E Change the settings by following

the instructions on the panel dis-

play. Then, press the [OK] key.

B Enter {2} with the {Number} key.

Reference

See ⇒ P.150 “Settings You Can

Change With The User Tools”.

Note

❒ [OK] key: Press to set the new

settings and return to the previ-

ous menu.

ìéè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

❒ [Cancel] key: Press to return to

the previous menu without

changing any data.

Exiting From User Tools

A After changing the user tools set-

tings, press the

{User Tools/

Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

ND2L0103

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

Note

❒ The settings are not canceled

even if the operation switch is

turned off or the {Clear Modes/

Energy Saver} key is pressed.

ìéç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

ìéæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)

1 General Features 1/4

1 General Features 2/4

1 General Features 3/4

1 General Features 4/4

ìéå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS MENU (COPY FEATURES)

2 Adjust Image 1/2

2 Adjust Image 2/2

4 Shortcut Keys

3 Input / Output 1/3

3 Input / Output 2/3

3 Input / Output 3/3

ND0X0301

ìéä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE

USER TOOLS

Reference

For how to access the user tools, see ⇒ P.145 “Accessing The User Tools (Copy

Features)”.

1. General Features ¹/₄

Description

01. APS Priority

As a default setting, Auto Paper Select is selected. You can

cancel this setting.

Note

❒ Default: Yes

02. AID Priority

In each mode of Text, Text·Photo, Photo, Copied Original,

and Low Density Original, you can specify whether to select

Auto Image Density.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Text: Yes

Text·Photo: No

Photo: No

Copied Original: Yes

Low Density Original: Yes

03. Original Priority

As a default setting, Text is selected as original Type. You

can change it to Text·Photo, Photo, Copied Original, or Low

Density Original.

Note

❒ Default: Text

ìèí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

Description

04. Show All Keys

You can specify whether all the keys are displayed. If you

change the default setting to [No], the display shows as fol-

lows:

Note

❒ Default: Yes

ìèì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

1. General Features ²/₄

Description

05. Max. Copy Q'ty

The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.

Note

❒ Default: 999

06. Original Beeper

The beeper (key tone) sounds when you forgot to remove

originals after copying.

Note

❒ Default: On

❒ If the Panel beeper setting is set to Off, (see “System Set-

tings”), the beeper does not sound irrespective of the set-

ting (On or Off) of this Original Beeper function.

07. Photo Mode

You can select the image quality when you select Photo

mode with the {Original Type} key or Enhanced Image Copy

mode.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Enhanced image: OFF: Coarse

Enhanced image: ON: Normal

08. Reproduction Ratio Up to 2 reproduction ratios which you frequently use can be

registered.

ìèë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

1. General Features ³/₄

Description

09. Slip Sheet Tray

You can select a special tray for slip sheets.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Machine with bypass tray: Bypass

Machine without bypass tray: None

10. Duplex Priority

11. Auto Reset

You can select the type of the Duplex function to be effective

when the machine is turned on, Energy Saver mode is off, or

Auto Reset is on.

Note

❒ Default: 1-Sided → 2-Sided

The machine returns to its initial condition automatically af-

ter your job is finished. The time can be set from 10 to 180

seconds.

Note

❒ Default: 60 seconds

12. Density Pattern

You can change density levels.

ìèê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

1. General Features ⁴/₄

Description

13. Initial Mode Set

You can select the initial mode or Program No. 10 as the

mode to be effective when modes are cleared.

Note

❒ Default: Initial

14. Management Setting

You can change settings for user access limitation for copier functions.

Counter Reset

You can check the number of copies made under each user

code. You can also reset each user code's counter to 0.

Note

❒ If more than one user code is registered, you can view all

the counters using the [↑Prev.] or [↓Next ] key.

Clear Code/Counter

Reg. User Code

You can delete all user codes or reset all counters to 0.

You can register user codes.

Note

❒ Up to 50 user codes (8 digits or less) can be registered.

Chg/Del User Code

Counter List Print

You can change or delete user codes.

Note

❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added

to that made under the new user code.

❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is

also deleted.

You can print a list of counters shown by user code.

Note

❒ To stop the printing, press the [Cancel] key.

ìèé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

2. Adjust Image ¹/₂

Description

1. Erase Border

The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the

Erase Border mode can be changed as follows:

•

Metric version: 3 – 50 mm in 1 mm steps

Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: 10 mm

Inch version: 0.4"

2. Erase Center

The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the

Erase Center mode can be changed as follows:

•

Metric version: 3 – 50 mm in 1 mm steps

Inch version: 0.1 – 2.0" in 0.1" steps

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: 10 mm

Inch version: 0.4"

3. Marg. Adj. Front

You can adjust the margin width on the front side of copies

in Margin Adjust mode. You can change this setting as fol-

lows:

•

Metric version: 0 – 30 mm in 1 mm steps

Inch version: 0 – 1.0" in 0.1" steps

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: 5 mm

Inch version: 0.2"

ìèè

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

Description

4. Margin Adjust Back You can specify a binding margin on the back side of copies

for the following modes: 1-Sided → 2-Sided, Book → 2-Sid-

ed, and 2-Sided → 2-sided.

You can change this setting as follows:

•

Metric version: 0 – 30 mm in 1 mm steps

Inch version: 0 – 1.0" in 0.1" steps

Limitation

❒ Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Metric version: 5 mm

Inch version: 0.2"

ìèç

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

2. Adjust Image ²/₂

Description

5. Double Copy

You can select a separation line in Double Copy mode from

no line, Solid line, Broken line, or Crop marks.

•

None

Solid

Broken Line

Crop Marks

Note

❒ Default: None (no line)

ìèæ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

Description

6. Combine Copy

You can select a separation line in Combine mode from no

line, Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop marks.

•

None

Solid

Broken Line 1

Broken Line 2

Crop Marks

Note

❒ Default: None (no line)

ìèå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

Description

7. Image Repeat

You can select a separation line in Image Repeat mode from

no line, Solid line, Broken line 1, Broken line 2, or Crop

marks.

•

None

Solid

Broken Line 1

Broken Line 2

Crop Marks

Note

❒ Default: None (no line)

8. Booklet: Original

You can select type of originals for “16 pages → booklet”.

See ⇒ P.78 “Combine—Combining Originals Into One Copy”.

Limitation

❒ Type 1 requires the optional 8MB copier memory unit

and duplex unit.

Note

❒ Default: Portrait

ìèä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

3. Input/Output ¹/₂

Description

1. Duplex Auto Eject

When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, if

the last original is an odd page, the last copy will be auto-

matically delivered with the reverse side blank. You can

cancel this setting. ⇒ P.85 “Duplex—Making Two-Sided Cop-

ies”

Limitation

❒ Type 1 requires the optional duplex unit.

Note

❒ When you set one original at a time in the document

feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this func-

tion does not come effect.

❒ Default: Yes

2. Comb. Auto Eject

As a default setting, even if the number of originals in the

optional document feeder is less than the number required

in the selected Combine mode, the lacking number of copies

are automatically made in blank. You can cancel this set-

ting.⇒ P.78 “Combine—Combining Originals Into One Copy”

Limitation

❒ When you set one original at a time in the document

feeder or set an original on the exposure glass, this func-

tion does not come effect.

Note

❒ Default: Yes

3. Original Count

As a default setting, the display shows the copy quantity

you specified and the number of copies made. You can can-

cel this setting, and instead view the number of originals to

be fed in the document feeder and the number of copies

made.

Note

❒ Default: No

ìçí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

Description

4. SADF Auto Reset

When you set one original at a time in the optional docu-

ment feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected

time after an original is fed to show that the document feed-

er is ready for another original. You can adjust this time

from 3 seconds to 99 seconds in 1 second steps.

Limitation

❒ The optional document feeder (ADF) is required.

Note

❒ Default: 5 seconds

ìçì

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

3. Input/Output ²/₂

Description

5. Rotate Sort

If you select [No] when the paper tray in use runs out of pa-

per, the machine stops allowing you to add paper to the

tray. So you can have all the copies rotate-sorted.

Note

❒ Default: No

6. Sort

You can select a Sort function. ⇒ P.45 “Sort—Sorting Into

Sets (123, 123, 123)”

Limitation

❒ The optional finisher is required to use the Shift Sort

function.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Machine with finisher: Shift Sort

Machine without finisher: Sort

7. Stack

You can select a Stack function. ⇒ P.47 “Stack—Stacking To-

gether All Copies Of A Page (111, 222, 333)”

Limitation

❒ The optional finisher is required to use the Shift Stack

function.

Note

❒ Default:

•

Machine with finisher: Shift Stack

Machine without finisher: Rotate Stack

ìçë

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SETTINGS YOU CAN CHANGE WITH THE USER TOOLS

Description

8. Mem.full-AutoStrt

When the memory becomes full while scanning originals,

the machine can make copies of the scanned originals first,

then automatically proceeds to scanning the remaining orig-

inals.

You can enable or disable this function.

•

If you select [No]

When the memory becomes full, the machine stops its

operation allowing you to remove the copy pages deliv-

ered on the output tray.

•

If you select [Yes

]

You can leave the machine unattended to make all the

copies, but the resulting sorted pages will not be sequen-

tial.

Note

❒ Default: No

9. Auto Sort Mode

You can specify whether Sort mode is selected when the ma-

chine is turned on or the mode is cleared.

Note

❒ Default: No

ìçê

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER TOOLS (COPY FEATURES)

4. Shortcut Keys ¹/₁

Description

Shortcut Keys

You can register up to four frequently used functions with

shortcut keys.

Note

❒ First press the desired shortcut key, then select the func-

tion you want to assign to the key.

ìçé

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. REMARKS

DO'S AND DON'TS

R CAUTION:

• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.

• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the

power cord.

Important

❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100 %, before you unplug the pow-

er cord.

❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax.

Reference

For details, see the Facsimile Reference.

• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.

• After making copies continuously, you may feel the exposure glass is heated.

But this is not a malfunction.

• You may feel warm around the ventilation hole. This is caused by exhaust air,

and not a malfunction.

• Do not turn off the operation switch while copying or printing. When turning

off the operation switch, make sure that copying or printing is completed.

• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if there should occur

condensation inside caused by temperature change.

• Do not open the covers of machine while copying or printing. If you do, mis-

feeds might occur.

• Do not move the machine while copying or printing.

• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs on the machine,

your machine settings might be lost. Be sure to take a note of your machine

settings.

• Supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damages resulting from a failure on

the machine, loss of machine settings, and use of the machine.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE

Machine Environment

Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-

ditions greatly affect its performance.

Optimum environmental conditions

R CAUTION:

• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an elec-

tric shock might occur.

• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it top-

ples over, it could cause injury.

R CAUTION:

• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a

continuous air turnover.

• Temperature: 10 – 32°C (50 – 89.6°F)(humidity to be 50 % at 32°C, 89.6°F)

• Humidity: 15 – 80 % (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80 %)

• A strong and level base.

• The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to

right.

• To avoid possible build-up of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a

large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m³/hr/

person.

Environments to avoid

• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).

• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air

from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation with-

in the machine.)

• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.

• Dusty areas.

• Areas with corrosive gases.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE

Power Connection

R WARNING:

• Only connect the machine to the power source described on

the inside front cover of this manual.

R WARNING:

• Avoid multi-wiring.

• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the pow-

er cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend

it more than necessary. These actions could cause an elec-

tric shock or fire.

• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet.

Otherwise, an electric shock might occur.

R WARNING:

• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely ac-

cessible so that in event of an emergency it can be un-

plugged easily.

R CAUTION:

• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the

wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.

• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the

power cord.

R CAUTION:

• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid

damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

• When the main switch is in the Stand-by positions, the optional anti-conden-

sation heaters are on. In case of emergency, unplug the machine's power cord.

• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.

• Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

• Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 %.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

Access To Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

CP999EE

1. Rear: more than 10 cm (4.0")

3. Front: more than 75 cm (29.6")

2. Right: more than 10 cm (4.0")

4. Left: more than 10 cm (4.0")

Note

❒ For the required space when options are installed, please contact your service

representative.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

If the exposure glass, platen covers or

document feeder belt is dirty, you

might not be able to make copies as

you want. Clean them if you find

them dirty.

Cleaning The Platen Cover

❖

Cleaning the machine

Wipe the machine with a soft,

damp cloth. Then, wipe it with a

dry cloth to remove the water.

Important

❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or or-

ganic solvent, such as thinner or

benzene. If they get into the ma-

chine or melt plastic parts, a failure

might occur.

AM1P0100

Cleaning The Document

Feeder

❒ Do not clean parts other than those

specified in this manual. Such

parts should be cleaned by your

service representative.

Cleaning The Exposure Glass

ND1D0300

ND1C0200

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMARKS

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. SPECIFICATION

MAINFRAME

❖

Configuration:

Desktop

Photosensitivity type:

OPC drum (Φ60)

Original scanning:

One-dimensional solid scanning system through CCD

Copy process:

Dry electrostatic transfer system

Development:

Dry two-component magnetic brush development system

Fusing:

Heating roll system

Resolution:

400 dpi

Exposure glass:

Stationary original exposure type

Original reference position:

Rear left corner

Warm-up time:

• Type 1, 2: Less than 85 seconds (20°C)

• Type 3: Less than 100 seconds (20°C)

❖

Originals:

Sheet/book/objects

Maximum original size:

A3L, 11" × 17"L

Copy paper size:

• Trays: A3L– A5L, 11" × 17"L– 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

• Bypass: A3L– A6L, 11" × 17"L– 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

• Bypass (non-standard size):

Vertical: 100 – 297 mm, 4.0” – 11.7”

Horizontal: 148 – 432 mm, 6.0” – 17.0”

• Duplex: A3L– A5K, 11" × 17"L– 8¹/₂" × 11"K

• LCT: A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K

❖

Copy paper weight:

• Paper tray: 64 – 105 g/m²(20 – 28 lb)

• Bypass tray: 52 – 157 g/m²(16 – 42 lb)

• Duplex unit: 64 – 105 g/m²(20 – 28 lb)

Non-reproduction area:

• Leading edge: 3 ± 2 mm

• Trailing edge: 2 ± 2 mm

• Left edge: 2 ± 1.5 mm

• Right edge: 2 + 2.5/-1.5 mm

❖

First copy time:

8¹/₂" × 11"K

4.0 seconds or less

3.3 seconds or less

A4K

3.9 seconds or less

3.2 seconds or less

Type 1, 2

Type 3

(100 %, feeding from 1st or 2nd paper tray, Text·Photo mode, Auto Image

Density)

❖

Copying speed: (Type 1 and Type 2)

• 19 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)

• 35 copies/minute (A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K)

Copying speed: (Type 3)

• 22 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)

• 45 copies/minute (A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K)

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINFRAME

❖

Reproduction ratio:

Preset reproduction ratios:

Metric version

Inch version

400 %

Enlargement

400 %

200 %

141 %

155 %

122 %

129 %

115 %

121 %

Full Size

100 %

Reduction

93 %

87 %

85 %

82 %

78 %

71 %

73 %

65 %

50 %

35 % (Type 3 only)

25 % (Type 1 and Type 2 only)

32 % (Type 3 only)

25 % (Type 1 and Type 2 only)

Zoom:

• Type 1, 2

Metric version: 25 – 400 %

Inch version: 25 – 400 %

• Type 3

Metric version: 35 – 400 %

Inch version: 32 – 400 %

❖

Continuous copying count:

1 – 999 copies

Copy paper capacity:

• 1st and 2nd paper trays: 500 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• Bypass tray: 50 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

❖

Power consumption:

• Mainframe only

Type 1, 2

Type 3

Warm up

Stand-by

Copying

Maximum

About 1.05 kW

About 200 Wh

About 1.15 kW

Less than 1.44 kW

About 1.15 kW

About 220 Wh

About 1.3 kW

Less than 1.44 kW

• System

Type 1, 2 ^*1

Type 3 ^*2

Warm up

Stand-by

Copying

Maximum

About 1.05 kW

About 220 Wh

About 1.2 kW

Less than 1.44 kW

About 1.15 kW

About 260 Wh

About 1.35 kW

Less than 1.44 kW

Mainframe with the document feeder, bridge unit, paper tray unit, large capac-

ity tray, copier hard disk, and 1000-sheet finisher.

Mainframe with the document feeder, bridge unit, paper tray unit, large capac-

ity tray, copier hard disk, and 3000-sheet finisher.

❖

Dimensions (W

× H up to exposure glass):

• Type 1: 600 × 640 × 720 mm, 23.7" × 25.2" × 28.4"

• Type 2, 3: 670 × 640 × 720 mm, 26.4" × 25.2" × 28.4"

Space for main frame (W

× D):

• With duplex unit:

630 × 640 mm, 24.9" × 25.2" (Unit closed)

900 × 640 mm, 35.5" × 25.2" (Unit opened)

• With bypass tray unit:

670 × 640 mm, 26.4" × 25.2" (Unit closed)

850 × 640 mm, 33.5" × 25.2" (Unit opened)

980 × 640 mm, 38.6" × 25.2" (Bypass tray extender is used for large size paper)

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINFRAME

❖

Noise Emission:

Sound pressure level: The measurement are made according to ISO7779.

System ^*1

Mainframe only

Stand-by

Type 1, 2

Type 3

27 dB (A) or less

52 dB (A) or less

56 dB (A) or less

28 dB (A) or less

60 dB (A) or less

62 dB (A) or less

Copying

Type 1, 2

Type 3

for Type 1, 2: Mainframe with the document feeder, 1000-sheet finisher, bridge

unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.

for Type 3: Mainframe with the document feeder, 3000-sheet finisher, bridge unit,

paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.

❖

Noise Emission:

Sound power level: The measurement are made according to ISO7779.

System ^*1

Mainframe only

Stand-by

Type 1, 2

Type 3

42 dB (A) or less

69 dB (A) or less

70 dB (A) or less

44 dB (A) or less

73 dB (A) or less

74 dB (A) or less

Copying

Type 1, 2

Type 3

for Type 1, 2: Mainframe with the document feeder, 1000-sheet finisher, bridge

unit, paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.

for Type 3: Mainframe with the document feeder, 3000-sheet finisher, bridge unit,

paper tray unit, large capacity tray, and copier hard disk.

❖

Weight:

• Type 1: Approx. 67 kg, 147.8 lb

• Type 2, 3: Approx. 75 kg, 165.4 lb

Note

❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

❖

Mode:

ADF mode, SADF mode

❖

Original size:

• A3L– A5KL

• 11" × 17"L – 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"KL

❖

Original weight:

• 1-sided originals: 52 – 128 g/m²(14 – 34 lb)

• 2-sided originals: 52 – 105 g/m²(14 – 28 lb) (Duplex)

• Thin paper mode: 41 – 128 g/m²(11 – 34 lb)

❖

Number of originals to be set:

50 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Maximum power consumption:

50 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Dimensions (W

600 × 580 × 150 mm, 23.7" × 22.9" × 5.9"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 12 kg, 26.5 lb

Note

❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAPER TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

❖

Copy paper weight:

64 – 105 g/m²(20 – 28 lb)

❖

Available paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 8¹/₂" ×

11"KL, 5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂"L, 7 ¹/₄" × 10 ¹/₂"L, 8" × 13"L, 8¹/₂" × 13"L, 8¹/₄" ×

13"L

❖

Maximum power consumption:

50 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Paper capacity:

500 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb) × 2 trays

Dimensions (W

540 × 600 × 270 mm, 21.3" × 23.7" × 10.7"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 25 kg, 55.2 lb

Note

❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

INTERNAL TRAY 2 (1 BIN TRAY) (OPTION)

❖

Number of bins:

❖

Available paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 11" × 17"L, 8 /₂" × 14"L, 8 /₂" ×

11"KL, 5 ¹/₂× "8 ¹/₂"L

❖

Paper capacity:

125 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Note

❒ The paper capacity might be less than 125 sheets when copy paper is con-

siderably curled.

❖

Copy paper weight:

60 – 105 g/m²(16 – 28 lb)

Maximum power consumption:

15 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Dimensions (W

470 × 550 × 110 mm, 18.6" × 21.7" × 4.4"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 4 kg, 8.9 lb

Note

❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)

❖

Paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L,

8 ¹/₂" × 11"KL, 5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂"L

❖

Paper weight:

52 – 157 g/m², 14 – 42 lb

Stack capacity:

• 1,000 sheets (A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"Kor smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 500 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

❖

Staple capacity:

• 30 sheets (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 20 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

❖

Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5K, 11" × 17"L, 8 ¹/₂" × 14"L, 8¹/₂" × 11"KL

Staple paper weight:

64 – 80 g/m², 17 – 20 lb

Staple position:

1 position (upper left)

Power consumption:

48 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Dimensions (W

568 × 520 × 625 mm, 22.4" × 20.5" × 24.6"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 21 kg, 46.3 lb

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)

Note

❒ Optional unit for Type 3.

Shift Tray:

❖

Paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8 ¹/₂" × 14"L, 8 ¹/₂" × 11"KL

Paper weight:

52 – 157 g/m², 14 – 42 lb

Stack capacity:

without punch:

• 3,000 sheets (A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

with punch (the optional punch kit is required):

• 2,500 sheets (A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K) (80 g/m²,20 lb)

• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 8 ¹/₂" ×

11"L) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Proof Tray:

❖

Paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L,

8 ¹/₂" × 11"KL, 8 ¹/₂" × 5 ¹/₂"KL

❖

Paper weight:

52 – 157 g/m², 14 – 42 lb

Stack capacity:

without punch:

• 250 sheets (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 50 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

with punch (the optional punch kit is required):

• 200 sheets (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 50 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Staple:

❖

Staple capacity:

without punch:

• 50 sheets (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 30 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

with punch (the optional punch kit is required):

• 40 sheets (A4, 8¹/₂" × 11" or smaller) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

• 25 sheets (B4, 8¹/₂" × 14" or larger) (80 g/m², 20 lb)

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3000-SHEET FINISHER (OPTION)

❖

Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8 ¹/₂" × 11"KL

Staple paper weight:

64 – 80 g/m², 17 – 21 lb

Staple position:

• 1 staple – 3 positions

• 2 staples – 1 position

❖

Power consumption:

48 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Dimensions (W

625 × 545 × 960 mm, 24.7" × 21.5" × 37.8"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 45 kg, 99.3 lb

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

PUNCH KIT (OPTION)

Note

❒ Optional unit for the 3000-sheet finisher.

❖

Paper size (2 holes version):

• L: A3 – A5, 11" × 17" – 8¹/₂" × 11"

• K: A4 – A5, 8¹/₂" × 11"

Paper size (3 holes version):

• L: A3, B4, 11" × 17"

• K: A4, B5, 8¹/₂" × 11"

Paper weight:

• 2 holes version: 52 g/m²– 128 g/m², 14 – 34 lb

• 3 holes version: 52 g/m²– 105 g/m², 14 – 28 lb

❖

Power consumption:

33.6 W (power is supplied from the 3000-sheet finisher.)

Dimensions (W

92 × 463 × 100 mm, 3.7" × 18.3" × 4.0"

× H):

Weight:

2.4 kg, 5.3 lb

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (LCT) (OPTION)

❖

Paper size:

A4K, 8¹/₂" × 11"K

Paper weight:

64 – 105 g/m², 20 – 28 lb

Paper capacity:

1,500 sheets (80 g/m², 20 lb)

Power consumption

Approx. 40 W (power is supplied from the main frame.)

Dimensions (W

390 × 500 × 390 mm, 15.4" × 19.7" × 15.4"

× H):

Weight:

Approx. 17 kg, 37.5 lb

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

DUPLEX UNIT (OPTION)

Note

❒ Optional unit for Type 1.

❖

Paper size:

A3L– A5L, 11" × 17"L– 5¹/₂" × 8¹/₂" L

Paper weight:

64 – 105 g/m², 20 – 28 lb

Power consumption (Max):

35 W

Dimensions (W

90 × 520 × 400 mm, 3.6" × 20.5" × 15.8"

× H):

Weight

Approx. 6 kg, 13.3 lb

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BYPASS TRAY (OPTION)

This is option for Type 1.

❖

Available paper size:

• Standard size (metric version): A3L, A4L, A5L, 8 ¹/₂" × 13"L

• Standard size (inch version): A3L, 11" × 17"L, 8¹/₂" × 14"L, 8¹/₂" × 11"L,

5 ¹/₂" × 8¹/₂"L

• Non-standard size: Vertical (100 – 297 mm, 4.0” – 11.7”), Horizontal (148 –

432 mm, 6.0” – 17.0”)

❖

Copy paper weight:

52 – 157 g/m²,16 – 42 lb

Dimensions (W

310 × 550 × 75 mm, 12.3” × 21.7” × 3.0"

× H):

Paper capacity:

• 52 – 90 g/m², 16 – 20 lb: 50 sheets

• 91 – 157 g/m², 20 – 42 lb: 25 sheets

❖

Weight:

Approx. 3 kg, 6.7 lb

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATION

8 MB COPIER MEMORY UNIT (ELECTRIC

SORT KIT) (OPTION)

This is option for Type 1.

❖

Memory capacity:

8 MB

❖

Additional functions:

Image rotate, Sort, 2-sided copy

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPIER HARD DISK (IMAGE ENHANCE KIT)

❖

Originals scanned:

100 pages (A4) min.

Originals stored for Archive File function:

32 pages (A4) max.

Additional function:

Archive file, and sort in enhanced image copy mode

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Numerics

Cursor keys, ìê

1 bin tray, æ, å, ìæå

1000-sheet finisher, æ, å, éê, ìêé, ìêä,

ìæä

3000-sheet finisher, å, éê, ìêç, ìéì, ìåí

8 MB copier memory unit, æ, ìåç

Deleting A Program, çì

Deleting The Stored Images, ìíè

Directional Magnification (%), æì

Directional Size Magnification (inch), çä

Do’s and Don’ts, ìçè

Document feeder (ADF), ë, æ, å, êë, ìçä,

ìæç

Double Copies, ää

Duplex, åè

Duplex key, ìë

Access To Machine, ìçå

Adding Staples, ìêé

Adding Toner, ìëì

ADF external tray, ë, êë

ADF tray, êë

Duplex unit, ë, æ, ìåé

Adjusting Copy Image Density, êæ

Archive File, ìíë

Auto Image Density, êæ

Auto Image Density key, ìê

Auto Off, êí

Auto Paper Select, éì

Auto Reduce/Enlarge, éë

Auto Reduce/Enlarge key, ìê

Auto Reset, êí

Electric sort kit, æ, ìåç

Energy Saver, çê

Enhanced Image Copy, êå

Enhanced Image key, ìê

Enlarging, çè

Erase Border, æè

Erase Center, æè

Exposure glass, ë, ëí, ëë, êì, ìçä

External tray, æ, å

Auto Start, çé

Basic Functions, êæ

Both Covers, äê

Bridge unit, æ, å

Fax key, ìä

Front Cover, äì

Front cover, ê

Function keys, ìê

Bypass tray, é, æ, èè, ìåè

Changing The Paper Size, ìêë

Clear key, ìê

Clear Modes/Energy Saver key, ìë

Clearing Misfeeds, ìëé

Combination Chart, ìíå

Combine, æå

copier hard disk, æ, å, ìåæ

copy initial display, ìé

Copy Paper, ëê

Copying From The Bypass Tray, èè

Cover, äì

Guide, è

Image enhance kit, æ, å, ìåæ

Image Repeat, ää, ìíí

Indicators, ìë

Interchange unit, æ

Internal tray, ë

Internal tray 2, æ, å, ìæå

ìåå

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interrupt, çê

Interrupt key, ìë

Platen cover, ë, æ, å, ìçä

Positive/Negative, äå

Power Connection, ìçæ

Preset Reduce/Enlarge, çè

Printing A List Of The Stored Images,

ìíç

Jammed Staples, ìêä

Program, çí

Program key, ìë

Proof tray, å

Punch kit, å, ìåë

Punch Waste, ìéé

Punching, éé

Large Capacity Tray (LCT), æ, å, ìëí,

ìåê

Lighter and Darker keys, ìê

Loading Paper, ììä

Lower right cover, é

Recalling A Program, çë

Recalling The Stored Images, ìíæ

Reducing, çè

Remarks, ìçè

Right side cover, é

Rotate Sort, éè

Machine Environment, ìçç

Main Power indicator, ë, ìë

Main power switch, ë, ìæ

Mainframe, ìæì

Maintaining, ìçä

Manual Image Density, êå

Margin Adjustment, æê

Menu key, ìê

Rotate Stack, éæ

Message, ììì

Mixed sizes mode, êé

SADF mode, êê

Safety Information, L

Selecting Copy Paper, éí

Selecting Original Type Setting, êä

Selection keys, ìê

Series Copies, åë

Shift Sort, éè

Number keys, ìê

Shift Stack, éæ

Shift tray, å

Shortcut key, ìê

Sort, éè

Sorter key, ìë

OHP Slip Sheet, äç

On indicator, ë, ìë

Operation panel, ë, ìë

Operation switch, ë, ìê, ìæ

Options, æ

SPECIFICATION, ìæì

Stack, éæ

Original Beeper, çé

Original type, êä

Staple, éä

Start key, ìê

Original Type key, ìê

Originals, ëí, êì

Stop, ìê

Storing The Images, ìíê

Storing Your Settings, çí

Panel display, ìë, ìé

Paper Designate, äé

Paper tray, ê

Thin paper mode, êè

Paper tray unit, ê, æ, å, ìææ

ìåä

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Toner, ëæ

Unit for two-sided copies, ë

User Codes, çê

User Tools, ìéè

User Tools/Counter key, ìë

Ventilation hole, é

Zoom, çæ

Zoom key, ìê

ìäí

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

❖

FCC Requirements

1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that

contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number

(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.

2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C

3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line.

Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incom-

ing call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). Contact the

telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in ad-

vance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical,

the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your

right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures

that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide

advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted

service.

6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), refer

to the solving problems section in this manual.

7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT.

at 1-800-FASTFIX for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network,

the telephone company may request you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the prob-

lem is resolved.

8. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party

Line Service is subject to state tariffs.

❖

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:

1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.

2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.

CANADA (This information is for facsimile option users only.)

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets

telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropri-

ate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The department does not guarantee the

equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of

the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method

of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent

degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any

repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecom-

munications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, tele-

phone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may

be particularly important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate

electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the max-

imum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface

may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equiv-

alence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.

In accordance with ISO Standard 7001, this machine uses the followingsymbols for the main power switch:

a means POWER ON.

c means STAND BY.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERRATA

A mistake is found on the inside front cover of this

operating instructions and should be corrected as

follows:

Incorrect

Power Source:

120 V, 60 Hz, 10 A or more

Correct

Power Source:

120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A or more

Printed in China

A2328650

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-5, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama,

Minato-ku, Tokyo

Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111

Overseas Affiliates

U.S.A.

Spain

RICOH CORPORATION

5 Dedrick Place

RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.

Guitard, 45

West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006

(TEL) 973-882-2000

08014 Barcelona

(TEL) 490-09-60

Netherlands

Italy

RICOH EUROPE B.V.

Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114

1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland

(TEL) 020-5474111

RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.

Via della Metallurgia, 12

(zona Basson) - 37139 VERONA

(TEL) 045-851 00 44

United Kingdom

Hong Kong

RICOH U.K. LTD.

Ricoh House

1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,

Middlesex, TW13 7HG

(TEL) 181-261-4000

RICOH HONG KONG LTD.

23/F., China Overseas Building,

139, Hennessy Road,

Wan Chai, Hong Kong

(TEL) 2862-2888

Germany

France

RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GMBH

Mergenthalerallee 38-40,

65760 Eschborn

RICOH FRANCE S.A.

383 Avenue du Général de Gaulle,

B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex

(TEL) 01-4094-3838

(TEL) (06196) 906-0

Singapore

RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.

#15-01/02 The Heeren,

260 Orchard Road,

Singapore 238855

(TEL) 65-830-5888

Printed in China

UE USA A2318607

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FAX Option Type 450

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

FACSIMILE REFERENCE (option)

ND0A0101

Read this manual carefully before you use this manual and keep it handy for future

reference. For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Available Options

•

Stamp Unit (FAX Stamp Type 450)

Fax Feature Expander (FAX Feature Expander Type 450)

130MB Hard Disk (FAX Feature Expander Type 460)

400 dpi Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)

ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)

Handset (Handset Type 450)

Supplies

Marker Ink (Maker Type 30 is recommended for the best performance.)

•

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTICE

R CAUTION:

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure

compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device.

Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect or DTMF signalling,

only the performance of the DTMF signalling is subject to regulatory require-

ments for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equip-

ment is set to use DTMF signalling for access to public or private emergency

services. DTMF signalling also provides faster call set up.

Direct (or indirect reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye dam-

age. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any

possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Note

❒ Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.

❒ Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please

contact your local dealer.

-Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in USA

only).

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 among other things makes it

unlawful for any person to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless

such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmit-

ted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and

an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the

message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,

other entity or individual. This information is transmitted with your document

by the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) feature. The telephone number

provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges ex-

ceed local or long distance transmission charges. In order for you to meet the re-

quirement, your machine must be programmed by following the instructions in

the accompanying Operation Manual. In particular, please refer to the chapter

of Installation. Also refer to the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) program-

ming procedure to enter the business identification and telephone number of the

terminal or business. Do not forget to set the date and time.

Thank you.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION

As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this fax model meets Ener-

gy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. This product was designed to reduce the

environmental impact associated with fax equipment. This is accomplished by

means of energy saving features such as Low Power mode. Please see applicable

sections of operating instructions for details.

M001

Note to users in the United States of America

-Notice:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class

B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed

to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential in-

stallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency ener-

gy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be deter-

mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-

rect the interference by one more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

-Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION MAP

[ Mode ]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[ Info. ]

Select the file

Delete

Check

ND0X01E7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FUNCTION MAP

1.Getting Started

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS ........................................................................ 1

Front View..................................................................................................... 1

Rear View...................................................................................................... 2

OPERATION PANEL.................................................................................. 4

STARTING THE MACHINE ........................................................................ 7

Turning On The Power.................................................................................. 7

Turning Off The Power.................................................................................. 8

SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND FAX MODE ......................... 9

READING THE DISPLAY ......................................................................... 10

Standby Display .......................................................................................... 10

Communication Display .............................................................................. 10

Display Prompts.......................................................................................... 11

USEFUL FUNCTIONS .............................................................................. 12

Automatic Power Reception Function......................................................... 12

Dual Access ................................................................................................ 12

Personal Code Access................................................................................ 12

Transmission With Image Rotation ............................................................. 12

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS .................................................. 14

Acceptable Original Sizes ........................................................................... 14

Original Sizes Difficult to Detect.................................................................. 15

Paper Size and Scanned Area.................................................................... 16

HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL................................................................... 18

Setting a Single Original on the Exposure Glass ........................................ 19

Setting Originals in the Document Feeder (ADF)........................................ 20

WHERE INCOMING MESSAGE ARE DELIVERED—OUTPUT TRAY ... 22

When the Selected Output Tray Becomes Full........................................... 22

When the Finisher is Installed..................................................................... 22

2.Sending a Fax Message

OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 23

Overview ..................................................................................................... 23

MEMORY TRANSMISSION...................................................................... 24

Memory Storage Report.............................................................................. 28

Transmission Result Report (Memory Transmission)................................. 29

Communication Failure Report ................................................................... 29

CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION............................................ 30

Canceling a Transmission While the Original Is Being Scanned in ............ 30

Canceling a Transmission While the Message is Being Sent..................... 30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION.................................................................. 32

Transmission Result Report (Immediate Transmission) ............................. 33

On-hook Dial ............................................................................................... 34

Manual Dial ................................................................................................. 35

CANCELING AN IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION ..................................... 36

Canceling a Transmission Before You Have Pressed Start........................ 36

Canceling a Transmission After You Have Pressed the Start Key ............. 36

SCAN SETTINGS ..................................................................................... 37

Resolution ................................................................................................... 37

Original Type............................................................................................... 38

Image Density (Contrast) ............................................................................ 38

Mixing Scan Settings in a Multiple Page Original........................................ 39

CHANGING LINE TYPE ........................................................................... 41

DIALING.................................................................................................... 43

Number Keys .............................................................................................. 43

Quick Dials.................................................................................................. 46

Speed Dials................................................................................................. 47

Groups ........................................................................................................ 48

Optional Group Dial .................................................................................... 49

Redial.......................................................................................................... 50

TRANSMISSION FEATURES................................................................... 52

Stamp.......................................................................................................... 52

ID Transmission .......................................................................................... 52

F Code (SUB).............................................................................................. 53

F Code (PWD)............................................................................................. 54

JBIG Transmission...................................................................................... 54

3.Receiving a Fax Message

IMMEDIATE RECEPTION ........................................................................ 55

MEMORY RECEPTION ............................................................................ 56

Substitute Reception............................................................................... 57

Screening messages from anonymous senders......................................... 57

SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE.................................................... 59

Fax Mode (Auto Reception Mode) .............................................................. 59

Telephone Mode ......................................................................................... 59

RECEPTION FUNCTIONS........................................................................ 60

Transfer Station........................................................................................... 60

Transfer Result Report................................................................................ 61

ID Reception ............................................................................................... 61

F Code (SEP).............................................................................................. 61

F Code (PWD)............................................................................................. 63

JBIG Reception........................................................................................... 63

PRINTING FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 64

Print Completion Beep ................................................................................ 64

vii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Checkered Mark.......................................................................................... 64

Center Mark ................................................................................................ 64

Reception Time........................................................................................... 64

Multi-copy Reception................................................................................... 65

2-Sided Printing........................................................................................... 65

180 Degree Rotation Printing...................................................................... 66

Image Rotation............................................................................................ 67

Two In One.................................................................................................. 67

Page Separation and Length Reduction (not available in some countries) 67

Reverse Order Printing ............................................................................... 68

Page Reduction........................................................................................... 68

TSI Print ...................................................................................................... 69

CIL/TID Print ............................................................................................... 69

When There is No Paper of the Correct Size.............................................. 69

Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper From the Bypass Tray........ 72

4.Advanced Transmission Features

OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 73

Overview ..................................................................................................... 73

SEND LATER............................................................................................ 74

CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ........................................................... 76

PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION....................................................... 78

SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT........................................................... 80

2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED TRANSMISSION) ............ 82

BOOK FAX................................................................................................ 84

Bound Original Page Order......................................................................... 85

CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR

SCAN AREA)............................................................................................ 86

TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)......................................................... 88

POLLING TRANSMISSION...................................................................... 90

Polling Transmission Clear Report.............................................................. 92

POLLING RECEPTION............................................................................. 94

Polling Reserve Report ............................................................................... 95

Polling Result Report .................................................................................. 95

TRANSFER REQUEST............................................................................. 96

Specifying an End Receiver........................................................................ 98

TRANSMISSION OPTIONS...................................................................... 99

Selecting Transmission Options for a Single Transmission...................... 100

5.Communication Information

CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES ...................... 103

Canceling a Transmission......................................................................... 103

viii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing a File ............................................................................................ 104

Checking and Editing a File ...................................................................... 105

PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT TX FILE LIST)....... 109

CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION RESULT (TX STATUS).................. 110

CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX STATUS)........................ 111

PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE............................................. 112

Confidential File Report............................................................................. 113

PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK......................... 114

PRINTING THE TCR............................................................................... 116

DISPLAYING THE MEMORY STATUS.................................................. 117

6.Troubleshooting

WHEN TONER RUNS OUT .................................................................... 119

ERROR MESSAGES AND THEIR MEANINGS ..................................... 120

SOLVING PROBLEMS........................................................................... 121

INDICATORS .......................................................................................... 123

When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or Flashing .................................. 123

When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit............................................... 124

When the {Fax} key is Lit in Red............................................................... 124

WHEN AN ERROR REPORT IS PRINTED ............................................ 125

WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS......................................... 126

7.Facsimile User Tools

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS........................................................... 127

Exiting User Tool mode............................................................................. 128

Registering Quick Dials............................................................................. 129

Deleting Quick Dials.................................................................................. 131

Quick Dial Key and Function Key Label (Dial label).................................. 132

Registering Groups ................................................................................... 135

Deleting Groups ........................................................................................ 137

Registering Optional Groups..................................................................... 139

Deleting Optional Groups.......................................................................... 142

Registering Speed Dials............................................................................ 143

Deleting Speed Dials................................................................................. 145

Storing Keystroke Programs ..................................................................... 147

Deleting a Keystroke Program .................................................................. 150

Registering Auto Documents .................................................................... 151

Deleting an Auto Document ...................................................................... 153

Registering Irregular Area......................................................................... 154

Deleting an Irregular Area......................................................................... 156

REPORTS/LISTS.................................................................................... 158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INITIAL SETUP TX ................................................................................. 159

INITIAL SETUP RX................................................................................. 161

To set the Bypass Paper Size................................................................... 162

ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS................................................... 164

Storing/Editing the Contents of a User Function Key................................ 164

Using a User Function............................................................................... 165

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS................................................................. 166

Personal Codes......................................................................................... 166

ECM .......................................................................................................... 171

Memory Lock............................................................................................. 172

Multistep Transfer ..................................................................................... 173

Forwarding ................................................................................................ 175

Special Senders to Treat Differently (Special RX Nos.)............................ 182

Authorized Reception................................................................................ 188

Monitor Volume......................................................................................... 192

RTI/TTI...................................................................................................... 193

Registering The Economy Transmission Time ........................................ 195

ID Code..................................................................................................... 196

G3 Analog Line ......................................................................................... 198

G3 Digital Line........................................................................................... 199

G4 Digital Line........................................................................................... 200

Changing the User Parameters................................................................. 203

Date/Time.................................................................................................. 208

Summer Time............................................................................................ 209

Counters.................................................................................................... 209

Auto Reset ................................................................................................ 210

Paper Feed Selection................................................................................ 211

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)............................................................ 211

8.Entering Text

ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT...................................................... 213

Available Characters................................................................................. 213

Keys .......................................................................................................... 213

How To Enter Text .................................................................................... 214

9.Maintaining Your Machine

CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE... 217

Connecting The Telephone Line............................................................... 217

Connecting The Machine To The ISDN .................................................... 218

Connecting The Optional External Telephone .......................................... 218

Selecting The Line Type ........................................................................... 219

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE ............................................... 220

Stamp Cover Layout ................................................................................. 221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10.Appendix

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT........................................................................ 223

Fax Feature Expander and Hard Disk....................................................... 223

400 dpi High Resolution Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)............... 224

ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)........................................................... 224

Stamp (FAX STAMP TYPE 450)............................................................... 224

Duplex Unit (AD340) ................................................................................. 224

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 225

FUNCTION LIST ..................................................................................... 226

Advanced Transmission Features............................................................. 226

Communication Information ...................................................................... 228

User Tools................................................................................................. 229

INDEX...................................................................................................... 234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This page is intentionally blank.

xii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Getting Started

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS

Front View

Main

Power

ND0A02E4

1. Document Feeder (ADF) / Platen

3. Internal Tray

Cover

Usually received fax messages are print-

ed to the Internal Tray. Other tray can

also be selected for other prints or copies.

This holds up to 50 sheets which are fed

at a time. Place the document face up

here. Close this platen cover when you

set a document on the Exposure Glass.

See “Changing the Machine's Settings” of

the System Settings.

2. Exposure Glass

Place the original aligning its upper left

corner with the reference mark at the up-

per left corner of the exposure glass.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

4. ISDN Line connector⇒ P.218

“Connecting The Machine To The IS-

DN”

6. Optional Handset

This permits voice communication.

7. Operation Switch

5. Main Power Switch

Do not touch this switch. This switch is

used only by a service representative.

Press this swit ch to turn the power on

(the On indicator lights up). To turn the

power off, press this switch again (the On

indicator goes off).⇒ P.7 “Turning On The

Power”, P.12 “Automatic Power Reception

Function”,P.126 “WHEN POWER IS

TURNED OFF OR FAILS”

Note

❒ If the Operation switch is on and there

is still no power, turn on the Main

Power switch.

8. Optional Upper Tray

This tray can also be selected for other

prints or copies.

❒ If you leave the

off for

Main Power

more than about an hour, all files in

memory are lost.

Rear View

ND8A01E4

See P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”

in the Copy Reference.

1. Bypass Tray

Select this tray to use non-standard size

paper.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS

2. Analog Line Connector

3. Optional Handset/External Tele-

phone connector

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

OPERATION PANEL

1 2 3

5 6

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Standard

Detail

Book

2-Sided

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Staple

Stack

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

2-Sided 2-Sided

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

User Tools / Counter

Trans.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

1. Communicating Indicator

❖

Features Programmed by Default

Lights during transmission or reception.

Key Standard

With ISDN or

stamp options

2. Receive File Indicator

Lights to tell you a message has been re-

ceived into memory. Blinks when a

Memory Lock file has been stored in

memory. Note that this indicator does

not inform you of a Confidential recep-

tion.

Start Manual

←

Transmission

Result Display

←

TEL Mode

←

3. Confidential File Indicator

ISDN selection

Stamp

Lights when a message has been received

into memory with Confidential Recep-

tion. ⇒ P.112 “PRINTING A CONFIDEN-

TIAL MESSAGE”

4. User Function keys

Each of these can be programmed for

rapid access to frequently used features.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION PANEL

9 10 11

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

Main

Power

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

On Hook Dial

GHI

JKL

MNO

Start

Pause /

Redial

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

Tone

OPER

20 21 22 23

24 25

ND2A10E2

5. Resolution key

9. {Speed Dial} key

Press to switch between Standard, Detail

and Super Fine (optional 400dpi Option

required).

Press to select a Speed Dial.

10. {On Hook Dial} key

Use for making a phone call from the

keypad. You do not have to lift the hand-

set.

6. Transmission Mode key

Press the key to toggle between Memory

Transmission (Memory Trans.) and Im-

11. {Program} key

This key is used in Copier mode.

mediate

Transmission

(Immediate

Trans.) modes.

12. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key

7. {User Tools/Counter} key

Press to enter User Tools mode. These

tools allow you to customize the default

settings.

Energy saver:

Hold down for more than a second to en-

ter energy saving mode.

Clear Modes:

Cancels the current setting and returns to

standby with a single keystroke.

8. LCD display

This guides you through tasks and in-

forms you of the machine status. Messag-

es appear here.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

13. {Interrupt} key

Interrupts the current fax operation to

start copying.

23. Number keys

Use to dial fax numbers or enter the num-

ber of copies.

14. Quick Dial Flip Plate

24. {Start} key

Flip this plate down to access Quick Dial

keys 01 through 28, flip up to access keys

29 through 56.

Press to start all tasks.

25. {Clear/Stop} key

Clear:

Deletes one character or digit

Stop:

Interrupts the current operation (trans-

mission, scanning, copying or printing).

15. Quick Dial keys

Use to dial numbers at a single touch or

to enter letters and symbols. Also use for

Group Dial, Keystroke and Program fea-

tures.

16. {Fax} key

Press to switch to fax mode. It lights in

red if the optional Facsimile unit has

problem, there is a communication error

or there is no paper in the cassette .⇒

P.124 “When the {Fax} key is Lit in Red”

17. {Original Type} key

Use when sending a halftone image such

as a photograph or a color original.

18. {Lighter} and {Darker} keys and

{

Auto Image Density} key

Press this key to adjust the density.

19. {Selection} keys

Press the key under the item you wish to

select.

20. < > keys

Press to move the cursor or select func-

tions

21. {Pause/Redial} key

Pause:

Inserts a pause when you are dialing or

storing a fax number. A pause cannot be

inserted as the first digit.

Redial:

Press to redial one of the last ten num-

bers.

22. {Tone} key

Press to send tonal signals down a pulse

dialing line.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING THE MACHINE

To start the machine, turn on the op-

eration switch.

B Turn on the operation switch to

make the On indicator light up.

Note

The panel display will come on.

❒ This machine automatically enters

Energy Saver mode or turns itself

off if you do not use the machine

for a while. See “09. Energy Saver

Mode”, “10. Auto Off Timer” of

the System Settings.

Main

Power

top

-Power switches

ND1M01E0

This machine has two power switch-

es: See P.1 “GUIDE TO COMPO-

NENTS”

❖

Operation switch

Turn on this switch to activate the

machine. When the machine has

warmed up, you can make copies

or send faxes.

Note

❒ If nothing happens when you

turn on the operation switch,

check if the main power switch

is turned on.

Main power switch

Do not touch the main power

switch. It should be used only by a

service representative when the

optional fax unit is installed.

❒ During the warm-up period,

you can use the Auto Start func-

tion. See “10. Auto Start” of the

Copy Reference.

Important

❒ Warming-up time is as follows.

❒ If you leave the main power switch

off for more than one hour, all files

in memory are lost. See “Turning

Off The Power” below.

• 35 copy per minute model :

less than 85 seconds

• 45 copy per minute model :

less than 100 seconds

Turning On The Power

A Make sure that the power cord is

plugged into the wall outlet firm-

ly and Main Power Switch is on.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

Turning Off The Power

A Turn off the operation switch to

make the On indicator go off.

Main

Power

top

ND1M01E0

Important

❒ Before you unplug the power

cord, make sure that the re-

maining memory space indi-

cates 100 % on the display for

facsimile mode.

❒ Files stored in memory will be

lost an hour after you turn the

main power switch off or you

unplug the power cord. ⇒ P.126

“WHEN POWER IS TURNED

OFF OR FAILS”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND FAX MODE

SWITCHING BETWEEN COPY MODE AND

FAX MODE

You can use this machine both as a fax machine and a copier. Ordinarily when

you turn on the power switch, the Copy screen is shown and you are ready to

make copies. When you wish to use fax functions, press the {Fax} key on the left

of the operation panel.

Copy Mode

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Facsimile Mode

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND0X02E0

Limitation

❒ You cannot switch modes under the following circumstances:

• While scanning in a fax

• During Immediate Transmission

• While editing the System Settings

• During Interrupt Copying

• While using On-hook Dial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

READING THE DISPLAY

The display tells you the machine sta-

tus and guides you through opera-

tions.

❖

Memory Transmission

Immediate Transmission

Note

❒ Functions that have been selected

are hilighted as shown (

11 17

Keys that you can not select are

shown with a dashed outline

(

❒ All procedures in this manual as-

sume you are in Fax mode. By de-

fault, when you turn the machine

on it is in Copy mode. Press the

{

Fax} key change to Fax mode.

❒ To return the machine to standby

mode, perform one of the follow-

ing:

You can have the machine start in

Fax mode. See “Changing the Ma-

chine's Settings” of the System Set-

tings.

• If you have set an original and

are in the sending process, re-

move the original.

• If you have not set an original

and are in the sending process,

press the {Clear modes/Energy

saver} key.

Standby Display

While the machine is in the standby

mode (immediately after it is turned

on or after the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-

er} key is pressed), the following dis-

play is shown.

• If you are in User Tools mode,

press the {User Tools} key.

Communication Display

While the machine is communicating

the status is displayed.

❖

Display during Memory Transmission

or Memory Reception:

Note

❒ Even when the machine is sending

or receiving a fax message from/

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

READING THE DISPLAY

into memory, you can still scan the

next original into memory. ⇒ P.12

“Dual Access”

❖

Immediate Transmission:

Display Prompts

Depending on the situation, the ma-

chine will show various prompts on

the display.

❖

Instructions and Requests

Questions

Selections

Status

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

personal code. This prevents unau-

thorized people from sending fax

messages and can be used to track Fax

machine use by giving a personal

code to each user.

Automatic Power Reception

Function

This machine can be set to shut down

automatically if nobody has used the

machine for a while. In these situa-

tions even through the operation

switch is off, the machine can still re-

ceive incoming messages as long as

the Main Power switch is on.

Note

❒ Register personal codes and turn

Personal Code Access on. The de-

fault setting is off. ⇒ P.166 “Regis-

tering Personal Codes”, P.169

“Personal Code Access”

Important

❒ Even if Restricted Access is en-

abled, the machine can receive and

print a fax message.

❒ Reception is not possible if both

the operation switch and Main

Power switch are turned off.

A If Personal Code Access is turned

on, the display is shown as fol-

lowing:

Note

❒ By default, messages are printed as

soon as they are received (Immedi-

ate Reception). To change this, see

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

B Enter a personal code (4-digit

Dual Access

number) using the number keys.

The machine can scan other messages

into memory even while sending a

fax message from memory, receiving

a message into memory , or automat-

ically printing a report. Since the ma-

chine starts sending the second

message immediately after the cur-

rent transmission terminates, the line

will be used efficiently.

Note

❒ If a user enters a personal code

that is not registered, the ma-

chine returns to step 1.

Note that during Immediate Trans-

mission or when in User Tools mode,

the machine cannot scan an original.

Transmission With Image

Rotation

Personal Code Access

For most purposes, set A4/LT origi-

nals in the lengthwise direction (L).

If you set an A4/LT original in the

sideways direction (K), the image

The machine can be set up so that no-

body can use it without entering a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USEFUL FUNCTIONS

will be sent rotated by 90°. Providing

the receiver has A4/LT lengthwise

paper (L), the message will be print-

ed the same size as the original.

Limitation

❒ The Quick Memory Transmission

feature is not available when using

this feature.

❒ When Image Rotation is used, all

messages are sent by normal Mem-

ory Transmission.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS

Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine.

Originals containing wet ink or correcting fluid will mark the exposure glass and

resulting image will be affected.

Acceptable Original Sizes

Where original is

set

Acceptable original size Maximum

Paper thickness

number of

sheets

Exposure glass

Maximum A3 (297 × 420

mm), 11" ×17" (279 ×432

mm)

----

52 - 128 g/m²(14 - 34lb

in inch version)

Document Feeder

(ADF) Single Sided to A3 L (up to 432mm

Document

Fax transmission: A5 L 50

long) 8" × 5¹/₂" L to 11"

× 17" (DLT) L

52 - 105 g/m²(14 - 28lb

in inch version)

Document Feeder

(ADF) Double-Sid- to A3 L (up to 432mm

ed Document

Fax transmission: A5 L 50

long) 8" × 5¹/₂" L to 11"

× 17" (DLT) L

Limitation

❒ When using 2–sided transmission, A5K and HLTK cannot be available.

Originals Unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF)

Do not set the following types of originals in the Document Feeder (ADF) be-

cause they may be damaged. Place them on the exposure glass instead.

• Originals of sizes other than those specified in the previous table

• Originals containing staples or clips

• Perforated or torn originals

• Curled, folded, or creased originals

• Pasted originals

• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermosensitive paper, art paper,

aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper

• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts

• Sticky originals such as translucent paper

• Thin and soft originals

• Originals of inappropriate weight (see table above)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS

• Originals in bound form, such as books

• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper

Original Sizes Difficult to Detect

The machine finds it difficult to detect the size of the following kinds of origi-

nals. If this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the cor-

rect size. ⇒ P.17 “If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original”

• Document size other than the following (set on the exposure glass).

• Originals with indexes, tags, or projecting parts

• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper

• Dark originals with many characters or drawings

• Originals which partially contain solid printing

• Originals which have solid printing at their edges

The following paper sizes are automatically detected in Fax mode.

❖

Inch Version

Paper size

Exposure glass

Document Feeder (ADF)

Where original is placed

11" × 17" L

8 ¹/₂" × 14"L

8 ¹/₂" × 11" K L

5 ¹/₂" × 8 ¹/₂" K L

10" × 14" L

8 ¹/₂" × 13" L

8 × 10" K

Limitation

❒ A5 and HLT sizes are not available for 2-sided Transmission.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

Paper Size and Scanned Area

❖

Exposure glass

Reference

position

Horizontal size

Maximum Scanning area

A3 (297x420mm)

11"x17" (279x432mm)

A4 A3

CP01AEE0

❖

Document Feeder (ADF)

Horizontal size

Maximum Scanning area

(297x432mm)

A4 A3

CP02AEE1

Limitation

❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the des-

tination.

❒ If you set an original larger than DLT/A3 on the exposure glass, only the

DLT/A3 area is scanned.

Note

❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF), a margin of 3 mm around each edge of the original may

not be sent.

❒ If the receiver uses paper narrower than the original, the image will be re-

duced to fit the paper width. ⇒ P.99 “Auto Reduction”

❒ The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways.

• When you set an original in the Document Feeder (ADF), an original wider

than about 7.48” is scanned as LT/LG size wide. An original wider than

about 10.37” is scanned as DLT size. Originals narrower than 9.05” will be

sent as LT/LG size. You can scan in originals of up to 17” in length.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIGINALS

• When you set an original on the exposure glass, an original narrower than

about 9.25” is scanned as LT/LG size wide. An original wider than 10.83”

is scanned as DLT size wide. Normally, lengths up to a maximum of 17”

can be scanned (this figure varies slightly depending on the type of origi-

nal). If you select Irregular Scan Area, lengths up to 17” are possible.

Length

width

∼"9.80

not detected LTL

LTK DLTL

"9.80∼"10.79

"10.79∼"12.44 "12.44∼

∼"9.57

LTL

LGL

"10.55∼

DLTL

-Maximum Scan Area

Memory Transmission/Immediate Transmission

• From the Document Feeder (ADF): 297 × 432 mm (W × L)

• From the exposure glass : 297 × 432 mm (W × L)

If the Machine Cannot Detect the Size of Your Original

If the machine cannot detect the original size, the following display is shown:

If this happens, carry out the following steps.

A Remove the original and replace it on the exposure glass. Press the {Start

}

key to scan the original again. If the machine still cannot detect the original

size, the following display is shown:

B Press the < and > keys to switch the scan size and press the {Start} key

again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL

In this manual an original can mean a single or multiple page document. You

can set your originals either in the Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure

glass. Some types of originals are unsuitable for the Document Feeder (ADF) so

they must be set on the exposure glass. ⇒ P.14 “ACCEPTABLE TYPES OF ORIG-

INALS”

Which way you place your original depends on its size and whether you are us-

ing the Document Feeder (ADF) or the exposure glass.

Limitation

❒ If you set A5 size documents on the exposure glass, they will not be detected.

Note

❒ When sending a fax, the image output at the other end depends on the size

and direction of paper used in the receiver's terminal. If the receiver does not

use paper of the same size and direction as that of the original, the fax image

may be output reduced, trimmed at the both edges, or divided into two or

more sheets. When sending an important original, we recommend you to ask

the receiver about the size and direction of the paper used in their terminal.

❒ When sending an original of an irregular (i.e. non-standard) size or part of a

large original, you can specify the scan area precisely. ⇒ P.86 “CHOOSING

THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)”

❒ You can scan non-standard sized documents as standard sized documents

with the Irregular Scan Area feature. When you turn on this feature, the area

scanned will be in the specified range regardless of the actual document size.

A blank margin will appear or the image will be truncated at the receiving

end.

❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc., has completely dried before set-

ting your original. If it is still wet, the contact glass will be marked and those

marks will appear on the received image.

❒ If you set an A4 size original in the sideways direction, the machine rotates

the image by 90 degrees before sending it. ⇒ P.12 “Transmission With Image

Rotation”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL

-How to set A4, B4, A3, LT, LG and DLT size originals

Where original is set

Original

Exposure glass

Document Feeder(ADF)

ND0X01E2

-How to set A4, A5 and B5 size originals

Where original is set

Original

Exposure glass

Document Feeder(ADF)

ND0X01E1

Limitation

❒ A5 size on the exposure glass is not detected.

Setting a Single Original on

the Exposure Glass

Set originals that cannot be placed in

the Document Feeder (ADF) such as a

book on the exposure glass one page

at a time.

A Lift the Document Feeder (ADF)

by at least 30 degrees. Place the

original face down and align its

upper left corner with the refer-

ence mark at the upper left corner

of the exposure glass.

ND1C01E0

1. Reference mark

2. Scale

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

❒ Do not open the Document Feeder

(ADF) while it is scanning the orig-

inals. Otherwise, document will be

jammed.

Note

❒ If you do not raise the Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF) by at least

30 degrees, the original size will

not be detected.

❒ You cannot scan the original using

the Document Feeder (ADF), Scan-

ning is not possible if there are any

documents left on the exposure

glass. Remove any remaining doc-

uments from the exposure glass

before you begin.

B Close the Document Feeder

(ADF).

Note

❒ When sending a bound original,

the received image may contain

some black areas. To reduce this

effect, hold down the original to

prevent its bound part from ris-

ing.

Original is on exposure glass.

Remove original.

ND0X04E1

Note

❒ If an original jams, press the {Clear/

Stop} key then remove the original

carefully.

-Bound Original Page Order

When sending bound originals

(books, magazines, etc.), you can

choose to have either the left page or

right page sent first.

❒ If your original is bent or folded,

flatten it before you set it.

❒ Set thin originals on the exposure

glass.

Note

Reference

❒ The default setting is Send Left

Page First. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

For information about the sizes

and number of originals that can

be placed in the Document Feeder

(ADF), see P.14 “ACCEPTABLE

TYPES OF ORIGINALS”.

Setting Originals in the

Document Feeder (ADF)

Use the Document Feeder (ADF) to

scan in a stack of originals in one op-

eration. The Document Feeder (ADF)

can handle both single-sided and

double-sided originals.

Limitation

❒ Place all the originals to be sent in

a single stack.

❒ You cannot set originals in the

Document Feeder (ADF) one page

at a time or in sheaves.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL

Feeder (ADF) with this function

turned off, a paper jam may occur.

A Adjust the original guide to

match the size of your originals.

Align the edge of your originals

and stack them in the Document

Feeder (ADF) face up.

-Destination Tray for Originals

Scanned From the Document

Feeder (ADF)

You can have originals scanned in

from the Document Feeder (ADF) ei-

ther delivered to the Document Feed-

er Tray, or the External Tray.

ND1X02E5

1. Limit mark

2. Document guide

ND1D04E0

1. ADF tray

-Scanning In Mixed Sized

Originals

2. ADF external tray

If you wish to scan in stacks of origi-

nals containing mixed paper sizes

from Document Feeder (ADF), you

can have the machine automatically

detect the size of each original.

Note

❒ If you select the ADF external tray,

you cannot use the Stamp feature.

❒ To choose which tray is used, edit

the Output Tray setting in the Sys-

tem Settings. See “USER TOOLS”

of the System Settings.

Note

❒ By default this feature is turned

off. To turn it on, adjust the User

Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

❒ Scanning may take slightly longer

when this function is turned on.

❒ Small originals may be sent at a

slight slant if they are not stacked

flush against the Document Feeder

(ADF) document guides.

❒ If you try and set a stack of mixed

size originals in the Document

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GETTING STARTED

WHERE INCOMING MESSAGE ARE

DELIVERED—OUTPUT TRAY

To change where incoming messages

are delivered, adjust the Output Tray

setting in the System Settings.

Finisher, incoming messages are

automatically delivered to the In-

ternal Tray.

Note

When the Selected Output

Tray Becomes Full

❒ If you receive messages larger than

12.9” (330mm) on a regular basis,

we recommend that you choose an

Output Tray setting other than In-

ternal Tray.

If you install the optional Finisher, the

machine automatically detects when

the selected Output Tray becomes

full. When this happens, a warning

will appear on the display and the

message will be received using Sub-

stitute Reception. Messages received

this way will be automatically print-

ed as soon as you empty the Output

Tray.

When the Finisher is Installed

You can use the Finisher for large ca-

pacity paper delivery and sort deliv-

ery.

Limitation

❒ When the optional 3000-sheet Fin-

isher is installed and you set the

Output Tray to Internal Tray, re-

ceived messages longer than 12.9”

(330mm) are delivered to the Fin-

isher Proof Tray. For example, if

the first page sent is 8.5" × 11" L/

A4L and the following pages are

11" × 17" L/A3L, the first page

will be delivered to the Internal

Tray and the following pages to

the Finisher Proof Tray.

❒ If you have selected the optional

1000-sheet Finisher as the Output

Tray and a copy document longer

than 13.3” (340mm) is left in the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Sending a Fax Message

OVERVIEW

Overview

The basic procedure to send a fax message is:

A Make sure the Fax indicator is lit

B Set your original

C Dial the number

D Press {Start

}

The rest of this section describes these steps and the various features that are

available in more detail.

There are two ways to send a fax message:

• Memory Transmission

• Immediate Transmission

Check the indicators on the operation panel to check which mode is currently ac-

tive and press the Transmission Mode key to toggle between them.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

MEMORY TRANSMISSION

In Memory Transmission mode, after

you press the {Start} key, the machine

doesn't dial the destination until all

pages of your fax message have

scanned into memory (in contrast

with Immediate Transmission, where

the number is dialed first and pages

are scanned and sent one by one).

❒ Maximum number of destinations

per Memory Transmission: 200

❒ Combined total number of desti-

nations that can be stored: 500

❒ The number of pages that you can

store in memory depends on the

original images and the scan set-

tings. You can store up to 160 stan-

dard pages (ITU-T No.1 chart,

Resolution: Standard, photo mode:

OFF).

Memory Transmission is useful be-

cause:

• You can take your original away

from the machine without having

to wait too long

❒ As default, the machine will return

to the default transmission mode

(Memory Transmission) after ev-

ery transmission. You can change

this so that the current mode is

maintained. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

• While your message is being sent,

other people can operate the ma-

chine

• You can send the same message to

more than one place in a single op-

eration (Broadcasting)

❒ You can expand the amount of

memory available for storing doc-

uments by installing either of the

following options:

Important

❒ If there is a power failure (main

power switch is off) or the plug is

pulled out for more than 1 hour, all

the files stored in memory are de-

leted. As soon as power is restored,

the Power Failure Report is print-

ed to help you identify deleted

files . If you turn just the operation

switch off, files are not deleted. ⇒

• With optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander: Up to about 480 pages

• With optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander and the Hard Disk: Up

to about 3000 pages

A Make sure that the Memory

Transmission indicator is lit.

P.126

“WHEN

TURNED OFF OR FAILS”

POWER

Standard

Detail

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

Limitation

ND2L03E1

❒ If memory is full (0% appears on

the display), Memory Transmis-

sion is disabled. Use Immediate

Transmission instead.

If it isn't, press the {Transmission

Mode} key.

B Set the original.

Note

❒ Maximum number of Memory

Limitation

Transmission files: 200

❒ You can send the first pages

from the exposure glass then

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMORY TRANSMISSION

the remaining pages from the

Document Feeder (ADF). After

you place the last page on the

exposure glass, you have 60 sec-

onds to insert the remaining

pages in the Document Feeder

(ADF).

er destination. Repeat this step

for all destinations.

If you make a mistake, press the

❒ Note that you cannot set pages

on the exposure glass after you

have started using the Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF).

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the cor-

rect number again.

Note

❒ Do not open the Document

Feeder (ADF) while it is scan-

ning in originals.

❒ When dialing with the number

keys or using Chain Dial (P.46

“Chain Dial”), you can select the

line type (G3 or G4) before

pressing [Add] in step 4.

Note

❒ Place the original you want to

store in memory on the expo-

sure glass or the Document

Feeder (ADF). To store multiple

page originals from the expo-

sure glass, set them page by

page.

❒ If you do not set an original

within 30 seconds of entering a

destination fax number, the

transmission is cancelled.

Reference

P.43 “DIALING”

❒ You can scan half the pages of

your original from the exposure E Press the {Start} key.

glass and the remainder from

d Dial

Clear / Stop

the Document Feeder (ADF).

When you have finished scan-

ning from the exposure glass,

place the rest of the pages in the

Document Feeder (ADF) and

press{Start} .

ABC

DEF

ook Dial

e /

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

❒ The original can be placed at

any time up until you press the

OPER

{

Start} key.

ND2R02E1

Reference

P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGI-

NAL”

The machine starts scanning the

original.

The machine calls the destination.

The name or fax number which is

programmed as the RTI or CSI in

C Select any scan settings you re-

quire. ⇒ P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”

D Dial. If you wish to send the same

message to more than one desti-

nation, press [Add] and dial anoth-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

the other end is shown on the dis-

play.

-Sending a Fax Message

Immediately

To send a fax message immediately,

use Immediate Transmission. If you

have just set up an original for broad-

casting, Immediate Transmission will

interrupt the current communication.

Reference

P.193 “RTI/TTI”

If there are files queued in addition to

the file being currently sent, your

original is not be sent until the

queued files have been sent.

After transmission, the machine

will return to standby mode.

-Automatic Redial

If a fax message could not be trans-

mitted because the line was busy or

an error occurred during transmis-

sion, redialing is done 4 times at 5

minutes intervals (these figures vary

according to which country you are

in).

-Checking the Transmission

Result

• Turn the Transmission Result Re-

port on if you want a report to be

printed after every successful

transmission. ⇒ P.24 “MEMORY

TRANSMISSION”

If redialing fails after four redials, the

machine cancels the transmission a nd

prints the Transmission Result Report

or Communication Failure Report. ⇒

P.29 “Transmission Result Report

(Memory Transmission)”, P.29 “Com-

munication Failure Report”, P.126

“WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF

OR FAILS”

If you leave the Transmission Re-

sult Report off, the report will not

be printed after every transmis-

sion. However, should a transmis-

sion fail, a Communication Failure

Report will be printed instead.

• If you turn the Transmission Re-

sult Report (Memory Transmis-

sion) off, the Error Report will be

printed when the communication

on fails.

• You can also check the transmis-

sion result by examining the TCR.

⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE TCR”

You can either print or scroll

through the TCR on the display. ⇒

P.110 “CHECKING THE TRANS-

MISSION RESULT (TX STATUS)”

-Broadcasting Sequence

If you dial several destinations for the

same message (Broadcasting) the

messages are sent in the order in

which they were dialed. If the fax

message could not be transmitted, the

machine redials that destination after

the last destination specified for

Broadcasting. For example, if you

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMORY TRANSMISSION

specify four destinations A through D

for broadcasting, and if the lines to

destinations A and C are busy, the

machine dials the destinations in the

following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.

-Batch Transmission

If you send a fax message by Memory

Transmission and there is another fax

message waiting in memory to be

sent to the same destination, that

message is sent along with your orig-

inal. Several fax messages can be sent

with a single call, thus eliminating the

need for several separate calls. This

helps save communication costs and

reduce transmission time.

-Broadcasting: Checking

Progress

To check which destinations the fax

message has been sent to so far, print

the TX file list. ⇒ P.109 “PRINTING A

LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT

TX FILE LIST)”

Fax messages for which the transmis-

sion time has been set in advance are

sent by batch transmission when that

time is reached.

Note

❒ By default Batch Transmission is

switched on. You can switch it on

or off with the User Parameters. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

-If Memory Runs Out While

Storing an Original

If you run out of memory while stor-

ing an original (free space reaches

0%), “Memory full”is displayed.

Press Exit to transmit the stored pages

only.

-ECM (Error Correction Mode)

This feature automatically resends

data that wasn't transmitted success-

fully using a system that complies

with international standards.

ECM requires that the destination

machine has the same feature.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ By default ECM is switched on.

You can change this with the Key

Operator Settings. ⇒ P.166 “KEY

OPERATOR SETTINGS”

❒ By default, successfully scanned

pages are sent. If you wish to

change this setting, please contact

your service representative.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

❒ If you press the {Clear/Stop} key,

the original jams, or memory be-

comes full during Parallel Memory

Transmission, the machine stops

transmitting and prints the Trans-

mission Result Report (Memory

Transmission). The file is erased.

-Parallel Memory Transmission

This function dials while the original

is being scanned. Standard Memory

Transmission stores the original in

memory, then dials the destination.

Parallel Memory Transmission al-

lows you to quickly determine

whether a connection was made. In

addition, this function scans the orig-

inal faster than Immediate Transmis-

sion and is useful when you are in a

hurry and need to use the original for

another purpose.

❒ Total stored page numbers are not

printed in the Parallel Memory

Transmission. Only the page num-

bers are printed, such as P.1, P,2

not ¹/₂, ²/₂

Note

❒ If you run out of memory, normal

Memory Transmission takes place.

When and if this happens varies

depending on the various options

you have installed.

Note

❒ By default this feature is turned on.

You can change this with the User

Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

Limitation

Memory Storage Report

❒ Standard Memory Transmission is

used instead of Parallel Memory

Transmission in the following cas-

es.

This report is printed after an original

is stored in memory. It helps you re-

view the contents and the destina-

tions of stored originals. Even if the

machine is set up not to print this re-

port, it is still printed if an original

could not be stored.

• When the line is busy and could

not be connected to

• With Send Later

• With Transfer Request

• With 2-Sided Transmission

Note

❒ You can turn this report on and off.

By default it is not printed. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

• When you store an original for

Memory Transmission while

another communication is in

progress

❒ You can choose whether to include

part of the original image on the re-

port (part of the image is printed

by default). ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

• When two or more destinations

are specified

• When you send just an Auto

Document

• When the original is set on the

exposure glass

• With the image rotation

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMORY TRANSMISSION

Transmission Result Report

(Memory Transmission)

This report is printed when a Memo-

ry Transmission is completed so you

can check the result of the transmis-

sion. If two or more destinations are

specified, this report is printed after

the fax message has been sent to all

the destinations. If the machine is set

up not to print this report and the fax

message could not be successfully

transmitted, the Communication Fail-

ure Report is printed. ⇒ P.29 “Com-

munication Failure Report”

Note

❒ By default this function is turned

on so you need to turn it off. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

❒ You can choose whether to include

part of the original image on the re-

port (by default, part of the image

is printed).⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

Communication Failure Report

This report is only printed if the

Transmission Result Report is turned

off and a message could not be suc-

cessfully transmitted with Memory

Transmission. Use it to keep a record

of failed transmissions so you can

send them again.

Note

❒ You can choose whether to include

part of the original image on the re-

port (by default, part of the image

is printed). ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION

A Press [Info.].

Canceling a Transmission

While the Original Is Being

Scanned in

A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

d Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

ND1X03E0

ook Dial

e /

The Information menu is shown.

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

B Enter the “Check/Cancel TX

Files” function number with the

number keys.

Enter

PRS

TUV

WXY

OPER

ND2R02E2

The machine will stop storing the

original and the data will not be

sent.

Note

❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is

not shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓N-

ext].

Canceling a Transmission

While the Message is Being

Sent

C Press the < or > key until the

file you want to delete is shown

and press [Delete].

Use this procedure to cancel a trans-

mission after the original has been

scanned in.

Limitation

❒ If transmission finishes while you

are caring out this procedure, it

will not be canceled.

Note

ND1X02E7

❒ If you cancel a file while it is being

sent, transmission is halted as soon

as you finish this procedure. How-

ever, some pages of your message

may have already been sent and

will be received at the other end.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CANCELING A MEMORY TRANSMISSION

D Press [Yes].

ND1X03E0

The file is erased.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ To delete another file, repeat

steps 3 and 4.

F Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION

With Immediate Transmission, when

you press the {Start} key, the fax

number is dialed straight away (i.e.

immediately). The message is

scanned and transmitted page by

page without being stored in memo-

ry. This contrasts with Memory

Transmission which scans in all pages

into memory before dialing the desti-

nation.

Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

A Check that the Immediate Trans-

mission indicator is lit.

Standard

Detail

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

ND2L03E1

If it is not lit, press the {Transmis-

sion mode.} key.

Immediate Transmission is useful if

you want immediate confirmation

that the message is being sent to the

correct destination (just check the oth-

er terminal's RTI or CSI on the opera-

tion panel during transmission).

B Set your original.

Limitation

❒ Do not open the Document

Feeder (ADF) while it is scan-

ning the originals. Otherwise,

document will be jammed.

Note

❒ You cannot send the same message

to multiple destinations (Broad-

casting). Use Memory Transmis-

sion for this purpose.

Note

❒ You can set the original any

time up until you press the

❒ Place the original on the exposure

glass or in the Document Feeder

(ADF). To send two or more pages

from the exposure glass, set them

one page at a time.

{

Start} key.

Reference

How to Set an Original ⇒ P.18

“HOW TO SET AN ORIGINAL”

❒ You can scan some pages of your

original from the exposure glass

and the remainder from the Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF). When you

have finished scanning from the

exposure glass, place the remain-

der of the pages in the Document

C Select any scan settings you re-

quire. ⇒ P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”

D Dial.

Feeder

(ADF)

and

press

{

Start}within ten seconds.

❒ By default, the transmission mode

selected when the machine is

turned on or when modes are

cleared (transmission mode home

setting) is Memory Transmission.

You can change this with the User

If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the cor-

rect number again.

Note

❒ If you are dialing with the num-

ber keys or Chain Dial (P.46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION

“Chain Dial”), you can select the

type of line you want (G3 or

G4).

-If the Connection Could Not Be

Made

Reference

P.43 “DIALING”

If it was not possible to make a con-

nection with the number you dialed

(e.g., the line was busy or there is a

line problem), the following display

will appear.

P.41 “CHANGING LINE TYPE”

E Press the {Start} key.

d Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

ook Dial

e /

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

You have two options:

PRS

TUV

WXY

• To have the machine redial and try

and send the message by Memory

Transmission, press [Memory TX].

All originals will be scanned into

memory then redialing will begin.

Enter

OPER

ND2R02E1

The machine calls the destination.

While it is dialing, the number or

name which is programmed as the

RTI or CSI in the machine of the

other party is shown on the dis-

play. When connected, the ma-

chine starts scanning the original.

• To cancel this transmission, press

[Cancel] then [OK].

-ECM (Error Correction Mode)

This feature automatically sends data

that wasn't transmitted successfully

again using a technique called ECM,

an internationally recognized proto-

col (requires that the destination ma-

chine has the same feature).

Reference

P.193 “RTI/TTI”

Note

After transmission the machine

will return to standby mode.

❒ By default, ECM is on. You can

turn it off. ⇒ P.171 “ECM”

Transmission Result Report

(Immediate Transmission)

If you turn this report on, a report will

be printed after every Immediate

Transmission so you have a record of

whether the transmission was suc-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

cessful or not. If the machine is set up

not to print this report and the fax

message could not be successfully

transmitted, the Error report is print-

ed instead.

B Press the {On Hook Dial} key.

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

On Hook Dial

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Note

Pause /

Redial

Enter

❒ You can switch this report on or off

with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

PRS

TUV

WXY

Tone

OPER

ND2R03E2

On-hook Dial

You will hear a low tone from the

internal speaker. If you wish to

cancel this operation, press the {On

Hook Dial} key again.

This is just like using the external tele-

phone, except you do not have to pick

up the external telephone before dial-

ing. Just press the On Hook Dial key

and dial the number. If you hear a

voice, you can pick up the external

telephone and speak with the other

party.

C Dial.

Limitation

❒ This feature is not available in

The machine immediately dials the

destination. If you make a mistake,

press the {On hook dial} or {Clear

Modes/Energy Saver} key and return

to step 2.

some countries.

❒ On-hook Dial does not work with

ISDN lines.

Reference

D When the line is connected and

you hear a high-pitched tone,

press the {Start} key.

P.192 “Monitor Volume”

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

Reference

P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGI-

NAL”

• If you hear a voice, pick up the

external telephone before you

press the {Start} key and notify

the destination that you want to

send a fax message (ask them to

switch to Fax mode).

P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMMEDIATE TRANSMISSION

• After transmission the machine

will return to standby mode.

C Dial.

If you make a mistake, replace the

external telephone and try again

from step 2.

Manual Dial

D When the line is connected and

you hear a high-pitched tone,

press the {Start} key to send your

fax message.

The external telephone is required to use

this function.

Pick up the handset of the external

telephone and dial. When the line is

connected and you hear a high-

pitched tone, press the {Start} key to

send your fax message. If, on the oth-

er hand, you hear a voice at the other

end, continue your conversation as

you would normally over the tele-

phone.

E Replace the handset of the exter-

nal telephone.

After transmission the machine

will return to standby mode.

Limitation

❒ Manual Dial does not work with

ISDN lines.

❒ The result of the transmission with

manual dial is not mentioned in

the Transmission Result Report

(Immediate Transmission).

❒ In energy saving mode, you may

hear no sound for a few seconds af-

ter picking up the external tele-

phone. You can operate after you

can hear the tone.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

Reference

P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGI-

NAL”

P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”

B Pick up the external telephone.

You will hear a tone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

CANCELING AN IMMEDIATE

TRANSMISSION

Note

Canceling a Transmission

Before You Have Pressed Start

❒ If the transmission finishes

while you are carrying out this

procedure, it will not be can-

celed.

Use this procedure to cancel a trans-

mission before you have pressed the

{

Start} key.

A Press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-

er} key.

Program

Interrupt

Clear Modes

Energy Saver

eed Dial

ND2R01E0

Note

❒ When you have already set the

original, you can also cancel an

Immediate Transmission by re-

moving the original from the

machine.

Canceling a Transmission

After You Have Pressed the

Start Key

A Press the {Clear/Stop} key then re-

move the original.

d Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

ook Dial

e /

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

OPER

ND2R02E2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCAN SETTINGS

You may wish to send many different

types of fax message. Some of these

may be difficult to reproduce at the

other end. However, your machine

has three settings that you can adjust

to help you transmit your document

with the best possible image quality.

quire greater clarity. This resolu-

tion is twice as fine as Standard.

❖

Super Fine (Optional 400dpi card is

required: 16

dpi)

15.4 lines/mm, 400 400

× ×

Select for originals with very fine

details or when you require the

best possible image clarity. This

resolution is eight times as fine as

Standard.

❖

Resolution:

Standard, Detail, Super Fine (op-

tion)

Image density:

Auto Image Density, Manual Im-

age Density (5 levels)

Limitation

❒ If the other party's machine does

not support the resolution at

which you are sending, this ma-

chine automatically switches to a

resolution which is supported.

Original type:

Text, Text·Photo, Photo

❒ Sending with Super Fine resolu-

tion requires that your machine

has the optional 400dpi option and

the other party's machine has the

capability to receive fax messages

at Super Fine resolution. Note that

even if the option is installed on

your machine, transmission and

reception may take place using

Detail resolution if the other par-

ty's machine does not support this

feature.

Resolution

Images and text are scanned into the

machine by converting them to se-

quences of dots. The frequency of

dots determines the quality of the im-

age and how long it takes to transmit.

Therefore, images scanned at high

resolution (Super Fine) have high

quality but transmission takes longer.

Conversely, low resolution (Stan-

dard) scanning results in less quality

but your original is sent more quick-

ly. Choose the setting that matches

your needs based upon this trade off

between speed and image clarity.

Note

❒ When the machine is turned on or

modes are cleared, the resolution is

set to Standard by default. You can

change this with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

❖

Standard (8

dpi)

3.85 lines/mm, 200 100

Select for originals containing nor-

❒ By default, the resolution returns

to the home setting after every

transmission. You change this with

the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

mal sized characters.

❖

Detail (8

7.7 lines/mm, 200

200 dpi)

Select for originals containing

small characters or when you re-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

dard again, the image density will

A Press the Resolution key to

switch between resolutions. The

indicators above the key show the

current selection.

not return to Standard.

Note

❒ If you select Text·Photo or Photo,

the transmission will take longer

than when Text is selected.

Standard

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Detail

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

❒ If you send a fax message with

Text·Photo or Photo and the back-

ground of the received image is

dirty, reduce the density setting

and re-send the fax.

ND2L03E2

Original Type

❒ When the machine is turned on or

modes are cleared, Original Type

is set to Text. You can change this

with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

If your original contains photo-

graphs, illustrations or diagrams with

complex shading patterns or grays,

select the appropriate Original Type

to optimize image clarity.

❒ By default, the machine returns to

the Original Type home setting af-

ter every transmission. You can

change this with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

❖

Text (Default Setting)

Text is selected when the Photo

and Text·Photo indicators are not

lit. Select Text to send an original

containing a high-contrast black-

and-white image. Use this setting

even if your original contains text

and photographs if you only want

to send clearer text.

A Press the {Original Type} key re-

peatedly until the indicator

matching the type you require is

lit.

❖

Text·Photo

Text Photo

Text·Photo is selected when the

Text·Photo indicator is lit. Select

Text·Photo to send an original con-

taining both a high-contrast black-

and-white image, such as text, and

a halftone image such as a photo-

graph.

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C02E3

When both indicators are not lit,

the Original Type is Text.

Photo

Image Density (Contrast)

Photo is selected when the Photo

indicator is lit.

Select Photo to send an original

containing a halftone image such

as a photograph or a color original.

The text and diagrams in your origi-

nal should stand out clearly from the

paper they are written on. If your

original has a darker background

than normal (for example, a newspa-

per clipping), or if the writing is faint,

adjust the image density.

Limitation

❒ If you select Text·Photo or Photo,

the Resolution is automatically set

to Detail. Even if you select Stan-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCAN SETTINGS

By default, this machine will auto-

matically select a density setting ap-

propriate to the original (Auto Image

Density). If you wish to set the densi-

ty yourself, use Manual Image Densi-

ty.

Mixing Scan Settings in a

Multiple Page Original

When sending an original consisting

of several pages, you can select differ-

ent Image Density, Resolution and

Original Types for each page.

Auto Image Density

Set your original, select the scan set-

tings for the first page, dial and press

The machine automatically selects an

image density which is the most ap-

propriate for the original.

{

Start} as you would normally. Then

follow one of the following two pro-

cedures.

By default, Auto Image Density is se-

lected when the machine is turned on

or modes are cleared. You can change

this with the User Parameters. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”

When Setting Originals on the Exposure

Glass

While the machine is bleeping, you

have about 60 seconds (10 for Imme-

diate Transmission) to select density,

resolution and original type. The re-

maining time is shown on the display.

A If the Auto Image Density indica-

tor is not lit, press the l key to

turn it on.

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

A Check the pages you wish to

ND2C02E1

change the setting.

B Remove the previous page and set

Manual Image Density

the next page.

Use the Image Density keys to vary

the image density within 5 levels.

C Select the Image Density, Resolu-

tion and Original type.

Standard

Detail

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

A Make sure that the Auto Image

Density indicator is not lit. If it is

lit press the l key to turn it off.

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

ND2L03E0

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Text Photo

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C02E1

ND2C02E0

B Press the i or j key to change

the density. The indicators above

the keys show the level.

Note

❒ You adjust settings for each

page before you press the

Text Photo

{

Start} key.

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C02E2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

When Setting Originals in the Document

Feeder (ADF)

A Check the pages you wish to

change the setting.

B Select the Image Density, Resolu-

tion and Original Type before the

next page is scanned.

Standard

Detail

Commu-

nicating

Receive

File

Confidential

File

Immediate

Trans.

Memory

Trans.

Start

Manual RX

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Super Fine

ND2L03E0

Text Photo

Photo

Special Orig.

Lighter

Darker

Auto Image Density

ND2C02E0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHANGING LINE TYPE

The optional ISDN unit is required to use this function.

This machine comes with a single An-

alog (PSTN) line connection for G3

communication as standard. If you

install the ISDN Unit option, an extra

digital (ISDN) line connection for

both G3 and G4 communication be-

comes available.

-To Switch to G4

If the {F4} key is not lit, press it once

to switch to G4.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

When you use G4, press the {F4} key

to lit the lamp.

ND2L04E1

G4 is selected when this key is lit, G3

is selected when it is not lit.

Press the key once to switch between

G3 and G4.

Limitation

❒ Under the operation procedure for

transmission, you can select the

line type if dialing with the num-

ber keys or Chain Dial.

❒ If you select G4 mode, JBIG com-

pression is not available.

-Which line is used for G3

-To Switch to G3

transmissions?

If the {F4} key is lit, press it once to

ISDN lines can be used for G3 com-

munication as well as G4 communica-

tions, so this machine is set by default

to use the ISDN line for both G3 and

G4 transmissions. If you wish to use

the Analog (PSTN) line for G3 trans-

missions, please contact your service

representative.

switch to G3.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

ND2L04E1

Note

❒ When you use G3 with ISDN, you

can set the subaddress.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

-Auto Identification

This feature used when G4 is selected.

The machine first tries a G4 commu-

nication and if it cannot connect be-

cause the receiver is not a G4

terminal, it automatically switches to

G3 and redials.

Note

❒ If the G3 line at the destination is

connected to the ISDN via a TA

(Terminal adapter) or a PBX, since

the called number is on ISDN, it is

regarded as G4 and the Auto Iden-

tification feature may not automat-

ically switch this machine to G3.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIALING

There are three main ways to dial a

number:

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

❖

Number keys:

Reference

P.18 “HOW TO SET AN ORIGI-

NAL”

Enter numbers directly using the

key pad on the right side of the op-

eration panel.

P.37 “SCAN SETTINGS”

❖

Quick Dials:

B Enter the fax number with the

When you have stored a destina-

tion's number in a Quick Dial key,

you can dial the number by just

pressing that key. Additionally,

you can store a name that will ap-

pear on the display whenever you

press that Quick Dial.

number keys.

d Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

ook Dial

e /

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Enter

❖

Speed Dials:

PRS

TUV

WXY

If you store a number in a Speed

Dial, when you want to dial it, just

press the Speed Dial key followed

by a 2 or 3 digit code. Like Quick

Dials, you can store a name along

with the number.

OPER

ND2R02E0

The digits appear on the display as

you enter them.

This section covers these features and

others in more detail.

Number Keys

Note

Enter numbers directly using the key

pad on the right side of the operation

panel.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key to erase the

wrong digits and try again.

Note

❒ If you wish to send this message

to more than one destination,

press [Add], then enter the next

destination.

❒ Maximum length of a fax number:

254 digits.

❒ You can insert pauses and tones in

a fax number. ⇒ P.44 “Pause”, P.45

“Tone”

❒ If the optional ISDN unit is in-

stalled, select G3 or G4 before

you go to the next step. ⇒ P.41

“CHANGING LINE TYPE”

❒ If the ISDN unit is installed, you

may need to enter a subaddress. ⇒

P.45 “Subaddress (ISDN option re-

quired)”

C Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

99. That is because the fax numbers

have been dialed from the number

keys for some of the waiting files.

When the waiting files have been

sent and their fax numbers are de-

leted from memory, additional fax

numbers can be dialed.

-Restrictions When Dialing with

the Number Keys

Fax numbers entered with the num-

ber keys are stored in internal memo-

ry (separate from memory for storing

original data). Therefore, you cannot

program more than 99 numbers with

the number Keys for the following:

❒ The display shows the percentage

of free space in memory for storing

originals. Since fax numbers are

stored in separate memory, dialing

fax numbers from the number keys

does not change the percentage on

the display.

• Destinations specified in a Memo-

ry Transmission (including Confi-

dential Transmission and Polling

Reception)

• Transfer Stations and End Receiv-

ers specified in a Transfer Request

Pause

• Destinations and Transfer Stations

specified in a Group

Press the {Pause/Redial} key when di-

aling or storing a number to insert

about a two-second pause.

For example, when 90 destinations

are registered in a Group with the

number keys, only 9 destinations can

be dialed for Memory Transmission

from thenumber keys.

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

On Hook Dial

Note

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Pause /

Redial

❒ When this machine is requested to

transfer a call (i.e. becomes a

Transfer Station), 2 fax numbers

are automatically stored. There-

fore, the number of destinations

that can be dialed from the number

keys decreases by two whenever

this machine is requested to trans-

fer a call.

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

Tone

OPER

ND2R03E1

Limitation

❒ You cannot insert a pause before

the first digit of a fax number.

❒ When a total of 99 fax numbers is

stored, only Immediate Transmis-

sion is allowed.

Note

❒ A pause is shown as a “-” on the

❒ If a Group is defined when there

are files queued for transmission,

the message “Memory is full

and you cannot enter with

number keys” may be shown on

the display and no additional fax

numbers can be stored even if the

number of destinations specified

from the number keys is less than

display.

❒ You can insert a pause in numbers

stored in Quick Dials and Speed

Dials.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIALING

rect your fax message to a particular

terminal at the destination.

Tone

This feature allows a machine con-

nected to a pulse dialing line to send

tonal signals (for example if you want

to use a special service on a tone dial-

Limitation

❒ Subaddress can only be used with

ISDN.

ing line). When you press the {Tone

}

Note

key, the machine dials the number us-

ing tonal signals.

❒ You need to program a User Func-

tion key with the subaddress func-

tion. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING USER

FUNCTION KEYS”

Limitation

❒ You cannot place a tone before the

❒ You can program a subaddress

number in a Quick Dial or Speed

Dial.

first digit of a fax number.

❒ Some services may not be available

when using the {Tone} key.

❒ If you want to assign a subaddress

to your fax machine, contact your

service representative.

Note

❒ A tone is shown as a “ • ” on the

display.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Select either G4 or G3 (ISDN).

-Sending Tonal Signals by ISDN

(ISDN Option Required)

C Dial the fax number with the

You can still send tone signals to a G3

user even if the machine is only con-

nected to an ISDN line.

number keys.

D Press the User Function key

({F1}-{F5}) where the subaddress

function has been registered.

Note

❒ This feature can only be used for

Memory or Immediate Transmis-

sion. You cannot dial through

ISDN using On-hook Dial or Man-

ual Dial.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

ND2L04E3

“/” will appear on the display.

Subaddress (ISDN option required)

ISDN allows two or more terminals

(such as a facsimile and digital tele-

phone) to be connected to a single

line. These terminals are identified by

their subaddress numbers. If the ter-

minals connected to the line at a des-

tination are assigned subaddresses,

dialing a subaddress allows you to di-

E Enter the destination subaddress

with the number keys.

F Press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Additionally, you can store a name

that will appear on the display when-

ever you press that Quick Dial.

Chain Dial

This allows you to compose a tele-

phone number from various parts,

some of which may be stored in

Quick Dials or Speed Dials and some

of which may be input using the

number keys.

Note

❒ To check the contents of the Quick

dial, print the list. ⇒ P.158 “RE-

PORTS/LISTS”

❒ If the Quick Dial key is used as oth-

er functions like Groups, you can-

not program the Quick Dial in it.

Limitation

❒ Maximum length of telephone or

fax number: 254 digits

❒ Flip the Quick Dial plate over to

access Quick Dial keys 01-28 or 29-

56.

Note

❒ For Memory Transmission and Im-

mediate Transmission, insert a

pause between numbers. For On-

hook Dial and Manual Dial, no

pause is needed.

❒ You can have the label stored with

a Quick Dial printed on the first

page received at the other end. ⇒

P.99 “Label Insertion”

Reference

P.43 “DIALING”

-(Example) 01133-1-555333

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37

“SCAN SETTINGS”

Assume that 01133 is stored in Quick

Dial 01 and that 1 is stored in Speed

Dial 01.

B Press the {Quick Dial } key in

which the destination's number is

programmed.

A Place the original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Press {Quick Dial} key 01.

C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.

D Press the {Speed Dial} key and {

and { } using the number keys.

E Press { }, { }, { }, { }, { } and

} using the number keys.

}

ND2L05E1

{

If the destination's name has been

stored, the name is shown on the

display. Otherwise, the fax num-

ber is shown.

F Press the {Start} key.

Quick Dials

When you have stored a destination's

number in a Quick Dial key, you can

dial the number by just pressing that

key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIALING

Note

B Press the {Speed Dial} key.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

ABC

DEF

❒ If you wish to dial another des-

tination, press [Add] and dial an-

other fax number.

On Hook Dial

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Pause /

Redial

PRS

TUV

WXY

C Press the {Start} key.

Enter

Tone

OPER

Speed Dials

ND2R03E3

If you store a number in a Speed Dial,

when you want to dial it, just press

the Speed Dial key followed by a 2 or

3 digit code. ⇒ P.143 “Registering

Speed Dials”

C Enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)

or three-digit code (000 to 999) for

the destination with the number

keys.

Note

❒ To check the contents of the Speed

Dials, print the list.

❒ As standard, you can use codes 00-

99 for Speed Dials. If the Optional

Fax Feature Expander is installed,

codes 000 to 999 become available.

❒ If a search letter is registered with

a Speed Dial, you can find this

number quickly using the Tele-

phone Directory feature. ⇒ P.47

“Telephone Directory”

If the destination's name has been

programmed, it flashes up on the

display. Otherwise, the fax num-

ber appears.

❒ You can have the label stored with

a Speed Dial printed on the first

page received at the other end. ⇒

P.99 “Label Insertion”

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ If you wish to dial another des-

tination, press [Add] and dial an-

other fax number.

A Place your original and select any

scan settings you require. ⇒ P.37

“SCAN SETTINGS”

D Press the {Start} key.

Telephone Directory

This feature lets you find a stored

Speed Dial quickly by just entering a

single letter, e.g., the first letter of the

name stored for that number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Preparation

D Enter the search letter by pressing

one of the Quick Dial keys (A to

Z).

To use the telephone directory,

you need to register a search letter

when you program Speed Dials. ⇒

P.143 “Registering Speed Dials”

Limitation

❒ Speed Dial codes cannot be

searched for by symbol or number.

ND2L05E1

❒ Names enclosed within ( ) are not

The names or fax numbers regis-

tered in Speed Dials are shown in

numerical order on the display.

searched for.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Press the {Speed Dial} key.

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

E Enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)

or three-digit code (000 to 999) for

the destination with the number

keys.

On Hook Dial

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Pause /

Redial

PRS

TUV

WXY

Enter

Tone

OPER

ND2R03E3

C Press [Tel.Dir.] .

Note

❒ If the list does not contain the

desired

destination,

press

[↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

Clear/Stop} key to try again.

{

❒ If you wish to dial another des-

tination, press [Add] and dial an-

other fax number.

ND1X02E8

F Press the {Start} key.

Groups

If you frequently send the same mes-

sage to more than one place, program

these numbers into a Group. Then

you can send the messages to all the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIALING

destinations in that Group with just a

few keystrokes. You can also pro-

gram a name for the Group (for exam-

ple, “Branch Offices”) which will be

B Press the Quick Dial key in which

the Group is programmed.

displayed before you press the {Start

}

key.

Preparation

ND2L05E1

You need to program the Groups.

⇒ P.129 “Registering Quick Dials”

The Group number is shown on

the display. If the Group name is

programmed, the name is also

shown on the display.

Limitation

❒ A Quick Dial programmed for

Group cannot be used for other

functions.

❒ Group Dial can be used only for

Memory Transmission and Polling

reception; it cannot be used for Im-

mediate Transmission.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and start again.

❒ Groups are only available with

Memory Transmission and Polling

reception.

❒ If you wish to dial another des-

tination, press [Add] and dial an-

other fax number.

❒ To check the contents of the

Groups, print the list.

C Press the {Start} key.

❒ You can program up to 9 Groups.

❒ You can store up to 200 destina-

tions in a Group. If a Quick Dial or

Speed Dial is registered in two

Groups, it takes up the space of

one destination.

Optional Group Dial

An Optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

❒ Groups can contain Transfer Sta-

tion codes, but note that these

Groups cannot be used for normal

transmission because the Transfer

Station codes are not dialable num-

bers. ⇒ P.173 “Multistep Transfer”

If the Optional Group Dial function

has been assigned to a User Function

key, dialing is easy. Just press the

User Function key and enter the Op-

tional Group number (10 - 30).

You can use Optional Groups to spec-

ify several destinations at a time. You

can program up to 9 Groups and up

to 21 Optional Groups.

Reference

⇒ P.135 “Registering Groups”

A Set your original and select any

Preparation

scan settings you require.

To use this function, you need to

have programmed a User Function

key as the Optional Group Dial

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

function in advance. ⇒ P.164 “AS-

The Optional Group number is

shown on the display. If you have

previously registered a name with

this group, it is also shown on the

display.

SIGNING

KEYS”

USER

FUNCTION

Limitation

❒ Optional Group Dial can only be

used only with Memory Transmis-

sion. If you select the Immediate

Transmission mode, it automati-

cally switch to the Memory Trans-

mission mode.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ If you wish to dial more destina-

tions, press [Add] and dial an-

other number.

Note

❒ You can include up to 200 destina-

tions in a Group. If a Quick Dial or

Speed Dial is registered in two

Groups, it takes up the space of

one destination.

D Press the {Start} key.

Redial

The machine memorizes the last 10

destinations that have been dialed. If

you wish to send a message to a des-

tination which you faxed to recently,

the Redial feature saves you finding

and entering the number again.

❒ Groups can contain Transfer Sta-

tion codes, but note that these

Groups cannot be used for normal

transmission because the Transfer

Station codes are not dialable num-

bers. ⇒ P.173 “Multistep Transfer”

A Press the {Pause/Redial} key.

Reference

P.139 “Registering Optional Groups”

Speed Dial

Clear / Stop

ABC

DEF

A Set your original and select any

On Hook Dial

scan settings you require.

MNO

GHI

JKL

Start

Pause /

Redial

B Press the User Function key ({F1

}

PRS

TUV

WXY

through {F5}) in which the op-

tional Group Dial function is reg-

istered.

Enter

Tone

OPER

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

ND2R03E1

ND2L04E3

B A list of previously dialed num-

bers will flash up. If you cannot

see the number you need use the

[↑Prev.] and [↓Next] keys to scroll

through them. Then enter the

C Enter an Optional Group number

with the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIALING

code for the number you wish to

redial e.g., “01”.

Limitation

❒ The following kinds of destina-

tions are not memorized:

• Quick Dials

• Speed Dials

• Group Dials

• Destinations dialed by a Pro-

gram

• Destinations dialed as End

Receivers for Transfer Re-

quest

• Forwarding terminal of the

substitute reception.

• Destination of Memory File

Transfer

• Destinations dialed using the

external telephone keypad

• Destinations dialed by Redi-

al (regarded as already mem-

orized)

• Any destinations after the

first number if multiple des-

tinations were dialed.

❒ Do not dial any digits before

you press the Redial key. If you

press the {Pause/Redial} key af-

ter entering digits using the

number keys, a pause will be

entered instead.

Note

❒ If the receiver uses a facsimile of

the same manufacturer that is

capable of registering the RTI,

that name may be shown on the

display instead of the fax num-

ber.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

TRANSMISSION FEATURES

❒ When the stamp starts getting

lighter, replace the cartridge. ⇒

P.220 “REPLACING THE STAMP

CARTRIDGE”

Stamp

Optional Stamp Unit is required

❒ If a page was not stamped even

though the Stamp feature is turned

on, you need to re-send that page.

When sending a fax message using

the Document Feeder (ADF), the ma-

chine can stamp a circle mark at the

bottom of the original. When sending

a double sided document, they are

marked at top and bottom side on the

front page. This stamp indicates that

the original has been successfully

stored in memory for Memory Trans-

mission, or that it has been successful-

ly sent for Immediate Transmission.

❒ By default, Stamp is turned off. If

you use this feature often, you can

adjust the User Parameters so that

the home setting is on. In this case,

Stamp can easily be turned off for

any single transmission by press-

ing the {Stamp} key. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

A Press the {F5} key.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

ND2L04E2

The Stamp indicator will light.

Pressing the {F5} key again will

turn Stamp off.

ND0X01E0

ID Transmission

Limitation

❒ Stamp only works when scanning

This feature allows you to restrict

transmission of messages only to ma-

chines of the same make, and only to

those machines that have the same

Polling ID. The transmission options

let you switch ID transmission on and

off for each separate transmission.

from the Document Feeder (ADF).

❒ When you select the ADF internal

tray, Stamp does not work.

❒ While scanning the document, you

cannot switch stamp on or off.

❒ Do not open the document feeder

(ADF) while scanning the docu-

ment. Document jam should occur.

Note

❒ The default setting is off. Turn this

feature on with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

Note

❒ When the Stamp Unit installed,

{

F5} key is automatically assigned

as the Stamp key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION FEATURES

B Dial the destination fax number

F Code (SUB)

using the number keys.

Normally you can only use Confiden-

tial Transmission to send to fax ma-

chines of the same make that have the

Confidential Reception feature. How-

ever, if the other machine supports a

similar feature called “F Code”, you

can send fax messages to the other

party using this method instead.

C Press the User Function key as-

signed with the F Code feature.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

Preparation

ND2L04E3

You need to assign the F Code fea-

ture to a User Function key before-

hand.

D Enter the function number for

You can only use this feature in a

G3 communications (not with G4).

SUB(S) on the number keys.

You cannot use Chain Dial with

this feature.

You cannot select this function

when carrying out standard Confi-

dential Transmission

E Enter the ID code on the number

keys.

Note

❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long

and consist of digits, spaces, * and

# .

❒ Make sure the ID matches the

specification of the fax you are

sending to.

F Press the {Start} key.

❒ You can store IDs in Quick Dials,

Speed Dials, Groups and Pro-

grams.

❒ Messages you send using this fea-

ture are marked “SUB” on all re-

ports.

Note

❒ If you use Immediate Transmis-

sion and the destination fax ma-

chine does not support the F

code feature, a message will ap-

pear on the display to inform

you of this. In this case, press

OK to cancel the transmission.

A Set your document and make any

changes to the scan settings if nec-

essary.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

F Code (PWD)

There are times when you may wish

to use a password when sending con-

fidential faxes with the F Code fea-

ture.

Limitation

❒ You can enter a password up to 20

digits long.

Note

❒ Messages you send using this fea-

ture are marked “PWD” on all re-

ports. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

JBIG Transmission

FAX 400dpi option is required

If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image

Experts Group) compression you can

send photographic originals at high

speed across G3/IG3 lines.

Limitation

❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Trans-

mission is not available.

❒ This feature requires that the other

party's fax machine has both the

JBIG function and ECM function

(G3 communication only).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Receiving a Fax Message

IMMEDIATE RECEPTION

Each page of a received fax message is

printed as soon as it is received. This

method is used for standard fax mes-

sages.

becomes impossible and the current

communication is terminated.

Receiver (your machine)

Sender

ND1X00E2

-Display During Reception

The sender's RTI or CSI appears on

the first line.

-Reception Resolution

This machine supports Standard, De-

tail and Super Fine (option) resolu-

tions for reception. If you do not have

the 400dpi option, faxes sent at Super

Fine resolution will be printed on

your machine at Detail resolution.

This may result in a slightly different

from the sender's intention.

Reception will not take place if there

is not enough free memory left. If free

memory reaches 0 % during Immedi-

ate Reception, any further reception

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

MEMORY RECEPTION

The machine waits until all pages of

the message have been received into

memory before printing the message.

Limitation

❒ The machine may not be able to re-

ceive fax messages when the free

memory space is low.

Receiver (your machine)

Sender

Note

❒ If the memory free space reaches 0

% during Memory Reception, the

machine can no longer receive the

current fax message and stops

communicating.

ND1X00E3

This method is used with the follow-

ing features:

• Two in one P.38 “Photo”

• Multi-copy when set to multiple

copies P.65 “Multi-copy Reception”

• Reverse Order Printing P.68 “Re-

verse Order Printing”

• Substitute Reception P.57 “Substi-

tute Reception”

• 2-sided Printing (Both Optional

Duplex Tray and Fax Feature Ex-

pander are required) P.65 “2-Sided

Printing”

Important

❒ All the messages stored in memory

are deleted if the power is

switched off for more than one

hour. However, note that if the op-

tional Hard Disk is installed, all

stored messages are not deleted.

❒ If Memory Reception is switched

on, the machine may not be able to

receive large numbers of messages

or messages with a high data con-

tent. In such cases, we recommend

you switch Memory Reception

mode off or add a memory card.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SUBSTITUTE RECEPTION

If any of the conditions listed below

are met, the machine automatically

switches to Memory Reception mode

and stores messages in memory in-

stead of printing them. This reception

mode, in which a received fax mes-

sage is stored in memory unprinted,

is called Substitute Reception. Mes-

sages received using Substitute Re-

ception are automatically printed

when the condition which caused the

machine to use Substitute Reception

is rectified. Substitute Reception takes

place when:

Screening messages from

anonymous senders

To help you screen out unwanted

messages that may fill up your mem-

ory, the machine can be programmed

to only use Substitute Reception for

messages that arrive with RTI/CSI

identification.

Two settings are available:

• “When RTI or CSI is received”

• “Free”

• Paper runs out

Note

• Toner runs out

❒ The default setting is “When RTI

or CSI is received”, i.e. only store

messages when the RTI/CSI is

present. You can change this with

the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

• Paper is jammed

• The front or side cover is open

• A fax is received during a copy or

print run

• When the delivery tray is full

❒ Even if the sender does not have an

RTI or CSI, the machine will still

receive messages using Substitute

Reception if:

Limitation

❒ Reception may not take place if

there is not enough free memory

left.

• Paper becomes jammed while

the power switch is on

Note

• For some reason printing is not

possible e.g., copy job is in

progress

❒ The Receive File indicator lights to

let you know when message(s)

have been received using Substi-

tute Reception.

❒ If free memory reaches 0 % during

Substitute Reception, any further

reception becomes impossible and

the current communication is ter-

minated.

-When an RTI or CSI is Received

The machine switches to Substitute

Reception only when the sender has

programmed their RTI or CSI. If the

power is switched off for more than

an hour, all the messages received

into memory are deleted. In such a

case, the Power Failure Report or the

TCR can be used to identify which

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

messages are lost so you can ask the

senders to transmit them again.

Important

❒ If a sender has not programmed

their RTI or CSI, the machine may

reject an important fax message.

We recommend that you ask im-

portant senders to register an RTI

or CSI in advance.

-Free

The machine switches to Substitute

Reception regardless of whether or

not the sender has programmed their

RTI or CSI.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SELECTING THE RECEPTION MODE

There are two ways you can set up

your machine to handle incoming

calls:

this function. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING

USER FUNCTION KEYS”

A When the machine rings, pick up

• Fax mode

the handset.

• Tel mode (handset option or exter-

nal telephone required)

B If you hear beeps, press the User

Function key ({F1}–{F5}) which

has been programmed as the {Start

Manual RX} key.

The default setting is Fax mode. You

can change this with the User Tools.

⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

C Replace the handset. The machine

will start receiving.

Fax Mode (Auto Reception

Mode)

-Changing from Fax Mode to

TEL Mode

When a telephone call comes in, the

machine receives it automatically as a

fax message. Use this setting for a

dedicated fax line.

This function also requires the use of

a User Function key. By default, {F3

}

is assigned as the [TEL Mode] key.

To change the reception mode, press

the User Function key which has been

programmed as the TEL Mode key

({F3} by default).

Telephone Mode

When a call comes in, you have to

pick up the handset or external tele-

phone and decide whether the call is

a fax message yourself. If you hear a

voice, continue your conversation as

you would using a normal telephone.

If you hear high pitched beeps, in-

struct the machine to receive the fax

by following the procedure below.

Use this setting if you wish to share

the line between the fax machine and

a telephone.

-Receiving a Fax in Telephone

Mode

This feature needs a User Function

key programmed as {Start Manual RX}.

By default, {F1} is already assigned

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

Limitation

Transfer Station

❒ Polling ID's of the Requesting Par-

ty and Transfer Station must be

identical for this feature to work.

Transfer Stations allow you to expand

the standard features of your fax ma-

chine to set up complex networks.

Transfer Stations must be machines of

the same make.

❒ This machine will not receive a

Transfer Request unless it has

enough free memory to store two

or more destinations dialed from

the number keys.

The diagram below may make the

concept clearer.

❒ If the Requesting Party specifies a

Group for the End Receivers and

the total number of End Receivers

exceeds 200, the Transfer Station

cannot transfer the message and

sends a Transfer Result Report to

the Requesting Party.

End Receiver

Transfer station

Requesting

party

End Receiver

Transfer

result report

Reference

P.96 “TRANSFER REQUEST”

ND1X00E4

The following terminology is used in

this section.

-Multi-step Transfer

The principles of Transfer Stations

can be used to build up a multi-step

facsimile network where messages

are passed through several Transfer

Stations. By programming the end re-

ceivers in a Transfer Station Group,

you can enable this machine to trans-

fer messages onto other Transfer Sta-

tions.

❖

Requesting Party

The machine where the message

originates from, i.e. the machine

making a Transfer Request.

❖

Transfer Station

The machine that forwards the in-

coming message to another desti-

nation, i.e. the machine that

receives the Transfer Request. In

this section this refers to your ma-

chine.

For more information, contact your

service representative.

This feature can only be used if the

machines are made by the same mak-

er.

❖

End Receiver

The final destination of the mes-

sage, i.e. the machine that the

Transfer Station sends to. End Re-

ceivers must be programmed into

Quick Dials, Speed Dials or

Groups in the Transfer Station

(this machine).

Note

❒ The optional Fax Feature Expand-

er is required for this function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

fer Station. ⇒ P.129 “Registering Quick

Dials”, P.143 “Registering Speed Dials”

Reference

P.173 “Multistep Transfer”

Note

❒ By default, a portion of the original

image is printed on this report.

You can turn this off with the User

Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

-Sending the Transfer Result

Report

This machine compares the own fax

number of the Requesting Party with

the Requesting Party's number pro-

grammed in a Quick Dial or Speed

Dial, and if the lower five digits of the

two numbers match, it sends the

Transfer Result report to the Request-

ing Party.

ID Reception

If you wish to limit reception of mes-

sages to those from machines of the

same make and with the same Polling

ID, contact your service representa-

tive to turn this feature on.

For example:

• Requesting Party's own dial num-

ber:

F Code (SEP)

001813-11112222

• Transfer Station's Quick Dial:

03-11112222

Normally you can only use Polling

Reception to receive faxes from ma-

chines that have the Polling Recep-

tion feature. However, if the other

machine supports a polling reception,

you can receive fax messages from

the other party using this method in-

stead.

Transfer Result Report

This reports whether transmission to

the End Receivers was successful or

not.

Preparation

You need to assign the F Code fea-

ture to a User Function key before-

hand. ⇒ P.164 “Storing/Editing the

Contents of a User Function Key”

Preparation

vance. ⇒ P.41 “CHANGING LINE

TYPE”

Limitation

❒ You can only use this feature with

When the Transfer Station has trans-

ferred the message to all End Receiv-

ers, it sends the Transfer Result

Report back to the Requesting Party.

The machine prints the report if it

cannot be sent back to the Requesting

Party. You must program the fax

number of the requesting party in a

Quick Dial or Speed Dial in the Trans-

a G3 line (not with G4).

❒ You cannot use Chain Dial with

this feature.

Note

❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long

and consist of digits.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

❒ Make sure the ID matches the

specification of the fax you are

sending to.

F Enter the function number for

Polling Reception on the number

keys.

❒ You can store IDs in Quick Dials,

Speed Dials, Groups and Pro-

grams with number keys, space, #

and *.

❒ Messages you receive using this

feature are marked “SEP” on all re-

ports.

Note

❒ If you can't see the function

number, search for it using the

[↑Prev.] and [↓Next] arrow keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown. Then enter the

fax number.

G Depending which method you

are using, choose one of the fol-

lowing procedures:

B Press the User Function key as-

signed with the F Code feature.

nicating

Start

Manual RX

File

Default ID Polling Reception

TEL

Mode

TX File

Status

A Press the < or > key to

change the Default ID and

press [OK].

ND2L04E3

C Enter the function number for

SEP(P) on the number keys.

ID Override Polling Reception

D Enter the ID code on the number

A Press the < or > key to

change the Override ID and

press [OK].

keys.

E Press the [Mode] key.

The [Mode] menu is displayed.

B Enter a polling ID (4 charac-

ters) with the number keys and

the letter (A–F).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION FUNCTIONS

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

the {Clear/Stop} key and try

again.

• 0000 and FFFF is not avail-

able.

H Press [OK].

I Press [Exit].

The display returns to the [Mode

]

menu and the Polling Reception

function is now checked.

J Press the {Start} key.

F Code (PWD)

There are times when you may wish

to use a password when sending con-

fidential faxes with the F Code “SUB”

and “SEP”features. ⇒ P.63 “F Code

(PWD)”

Limitation

❒ You can enter a password up to 20

digits long.

Note

❒ Messages you send using this fea-

ture are marked "PWD" on all re-

ports.

JBIG Reception

The Fax 400dpi Option is required to use

this function.

It allows you to receive messages sent

in the JBIG format.

Limitation

❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Recep-

tion is not available.

❒ This feature is not available with

G4 lines.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

PRINTING FUNCTIONS

er correctly when you file received

messages.

Print Completion Beep

By default, the machine beeps to let

you know when a received message

has been printed.

Note

❒ You can alter the volume of the

beep or turn it off completely (set

the volume at minimum). ⇒ P.192

“Monitor Volume”

ND1X00E6

Checkered Mark

Limitation

❒ The center mark may deviate a lit-

tle from the exact center of the

edge.

By default, a checkered mark is print-

ed on the first page of fax messages to

help you separate them.

Note

❒ You can turn this feature on or off.

⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Param-

eters”

Reception Time

You can have the date and time when

a message was received printed at the

bottom of the received image. This

feature is turned off by default–turn it

on with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

ND1X00E5

Note

❒ You can turn this feature off. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

Limitation

❒ When a received message is print-

ed on two or more sheets, the date

and time is printed on the last

page.

Center Mark

By default, marks are printed halfway

the left side and at the top center of

each page received. This makes it

easy for you to position a hole punch-

Note

❒ The date and time when the mes-

sage was printed can be also be re-

corded on the message. If you need

this feature, please contact your

service representative.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING FUNCTIONS

With this option installed, you can

have a received message printed on

both sides of the paper. By default,

this feature is turned off. Switch it on

with the Initial Setup RX and select

lengthwise L copy paper. ⇒ P.161

“INITIAL SETUP RX”

Multi-copy Reception

The Optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

If you switch this feature on, multiple

copies of each incoming fax message

will be printed. You can also choose

to have multiple copies made of mes-

sages from particular senders. ⇒

P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”, P.182

“Special Senders to Treat Differently

(Special RX Nos.)”

ND1X00E8

Limitation

❒ To use this function all pages of the

received document must be of the

same size-inform the sending par-

ty of this beforehand if necessary.

You must also have paper set in

your machine of the same size as

that sent by the sending party

(A4→A4, B4→B4 are typical exam-

ples, whether A3 and B5 sizes are

scanned in correctly will depend

on the fax machine). This machine

will scan in correctly landscape

A3,B4,A4,B5 and portrait A4, B5

and A5. The table below shows the

results that can be achieved when

ND1X00E7

Limitation

❒ The maximum number of copies

that can be made of each message

is 10. If you are using Multi-copy

with Specified Senders, the maxi-

mum number is 10.

Note

❒ By default this feature is turned

off. Switch it on and set the num-

ber of copies with the Initial Setup

RX. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP RX”

❒ Note that the machine will use

Memory Reception for Multi-copy.

2-Sided Printing

An optional Duplex Tray and Fax Fea-

ture Expander are required to use this

function.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

sending and receiving using this

machine.

❒ Note that the machine will use

Memory Reception for 2-Sided

Printing.

Originals

Top Binding Side Binding

❒ This feature cannot be used with

Two in One.

ABC

❒ Printouts may vary in their direc-

tion/orientation depending on

how the sender set them.

❒ If another party sends you a fax

and their machine is not able to de-

tect the size of the original correct-

ly, the message may come out

truncated, separated or containing

excess white space when printed at

your end. For example, if the send-

ing machine thinks a B5 original is

a B4 original, it will be printed at

your end on B4 size paper even if

you have B5 paper available in

your machine.

ND0X05E3

Note

❒ If the Duplex Unit cover is not

open, you cannot print double-sid-

ed documents that are more than

11.7” long and they will be printed

single-sided only.

❒ You can choose to have messages

only from selected senders printed

in this way. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

180 Degree Rotation Printing

When printing on both sides of the

paper, this machine rotates images as

shown in the diagram.

ND6A01E2

❒ This feature works only when all

pages are of the same width and

are received into memory.

CP2B02E0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING FUNCTIONS

• Two 8¹/₂× 5.5 “ K messages are

printed side by side on a sheet of

8¹/₂× 11” L.

Image Rotation

If you have installed paper in the cas-

sette sideways K, incoming fax mes-

sages will be rotated automatically to

fit on the paper.

your machine

ND1X01E0

Limitation

❒ This feature does not work with

messages larger than A5 K, B5 K,

A4 K, or LT K. When A5 K, B5

K, A4 K or LT K size paper is

loaded in the machine, each page

of the received message is output

on a single sheet.

ND1X00E9

Limitation

❒ You can choose to have received

messages printed from the a speci-

fied tray. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

❒ If paper matching the size and di-

rection of a received document is

not available, Two In One is not

possible.

Two In One

When two messages of the same size

and direction are received consecu-

tively, they are printed on a single

sheet when you turn this feature on.

This can help you economize on pa-

per.

Note

❒ By default this feature is turned

off. Switch it on with the User Pa-

rameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

❒ This feature uses Memory Recep-

• Two A5 K messages are printed

tion.

side by side on a sheet of A4 L.

• Two B5 K messages are printed

side by side on a sheet of B4 L.

Page Separation and Length

Reduction (not available in

some countries)

• Two A4 K messages are printed

side by side on a sheet of A3 L.

When the size of a received message

is longer than the paper loaded in the

machine, each page of the message

can be split and printed on several

sheets, or reduced and printed on a

single sheet. For example, when LT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

L paper is loaded, this feature splits

the received message if the excess

length is about 0.79” or more, and re-

duces it if the excess length is within

about 0.79”. When a message is split,

the split mark (*) is inserted at the

split position and about 0.39” of the

split area is duplicated on the top of

the second sheet.

ing the message from the last page

received. By default, this feature is

turned off but you can turn it on with

the Initial Setup RX. ⇒ P.161 “INI-

TIAL SETUP RX” Note that when on,

this feature will use Memory Recep-

tion.

When this feature is on, the first page

will be printed last.

your machine

ABC

(Document)

ND1X01E1

ND1X01E2

Note

❒ Your service representative can

customize this feature with the fol-

lowing settings. Bracketed values

are defaults.

Page Reduction

If you have switched this feature on

and you receive a message that is

longer than the paper in the cassette,

usually the machine prints it on two

pages. If you turn this feature on the

machine reduces the width and

length of the received image so that it

will fit on one page. If A4 L paper

size is loaded and a message of B4 L

size is received, the machine will re-

duce the message to a single A4 L

sheet.

• Reduction (on)

• Print split mark (on)

• Overprinting (on)

• Overprinting length (0.39”)

• Guideline for split (when mes-

sage is 0.79” longer than paper)

❒ You can adjust the overprinting

length and length of reduction

within the following ranges:

• Guideline for split: 0 – 6.1”

your machine

• Overprinting length: 0.16”,

0.39”, 0.79”, 1.57”

reduction

(B4 size)

Reverse Order Printing

(A4 size)

Normally, received pages are printed

and stacked on the tray in the order

they are received. If you turn this fea-

ture on, the machine will start print-

ND1X01E3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING FUNCTIONS

Note

CIL/TID Print

❒ By default this feature is turned

off. Switch it on with the User Pa-

rameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

The ISDN unit is required to use this

function.

Two features are provided for identi-

fication of messages received by G4

(ISDN). If turned on, this information

will be printed on every page. Turn

CIL and TID on and off with the User

Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

Reference

P.67 “Page Separation and Length Re-

duction (not available in some coun-

tries)”

TSI Print

The CIL (Call Identification Line) re-

fers to the combination of the receiv-

er's own fax number, name, the

sender's own fax number and name,

time, and page number. The default

setting is on. The TID refers to the

name registered by the sender in their

TTI. The default setting is on.

Usually the sender's TTI is printed on

received messages. If the sender has

not programmed their TTI, you will

not be able to identify them. Howev-

er, if you turn this feature on, the

sender's RTI P.193 “RTI/TTI” or CSI

P.193 “RTI/TTI” is printed instead so

you can find out where the message

came from.

Limitation

❒ This feature is available only when

Note

receiving in G4 mode.

❒ You can turn it on or off with the

User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Chang-

ing the User Parameters”

Note

❒ You can turn CIL off with the User

Parameters.

When There is No Paper of the Correct Size

If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message,

the machine will choose a paper size based upon the paper you have available.

For example, if your machine has LG (8.5 × 15”) L installed and you receive an

LT (8.5 × 14”) L size message, check the LT column of the table below. The pa-

per size at the top has the highest priority. In this case, since LG (8.5 × 14”) L is

higher priority than DLT (11 × 17”) K, the message is printed on LG (8.5 × 14”)

❖

Priority Table

Page Reduction

Disabled

Enabled

20 mm

Reduction in Sub-scan Direction

Page Separation Threshold

Width or Length Priority

Width

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

Image Rotation

Half of the page is blank

Page Reduction

Received Image Size

11x17"

8.5x14"

8.5x11"

F/F4

8.5x14"

11x17"

8.5x11" 11x17"

8.5x14"

11x17"

F/F4

8.5x14"

8.5x11"

F/F4

8.5x11"

A3 A4

8.5x11"

F/F4

8.5x11"

F/F4

8.5x14"

11x17"

8.5x11" 8.5x14"

11x17"

B4 A3

A3 B4

F/F4

8.5x14"

8.5x11"

F/F4

8.5x14"

11x17"

8.5x14"

11x17" 11x17"

8.5x14" 11x17"

11x17"

8.5x14"

11x17"

Lengthwise

Sideways

ND0X01E5

• KK and LL indicate that the message is split over two pages of paper with

the orientation and size shown.

Limitation

❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is not usually selected for printing a received

message. However, you can use this tray if you select the bypass tray as the

main paper tray using Reception with Specified Senders. ⇒ P.182 “Special

Senders to Treat Differently (Special RX Nos.)”

❒ The paper size used to print a received message may be different from the size

of the sent original.

Note

❒ Widths that this machine can receive are A4, B4, LT, LG, and A3. Any mes-

sages narrower than A4 or LT are sent as A4 or LT width with the length un-

changed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING FUNCTIONS

Reference

P.67 “Page Separation and Length Reduction (not available in some countries)”

P.68 “Page Reduction”

P.67 “Image Rotation”

Just Size Printing

If you turn this feature on and no paper tray is stocked with paper of a suitable

size to print a received document, a message will appear on the display prompt-

ing you to load paper of the required size. When you have loaded the new paper,

you can then print the message.

Two messages can appear:

• Paper Cassette

Paper designated to print FAX/Lists are

empty.

Refill A4 paper.

ND0X04E0

• Bypass Tray

Paper designated to print FAX/Lists are

empty.

Refill A4 paper to Bypass trey.

ND0X01E6

Note

❒ You can turn this message on or off with the User Parameters ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”. By default this message is turned off.

Out Of Paper Display Message

If the paper tray runs out of paper, you can have a message appear on the dis-

play asking you to add more paper.

Note

❒ By default this message is turned off. You can turn it with the User Parame-

ters. See P.203 “Changing the User Parameters”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING A FAX MESSAGE

Having Incoming Messages

Printed on Paper From the

Bypass Tray

You can have messages sent from

Specified Senders printed on paper

from the Bypass Tray. This is useful if

you need messages printed on a size

of paper not stocked in the paper cas-

sette(s).

Limitation

❒ When the optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander is installed, you can set pa-

per between 128 and 800 mm long

in the Bypass Tray.

Note

❒ Before you can use this feature,

you need to turn on Authorized

Reception (Initial Setup RX set-

tings, P.161 “INITIAL SETUP

RX”), program the Specified Send-

ers (Key Operator Settings, Special

RX No.) along with the Paper Tray

set to “Bypass Tray”.

❒ When you set paper sizes other

than A4 landscape, B4 landscape

and portrait, A3 landscape and

portrait in the Bypass Tray, specify

the paper size.⇒ P.162 “To set the

Bypass Paper Size”

❒ If the specified paper size and the

size of paper set in the Bypass Tray

do not match, paper jams may oc-

cur and the image may be truncat-

ed.

❒ If you use this feature, Image Rota-

tion is not possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Advanced Transmission

Features

OVERVIEW

Overview

This feature describes various options that you can choose when sending a fax

message. The selections you make will only apply to the current fax message.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

SEND LATER

Using this feature, you can instruct

the machine to delay transmission of

your fax message until a later time

which you specify. This allows you to

take advantage of off-peak telephone

charges without having to be by the

machine at the time.

B Press [Mode].

Transmitter

Receiver

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

C Enter the “Send Later” function

Send Later

at 21:00 (9:00PM)

number with number keys.

ND1X01E4

For ease of use, you can program the

time when your phone charges be-

come cheaper as the Economy Trans-

mission time. ⇒ P.195 “Registering

The Economy Transmission Time”

D Enter the time with the number

keys. To change AM/PM, press

the [AM

↔

PM] (North America

Then if you have a non urgent fax,

just select Send Later with Economy

Transmission when you scan it in.

Faxes will be queued in memory and

will start being sent at Economy

Transmission time.

only) or press [Economy TX].

Note

❒ You can not specify a time more

❒ If the current time shown on the

display is not correct, adjust it.

⇒ P.208 “Date/Time”

than 24 hours into the future.

❒ If you wish to use Economy Trans-

mission, program the time when

your phone charges get cheaper. ⇒

P.195 “Registering The Economy

Transmission Time”

❒ When entering numbers small-

er than 10, add a leading zero.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ This feature is only available with

❒ To cancel Send Later, press

Cancel] and the display will re-

Memory Transmission.

[

turn to the Transmission Mode

menu.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEND LATER

E Press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown on the display. A check

mark is added to Send Later.

F Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “Send Later” is shown on the

display. If you set up another

advanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ You can cancel transmission of

a message set up for Send Later.

⇒ P.103 “Canceling a Transmis-

sion”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION

If you do not want your message to be

Limitation

❒ The destination machine must be

picked up casually at the other end,

use this feature. The message will be

stored in memory at the other end

and will not be printed until an ID is

entered.

of the same make and have the

Confidential Reception feature.

❒ The destination machine must

have enough memory available.

Transmitter

Note

❒ If the optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander is installed, we recommend

that you program the Confidential

ID beforehand.

Receiver

❒ An ID can be any 4 digit number

except 0000.

ND1X01E5

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

Preparation

B Press [Mode].

If you install the optional Fax Fea-

ture Expander or Hard Disk op-

tion, program the Confidential ID.

⇒ P.196 “ID Code”

There are two types of Confidential

Transmission:

❖

Default ID

The other party can print the mes-

sage by entering the Confidential

ID programmed in their machine.

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

❖

ID Override

C Enter the “Confidential TX” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

Should you wish to send a confi-

dential message to a particular per-

son at the other end, you can

specify the Confidential ID that

person has to enter to see that mes-

sage. Before you send the message,

don't forget to tell the intended re-

ceiver the ID that must be entered

to print it.

D Depending on the Confidential

Transmission type, use one of the

following procedures:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION

Note

Default ID

❒ To Cancel the Confidential

Transmission, press [Cancel].

The Transmission Mode

menu is shown on the dis-

play.

A Press the < or > keys to turn

Default ID on and press [OK].

E Press [Exit].

The Transmission Mode menu

is shown again. A check mark is

added to Confidential TX.

Note

❒ To cancel the Confidential

Transmission, press [Cancel].

The Transmission Mode

menu is shown on the dis-

play.

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

Override ID

A Press the < or >keys to turn

Override ID on.

Note

❒ “Conf.Trans” is shown on the

display. If you set up another

advanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

B Enter the Confidential ID (4-

digit number) with the number

keys and press [OK].

F Dial and press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ For details on deleting a Confi-

dential Transmission. ⇒ P.76

“CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMIS-

SION”

ND1X03E0

The Transmission Mode menu

is shown again. A check mark is

added to Confidential TX.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION

Personal Codes allow you to keep

D Enter a personal code (4-digit

track of machine usage (e.g., for bill-

ing purposes). If everybody uses a

Personal Code when they use the fax

machine, the codes or the names pro-

grammed for the codes will be print-

ed in the TCR and other reports. This

will help you to check up on who has

been using the machine and how of-

ten. ⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE TCR”

number) with the number keys.

Note

❒ If a personal code is pro-

grammed with a name, it is

shown below the personal code

on the display.

Limitation

❒ Personal codes may be any 4-digit

number except 0000 (0001 through

9999). You can program up to 20

personal codes. If the Optional Fax

Feature Expander is installed, up

to 50 personal codes can be pro-

grammed. ⇒ P.166 “Registering

Personal Codes”

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ To cancel the Personal Code

Transmission, press [Cancel].

The Transmission Mode menu

is shown on the display.

E Press [OK].

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown again. A check mark is add-

ed to “Personal Code”.

B Press [Mode].

F Press [Exit].

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

C Enter a “Personal Code” function

number with the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PERSONAL CODE TRANSMISSION

Note

❒ “Pers. Code XXXX” is shown on

the display. If you set up anoth-

er advanced transmission func-

tion (except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT

If you often have to send a particular

page to people (e.g., a map, a stan-

dard attachment or a set of instruc-

tions), store it as an Auto Document

assigned to a Quick Dial key. Then,

when you need to send that page to

somebody, just press the Quick Dial

that you assigned it to instead of hav-

ing to scan the whole page in again.

❒ You can print an Auto Document

or a summary of Auto Documents

currently stored in memory. ⇒

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Press [Mode ].

Preparation

You need to program an Auto Doc-

ument.

You can fax an Auto Document by it-

self, or attach it to a normal fax mes-

sage.

ND1X02E9

Important

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

❒ Whenever you store or change an

Auto Document, we recommend

that you print the Auto Document

list for reference. ⇒ P.153 “Auto

Document list”

C Enter the “Auto Document” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

Limitation

❒ You can attach one Auto Docu-

ment to each transmission.

❒ You can store up to 6 Auto Docu-

ments. With optional Feature Ex-

pander, you can store up to 18

Auto Documents. ⇒ P.151 “Regis-

tering Auto Documents”

D Enter the number of the Auto

Document you want to send with

the number keys.

Note

❒ Originals with Auto Documents

are sent by Memory Transmission.

❒ When sending an Auto Document

with another original, the Auto

Document is sent first.

Note

❒ If the list does not contain the

Auto Document you want to

send, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next] .

❒ Storing Auto Documents reduces

the amount of free memory slight-

ly. Unless you delete the docu-

ment, free memory will not return

to 100%.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING AN AUTO DOCUMENT

❒ To cancel the Auto Document,

press [Cancel]. The Transmis-

sion Mode menu is shown.

E If you are sending just the Auto

Document, press [

#]. If you wish

to send it along with another orig-

inal, press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

redisplayed. A check mark is add-

ed to “Auto Document”.

F Press [Exit].

ND2C0104

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “Auto Doc.” is shown on the

display. If you set up another

advanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED

TRANSMISSION)

Use this feature to send 2-sided origi-

B Press [Mode].

nals from the Document Feeder

(ADF). Both sides of an original will

be scanned. The front and back of the

scanned original will be printed in or-

der, on separate sheets at the other

end. Note that the orientation of alter-

nate sheets may be reversed at the

other end.

ND1X02E9

Limitation

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

❒ The front and back of a 2-sided

document are scanned in different

directions. This means that when

the front and back sheets of each

page are printed at the other end,

they may be upside-down in rela-

tion to each other.

C Enter the “2-Sided TX” function

number with the number keys.

Note

❒ If the first page is a single-sided

cover sheet, you can choose to

have this page sent using single-

sided transmission. The remaining

pages will be sent using Duplex.

D Press the < or > key to select the

first page that you want to be

scanned on both sides.

❒ You can confirm whether both

sides were properly scanned in

with the Stamp feature ⇒ P.52

“Stamp”.

Note

A Set your original in the Document

Feeder (ADF) and select any scan

settings you require.

❒ If your document contains the

single-sided cover letter as the

first page, select From 2nd

sheet, so that the machine scan

both sides from the second

page.

E Press [OK] .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-SIDED TRANSMISSION (DOUBLE-SIDED TRANSMISSION)

F Press [Exit].

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “2-Sided TX” is shown on the

display. If you set up another

advanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

The Transmission Mode menu is

redisplayed. A check mark is add-

ed to “2-Sided TX”.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

BOOK FAX

Use to send book originals from the

exposure glass. Pages are scanned in

the order shown below.

C Enter the “Book Fax” function

number with the number keys.

Note that depending on the paper siz-

es available on the destination ma-

chine, the message may be reduced

when printed at the other end.

D Press the < or > keys to select

the size of the original.

Exposure glass

ND1X01E6

Note

❒ You can have bound originals

scanned in left page first or right

page first. By default, the machine

scans in the left page first but you

can change this setting with the

User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Chang-

ing the User Parameters”

❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-

cel]. The Transmission Mode

menu is shown on the display.

❒ If you choose 11×17”, the origi-

nal will be sent using Image Ro-

tation Transmission.

A Set your original on the exposure

glass and select any scan settings

you require.

E Press [S Pages] to toggle between

pages 1 and 2 (see middle right

corner of the display).

B Press [Mode] .

ND1X02E7

ND1X02E9

Note

❒ Select “From Page 1” to send a

book original from the first

page. Select “From Page 2” if

you want to send a cover letter

as the first page.

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

F Press [OK].

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BOOK FAX

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown. A check mark is added to

“Book Fax”.

G Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “Book Fax” is shown on the dis-

play. If you set up another ad-

vanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

H Dial and press the {Start} key.

Bound Original Page Order

When sending bound originals

(books, magazines etc.), you can

choose to have either the left page or

right page sent first.

Note

❒ The default setting is Send Left

Page First. You can change this set-

ting with the User Parameters ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED

YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)

Usually the machine automatically

C Enter the “Irreg. Scan Area” func-

detects the size of an original when it

tion number with the number

is scanned. However, you may wish

keys.

to override this and choose the area to

be scanned yourself.

D Press the < or > key to select the

ADF

exposure glass

paper size.

ND0X01E3

You can either choose one of the stan-

dard paper sizes (A4 KL, B4 L, A3

L, 8¹/₂× 11" K L, 11" × 17" K) or

one of two custom sizes programmed

in advance (Area 1 and Area 2). ⇒

P.16 “Paper Size and Scanned Area”

Note

❒ To see which paper sizes have

already been programmed,

press [Status].

Although you can specify a different

scan area for each page when using

the exposure glass, only one size is al-

lowed when scanning from the Docu-

ment Feeder (ADF).

❒ To cancel the Irreg. Scan Area,

press [Cancel]. The Transmis-

sion Mode menu is shown.

E Press [OK].

A Set your original and select any

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown again. A check mark is add-

ed to Irreg. Scan Area.

scan settings you require.

B Press [Mode].

F Press [Exit].

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

ND1X03E0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHOOSING THE AREA TO BE SCANNED YOURSELF (IRREGULAR SCAN AREA)

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “Irreg.Area” is shown on the

display. If you set up another

advanced transmission function

(except Polling Reception),

“Others” is displayed.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)

If you have to send an urgent mes-

C Enter the “Trans. Deadline” func-

sage and the line is busy, this feature

saves you standing by the machine

and redialing the number. If the mes-

sage cannot be sent the first time, the

machine redials automatically at in-

tervals of five minutes any number of

times until the deadline passes. After

the deadline passes, the Transmission

Result Report is automatically print-

ed. This indicates whether or not the

message was sent within the dead-

line.

tion number with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

D Enter the deadline with the num-

Limitation

ber keys.

❒ You can not specify a deadline

more than 24 hours into the future.

Note

❒ If the message cannot be sent be-

fore the deadline and the number

of redials is less than 5, the ma-

chine continues redialing until it

has redialed five times then prints

the Transmission Result report. If

the number of redials has already

reached 5, the machine prints the

Transmission Result report and

stops transmission.

Note

❒ If the current time on the dis-

play is not correct, adjust it. ⇒

P.208 “Date/Time”

❒ To enter a number smaller than

10, add a leading zero.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ To cancel the Transmission

Deadline, press [Cancel]. The

Transmission Mode menu is

shown.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Press [Mode].

E Press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown. A check mark is added to

“Trans. Deadline”.

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION DEADLINE (TRD)

F Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

Note

❒ “TRD” is displayed. If you set

up another advanced transmis-

sion function (except Polling

Reception), “Others” is shown.

G Dial and press the {Start} key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

POLLING TRANSMISSION

Use Polling Transmission when you

Limitation

want to leave an original in the ma-

chine's memory for others to pick up.

The message will be sent when the

other party calls you up.

❒ Polling Transmission is allowed

only if the receiver's machine has

the Polling Reception feature. With

Free Polling, a message can also be

sent to other manufacturer's ma-

chines as long as they have the

Polling Reception feature. With

Default ID and Override ID Poll-

ing Transmission, an original can

be sent only to a the machine of the

same make with the Polling Recep-

tion feature.

Transmitter

(This machine)

Transmission

Request

Receiver

❒ Free Polling and ID Polling Trans-

mission allow only one file to be

stored in memory. Personal ID

Polling Transmission allows a file

to be stored in memory for each ID;

a total of up to 200 files for varying

ID's can be stored.

ND1X01E7

There are three types of Polling

Transmission.

❖

Free Polling Transmission

Anybody can poll the message

from your machine. The machine

sends it regardless of whether Poll-

ing ID's match.

❒ Before using “Default ID Polling”

and “Override ID Polling”, you

need to program the polling ID.

❒ A polling ID may be any string of

four numbers (0 to 9) and charac-

ters (A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.

❖

Default ID Polling Transmission

The message will only be sent if the

Polling ID of the machine trying to

poll your message is the same as

the Polling ID stored in your ma-

chine. Make sure that both ma-

chines' Polling IDs are identical in

advance.

Note

❒ The communication fee is charged

to the receiver.

A Set your original and select any

scan settings you require.

❖

Override ID Polling Transmission

You must enter an Override Poll-

ing ID unique to this transmission.

This ID overrides that stored in the

Polling ID. The user must supply

this ID when they poll your ma-

chine and if the IDs match, the

message is sent. Make sure the oth-

er end knows the ID you are using

in advance.

B Press [Mode].

ND1X02E9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POLLING TRANSMISSION

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

lect “Use once”. To repeated-

ly send the original, select

“Save”.

C Enter the “Polling TX” function

number with the number keys.

Default ID Polling Transmission

A Press the < or >key to select

“Default ID” and press [OK].

Note

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

B Press [S File] and specify

whether to save the stored orig-

inal or not.

D Depending on the Polling Trans-

mission type, use one of the fol-

lowing procedures:

Free Polling Transmission

A Press the < or > key to se-

lect[Free Poll.] then press [OK].

ND1X02E7

Each time you press the key, the

text at the middle right corner of

the display toggles between

“Save” and “Use once”.

B Press[S File

]

and specify

whether to save the stored orig-

inal or not.

Note

❒ To delete the original imme-

diately after transmission, se-

lect “Use once”. To repeated-

ly send the original, select

“Save”.

ID Override Polling Transmission

ND1X02E7

Each time you press the key, the

text at the middle right corner of

the display toggles between

“Save” and “Use once”.

A Press the < or >key to select

ID Override and press [OK].

Note

❒ To delete the original imme-

diately after transmission, se-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

B Enter the 4 character Polling ID

with letter keys/ number keys

and the letter (A–F).

F Press [Exit].

Note

ND1X03E0

❒ If you make a mistake, press

the {Clear/Stop} key and try

again.

The initial display is shown.

0000 and FFFF is not available.

C Press [S File] and specify

whether to save the stored orig-

inal.

Note

❒ “Polling TX” is displayed. If

you set up other advanced

transmission function (except

Polling Reception), “Others” is

displayed.

G Press the {Start} key.

ND1X02E7

Each time you press the key, the

text at the middle right corner of

the display toggles between

“Save” and “Use once”.

Polling Transmission Clear

Report

This report allows you to verify

whether Polling Transmission has

taken place.

Note

❒ To delete the original imme-

diately after transmission, se-

lect “Use once”. To repeated-

ly send the original, select

“Save”.

Limitation

❒ This report is not printed if the

User Parameters are set to allow

the stored originals to be repeated-

ly sent (Save). ⇒ P.203 “Changing

the User Parameters”

E Press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown. A check mark is added to

“Polling TX”.

Note

❒ This report is turned on by default.

You can turn it off if you wish. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

Note

❒ To cancel the Polling Transmis-

sion, press [Cancel]. The Trans-

mission Mode menu is shown.

❒ By default, a portion of the sent im-

age is printed on the report. You

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POLLING TRANSMISSION

can turn this off with the User Pa-

rameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the

User Parameters”

❒ You can also check the result of a

Polling Transmission with the

TCR.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

POLLING RECEPTION

Use this function if you want to poll a

message from another terminal. You

can also poll documents from many

terminals with only one operation

(use Groups and Keystroke programs

to fully exploit this feature).

Limitation

❒ Polling Reception requires that the

other machine can perform Polling

Transmission.

❒ To receive a message sent by any

Default ID Polling Transmission or

Override ID Polling Transmission,

it is necessary to specify the same

polling ID as the sender's.

Receiver

(This machine)

Sender

Transmission

Request

❒ To receive a message sent by De-

fault ID Polling Transmission or

Override ID Polling Transmission,

the sender must use a machine of

the same make that has polling ca-

pability. With Free Polling Recep-

tion, a message can be also

received from other manufactur-

ers' machines as long as they have

polling capability.

ND1X01E8

There are two types of Polling Recep-

tion.

❖

Default ID Polling Reception (Free

Polling Reception)

❒ A Polling ID may be any four num-

bers (0 to 9) and characters (A to F)

except 0000 and FFFF.

Use this method for Free Polling or

Default ID Polling. If the Polling ID

is programmed in your machine,

any messages waiting in the trans-

mitting machine with the same ID

are received. If the other machine

does not have any messages wait-

ing with the same Polling ID, any

messages that do not require ID

are received (Free Polling).

A Press [Mode].

❖

Override ID Polling Reception

You must enter an Override Poll-

ing ID unique to this transmission.

This ID overrides that stored in the

Polling ID.

Your machine will receive any

messages waiting in the transmit-

ting machine with matching ID's.

If no ID's match, any messages that

do not require ID are received

(Free Polling).

ND1X02E9

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

B Enter the “Polling RX” function

number with the number keys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POLLING RECEPTION

Note

E Press [Exit].

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

C Depending which method you

are using, choose one of the fol-

lowing procedures:

Default ID Polling Reception

ND1X03E0

The following display is shown.

A Press the < or > key to select

the Default ID and press [OK].

Note

❒ “Polling RX” is displayed.

ID Override Polling Reception

F Dial and press the {Start} key.

A Press the < or > key to select

the Override ID and press [OK].

Polling Reserve Report

This report is printed after Polling Re-

ception has been set up.

Note

B Enter a polling ID (4 charac-

ters) with the number keys and

the letter (A–F).

❒ By default this report is turned off.

Turn it on with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

the {Clear/Stop} key and try

again.

Polling Result Report

❒ 0000 and FFFF is not avail-

This report is printed after a Polling

Reception has been completed and

shows the result of the Polling Recep-

tion.

able.

D Press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown. A check mark is added to

Polling Reception.

Note

❒ You can also check the result of a

Polling Reception with the TCR.

Note

❒ By default this report is turned on.

Turn it on with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

❒ To cancel Polling Reception,

press [Cancel]. The Transmis-

sion Mode menu is shown.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

TRANSFER REQUEST

Transfer Request allows fax machines

that have this feature to automatically

distribute incoming messages onto

multiple fax destinations. This feature

helps you save costs when you send

the same message to more than one

place in a distant area, and saves time

since many messages can be sent in a

single operation.

nation, i.e. the machine that

receives the Transfer Request.

❖

End Receiver

The final destination of the mes-

sage, i.e. the machine that the

Transfer Station sends to. End Re-

ceivers must be programmed into

Quick Dials, Speed Dials or

Groups in the Transfer Station.

The diagram below may make the

concept clearer.

Limitation

❒ The Transfer Stations you specify

must be machines of the same

make as this machine and have the

Transfer Station function.

End Receiver

Requesting

party

Transfer

Station

❒ You can specify up to 99 Transfer

Stations in a Transfer Request.

Transfer

Result Report

❒ You can have up to 30 End Receiv-

ers per Transfer Station. If you

specify a Transfer Station Group,

the Group counts as a single re-

ceiver.

ND1X01E9

Preparation

❒ The combined total of End Receiv-

ers and Transfer Stations you spec-

ify with the number keys cannot

exceed 99.

Before you can use this feature you

must program the Polling ID and

your own dial number. ⇒ P.196

“Polling ID”, P.198 “G3 Analog

Line”

A Set an original and select any scan

Polling ID's of the requesting party

(this machine) and Transfer Sta-

tions must be identical.

settings you require.

B Press [Mode].

The following terminology is used in

this section.

❖

Requesting Party

The machine where the message

originates from, i.e. the machine

making a Transfer Request (in this

section, this machine).

ND1X02E9

❖

Transfer Station

The machine that forwards the in-

coming message to another desti-

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSFER REQUEST

Note

C Enter the “Transfer Request”

function number with the num-

ber keys.

❒ You cannot enter the numbers

of the End Receivers directly.

The numbers must be stored in

Quick Dials, Speed Dials or

Groups in the Transfer Sta-

tion(s). To specify an End Re-

ceiver, use the special format

described in ⇒ P.98 “Specifying

an End Receiver”.

❒ Press [Add RcvStn] if you wish

ND1X03E0

enter more End Receivers.

Note

❒ Press < or > to see the End Re-

ceivers already entered. You

can select an End Receiver from

this list and cancel it by pressing

the {Clear/Stop} key.

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

D Enter a Transfer Stations and

press [Recv. Stn].

❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,

press [Cancel].

F When you have specified all the

End Receivers, press [OK].

G If you want to enter an additional

Transfer Station, press [Yes] and

repeat steps 4 to 6.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ Enter the fax numbers of the

Transfer Stations with either

Quick Dials, Speed Dials or the

number keys.

If you press [No], the Transmission

Mode menu is shown and a check

mark is added to Transfer Request.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

H Press [Exit].

❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,

press[Cancel] . The Transmis-

sion Mode menu is shown

again.

E Enter one or more End Receivers.

ND1X03E0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

The following display is shown.

❖

Group Dial

Enter{q } , {p}, {p} followed

by the Group number (2 digits).

For example, to choose the number

stored in Group 04 in the Transfer

Station, enter:{q } {p} {p} {0

}{ }

Note

❒ The numbers of Transfer Sta-

tions and End Receivers are dis-

played.

I Press the {Start} key.

Specifying an End Receiver

When you make a Transfer Request,

you must specify the final destina-

tions (End Receivers) for your mes-

sage.

You cannot enter the numbers of the

End Receivers directly. Instead, enter

a simple code that describes where

the numbers are stored in the Trans-

fer Station (in Quick Dials, Speed Di-

als or Groups).

The numbers must first have been

stored in Quick Dials, Speed Dials or

Groups in the Transfer Station(s).

❖

Quick Dial

Enter {q } followed by the num-

ber (2 digits) of the Quick Dial

where the End Receiver is stored.

For example, to choose the number

stored in Quick Dial 01 in the

Transfer Station, enter: {q } {0

}

{

}

❖

Speed Dial

Enter {q }, {p} followed by the

Speed Dial code (2 or 3 digits).

For example, to choose the number

stored in Speed Dial 12 in the

Transfer Station, enter:{q } {p}

{

1 2

} { }

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION OPTIONS

This section describes various fea-

tures that you can switch on and off

for any particular transmission by fol-

lowing the procedure at the end of

of the image when received at the

other end.

Note

❒ Program the receiver's name and

number in a Quick Dial or Speed

Dial with Label Insertion turned

on with the user parameter.

this section.

In addition, if you frequently use a

certain configuration of options, you

can change the default home position

(on or off) of each option with the

User Parameters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing

the User Parameters”

-Auto Reduction

By default, if the receiver's paper is

smaller than the paper you are send-

ing on, the message is automatically

reduced to fit onto the paper available

at the other end.

-TTI (Transmit Terminal

Identification) Print

By default, the machine adds your

TTI identification to each message

you send so it appears on the printed

fax at the other end. You can change

your TTI with the Key Operator Set-

tings. ⇒ P.166 “KEY OPERATOR

SETTINGS”

Transmitter

(This machine)

Receiver

Reduction

Note

ND1X02E0

❒ You can switch this feature off

with the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

Important

❒ If you turn this feature off, the

scale of the original is maintained

and some parts of the image may

be lost when printed at the other

end.

-Label Insertion

With this feature you can have the re-

ceiver's name printed on the message

when it is received at the other end.

The name will be printed at the top of

the page and will be preceded by

“To”.

ND1X02E1

Limitation

Note

❒ If you select Label Insertion, the la-

❒ You can switch this feature on and

bel might be printed over a portion

off with the User Parameters. The

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

default setting is on. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

C Enter the “Options” function

number with the number keys.

-ID Transmission

If you turn this feature on, transmis-

sion will only take place if the desti-

nation's Polling ID is the same as

yours. This feature can stop you from

accidentally sending information to

the wrong place (you need to co-ordi-

nate Polling ID's with the other par-

ty).

Note

❒ If “Options” is not shown, press

[↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

D Press the < or > key to switch

TTI Print on or off.

Note

❒ You can switch this feature on and

off with the User Parameters. The

default setting is off. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

Note

❒ The default setting is on.

E If you want to set another option,

press [↓Next].

Selecting Transmission

Options for a Single

Transmission

Note

❒ To finish, go to step 12.

F Press the < or > key to switch

Label Insertion on or off.

A Set the original and select any

scan settings you require.

B Press [Mode].

Note

❒ The default setting is off.

❒ To cancel the changes, press

[

Cancel]. The Transmission

Mode menu is shown.

ND1X02E9

G If you want to set another option,

The Transmission Mode menu ap-

pears.

press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

Note

❒ To finish, go to step 12.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION OPTIONS

The initial display is shown.

H Press the < or > key to switch

Auto Reduction on or off.

Note

❒ “Options” is shown. If you set

up another advanced transmis-

sion function (except Polling

Reception), “Others” is shown.

Note

❒ The default setting is on.

❒ To cancel the setting, press [Can-

cel]. The Transmission Mode

menu is shown.

N Dial and press the {Start} key.

I If you want to set another option,

press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

Note

❒ To finish, go to step 12.

J Press the < or > key to switch

closed network on or off.

K If you want to set another option,

press [↑Prev.].

Note

❒ To finish, go to step 12.

L Press [OK].

The Transmission Mode menu is

shown. A check mark is added to

Options.

M Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FEATURES

This page is intentionally blank.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Communication

Information

CHECKING AND CANCELING

TRANSMISSION FILES

Transmission files are originals that

have been stored in memory and are

awaiting transmission. The features

that produce transmission files are

Memory Transmission, Confidential

Transmission, Transfer Request, Poll-

ing Reception and Polling Transmis-

sion. These features are described in

detail elsewhere in this document.

Canceling a Transmission

A Press [Info.].

This section describes how you can:

• Delete a file (cancel transmission)

• Print a file ^*1

ND1X03E0

• Check the destination(s) and op-

tions selected

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “Check/Cancel TX

Files” function number with the

number keys.

• Alter when a file will be sent

• Resend a file

• Change destinations

• Delete destinations

• Add destinations

This does not apply to Polling Recep-

tion or Confidential Transmission.

Note

Limitation

❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is

not shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓N-

ext].

❒ If you cancel a file being sent, the

communication is immediately

stopped and the file is canceled. A

page which has already been sent

cannot be canceled.

❒ You cannot change the start time

add/delete a destination while a

file is being sent.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

C Press the < or > key until the F Press [Exit].

file you want to delete is shown

and press [Delete].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

ND1X02E7

D Press [Yes].

Printing a File

If you wish to check the contents of a

fax that is stored in memory and has

not been sent yet, use this procedure

to print it out.

A Press [Info.].

ND1X03E0

The file is erased.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “Check/Cancel TX

Files” function number with the

number keys.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ To delete another file, repeat

steps 3 and 4.

Note

❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is

not shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓N-

ext].

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES

C Press the < or > key until the F Press [Exit].

file you want to print is shown

and press [Print].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

ND1X02E8

D Press the {Start} key.

Checking and Editing a File

Use this procedure to check or edit

destination(s), check options selected

or alter the transmission time.

The file is printed.

A Press [Info.].

Note

❒ Press [Cancel] to stop printing

the file and return to the step 3

display.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “Check/Cancel TX

Files” function number with the

number keys.

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown

again.

Note

❒ If “Check/Cancel TX Files” is

not shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓N-

ext].

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

C Press the < or > key until the

file you want to print is shown.

Then press [Check].

Changing the Transmission Time

A Enter the “Change Start Time”

function number with the

number keys.

B Enter the transmission time (4

ND1X02E9

digits) with the number keys.

D Depending on the setting you

want to check or change, use one

of the following procedures.

Use 24-hour or 12-hour format

depending on your area. For 12-

hour format, press [AM ↔ PM]

to switch between AM and PM.

Checking Destinations

(Destination List)

A Enter the “Destination List”

function number with the

number keys.

Note

❒ You can not specify a start

time more than 24 hours into

the future.

❒ To start transmission imme-

diately, press [Immediate]. If

memory contains other files

queued for transmission,

those files are sent first.

The total number of destina-

tions and the fax number or

each destination's name is

shown.

Re-sending a File

If you select the failed transmis-

sion file, you can resend it. This

feature allows you to transmit a fax

message again. You can choose to

have files that were not transmit-

ted successfully stored in memory.

These files will be kept for either

up to 24 or 72 hours depending on

how you program this feature. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

Note

❒ To see hidden destinations,

press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHECKING AND CANCELING TRANSMISSION FILES

A Enter the “Retransmit ” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

A Enter the “Change Dest.” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

B Press [Yes].

B Change the destination.

Note

❒ To cancel a destination, press

the < or > key until the des-

tination you want to cancel is

shown and press the {Clear/

Stop} key.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you do not want to send

the file, press [No].

❒ To add a destination, press

[

Add] and enter the fax num-

C Enter the start time with the

ber with the number keys.

Destinations can be specified

only by using the number

keys. The destination is add-

ed to the end of the list.

number keys.

❒ If you change a destination of

a file that is automatically be-

ing dialed or awaiting redial,

redial is canceled so you will

need to resend that file. ⇒

P.106 “Re-sending a File”

Use 24-hour or 12-hour format

depending on your area. For

12-hour format, press [AM ↔

PM] to switch AM and PM.

Note

❒ You can not specify a start E Press [Exit].

time more than 24 hours into

the future.

F Press [Exit].

❒ To start transmission imme-

diately, press [Immediate]. If

memory contains other files

queued for transmission,

those files are sent first.

Changing a Destination

ND1X03E0

You can delete or add destinations.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

G Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

H Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY (PRINT TX FILE LIST)

PRINTING A LIST OF FILES IN MEMORY

(PRINT TX FILE LIST)

Print this list if you wish to find out

Note

which files are stored in memory and

❒ Press [Cancel] to stop printing

what their file numbers are. Knowing

the file list and return to the In-

the file number can be useful (e.g.,

formation Menu display.

when erasing files).

D Press [Exit].

Note

❒ The contents of an original stored

in memory can also be printed. ⇒

P.104 “Printing a File”

A Press [Info.].

The initial display is shown.

The Information menu is dis-

played.

B Enter the “Print TX File list ”

function number with the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If “Print TX File list ” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

C Press the {Start} key.

The transmission file list is printed.

When the printing is completed,

the Information menu is shown.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION RESULT (TX

STATUS)

If you wish to find out whether a file

C Press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next] to scroll

was sent successfully, you don't have

through the list.

to always print the TCR. With this

function you can browse through the

last 50 completed transmissions on

the display.

Limitation

❒ Only the last 50 transmissions are

The results are shown two at a time

with the most recent above.

shown. Earlier transmissions are

not available.

D Press [OK].

❒ If a transmission is completed

while you are using this function,

the result will not be shown until

you exit TX File Status and start it

again.

The initial display is shown.

A Press [Info.].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “TX Files Status ” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If “TX Files Status ” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX STATUS)

CHECKING THE RECEPTION RESULT (RX

STATUS)

This function lets you check up on the

C Press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next] to scroll

last 50 messages received without

through the messages.

having to print the TCR. You can

browse through the received messag-

es on the display.

Limitation

❒ Only the last 50 messages are dis-

The results are shown two at a time

with the most recent above.

played. Earlier messages are not

available.

D Press [OK].

❒ If a message is received while you

are using this function, the result

will not be shown until you exit RX

File Status and start it again.

The initial display is shown.

E Press [Exit].

A Press [Info.].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “RX Files Status” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If “RX Files Status” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE

The optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.

This feature is designed to prevent

B Enter the “Print Conf. RX” func-

messages being picked up casually by

anyone when they are received. If

someone sends you a message using

Confidential Transmission, it is

stored in memory and not automati-

cally printed. To print the message

you have to enter the Confidential ID

code. When your machine has re-

ceived a confidential message, the

Confidential File indicator lights.

tion number with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If “Print Conf. RX” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

Preparation

C Enter the Confidential ID (4-digit

Before using this function, pro-

gram your Confidential ID. ⇒

P.196 “ID Code”

number) with the number keys.

Important

❒ If the Main Power Switch is off

more than an hour, all Confiden-

tial Messages are deleted. In such a

case, use the Power Failure Report

to identify which messages have

been lost. ⇒ P.126 “WHEN POW-

ER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS”

Note

❒ If you receive a fax by Confiden-

tial ID Override Reception, en-

ter the override Confidential ID.

❒ You need to obtain the override

Confidential ID from the send-

er.

Limitation

❒ You must program the Confiden-

tial ID for Confidential Reception

to work.

D Press the {Start} key.

The received messages are printed.

When printing has finished, the In-

formation menu is shown.

A Press [Info.].

Note

❒ If no Confidential Messages

have been received, the mes-

sage “No reception file(s) ex-

ists.” is shown. Press [OK].

❒ If the Confidential IDs or Per-

sonal Confidential IDs do not

match, the message “No file(s)

exist for this Confidential ID.” is

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL MESSAGE

displayed. Press [OK] to cancel

the operation, check the Confi-

dential ID or Personal Confi-

dential ID with the other party

and try again.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

Confidential File Report

By default, this report is printed

whenever your machine receives a

Confidential Message.

Note

❒ You can turn this report off with

the User Parameters. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY

LOCK

Optional Fax Feature Expander is required to use this function.

This is a security feature designed to

A Make sure that the Receive File

prevent unauthorized users from

indicator blinks. Press [Info.].

reading your messages. If Memory

Lock is switched on, all received mes-

sages are stored in memory and are

not automatically printed. To print

the messages, you have to enter the

Memory Lock ID code. When your

machine has received a message with

Memory Lock, the Receive File indi-

cator blinks.

ND1X03E0

Preparation

The Information menu is shown.

Before you start, program your

Memory Lock ID.⇒ P.196 “Memo-

ry Lock ID”

B Enter the “Print Mem. Lock”

function number with the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ Messages received by Polling Re-

ception are automatically printed

even if this feature is switched on.

❒ If the Main Power Switch is turned

off for more than an hour, all mes-

sages protected by Memory Lock

will be deleted. In such a case, the

Power Failure Report will be print-

ed so you can confirm which mes-

sages have been lost. ⇒ P.126

“WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF

OR FAILS”

Note

❒ If “Print Mem. Lock” is not

shown on the display, press

❒ [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

C Enter the Memory Lock ID (4-dig-

it number).

❒ Memory Lock is switched off by

default. Turn it on using the Fac-

simile User Tools. ⇒ P.172 “Memo-

ry Lock”

D Press the {Start} key.

❒ You can also apply Memory Lock

to messages that come only from

certain senders. ⇒ P.182 “Special

Senders to Treat Differently (Special

RX Nos.)”

The received messages are printed.

When the printing is completed,

the Information menu is shown.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK

Note

❒ If no messages have been re-

ceived, while Memory Lock is

switched on, the following mes-

sage will appear.”No reception

file(s) exists.” Press [OK].

❒ If the Memory Lock IDs do not

match, the following message

will appear. “Wrong Memory

Lock ID.”Press [OK] and retry

after checking the Memory

Lock ID.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

PRINTING THE TCR

The TCR (Transaction Confirmation

Report) contains information about

the last 49 communications made by

your machine. By default, it is printed

automatically after every 50 commu-

nications (receptions + transmis-

sions).

Note

❒ If “Print TCR” is not shown,

press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

C Press the < or > key to select the

format you want to print.

You can also print a copy of the TCR

at any time by following the proce-

dure below.

Note

❒ The sender's name column of the

TCR is useful when you need to

❒ Select “File No.” to enter a 4-

digit file number with the num-

ber keys.

❒ If you do not want the TCR print-

ed, you can turn it off. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

❒ Select “Pers. Code” to enter a

Personal Code (4-digit number)

with the number keys.

A Press [Info.].

❒ Press [Cancel] to return to the In-

formation menu.

D Press the {Start} key.

The TCR is printed.

E Press [Exit].

ND1X03E0

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “Print TCR” function

number with the number keys.

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

ND1X03E0

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DISPLAYING THE MEMORY STATUS

Use this function to display a summa-

ry of current memory usage. Items

shown are the percentage of free

memory space, the number of re-

ceived confidential messages, the

number of files to be sent, and the

number of received messages to be

printed.

Note

❒ If “Others” is displayed, it

means that one or more Auto

Documents have been stored. ⇒

P.151 “Registering Auto Docu-

ments”

D Press [Exit].

A Press [Info.].

ND1X03E0

The initial display is shown.

The Information menu is shown.

B Enter the “Memory Status” func-

tion number with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If “Memory Status” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

C The usage is displayed. When

you have finished, press [OK].

ND1X03E0

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION INFORMATION

This page is intentionally blank.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Troubleshooting

WHEN TONER RUNS OUT

When the machine has run out of ton-

er the D symbol appears on the dis-

play. Note that even if there is no

toner left you can still send fax mes-

sage.

⇒ P.32 “IMMEDIATE TRANSMIS-

SION”

Important

❒ If you continue receiving and

sending faxes after toner runs out,

communication will not be possi-

ble after 200 ( 900 with the Fax Fea-

ture Expander ) communications.

Limitation

❒ The Memory Storage Report, Poll-

ing Reserve Report and Confiden-

tial File Report are not printed.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Enhanced

Image

Auto Reduce/

Enlarge

Copy

Fax

Zoom

Series

Copies

Combine

Copies

Margin

Adjust

Erase Center/

Border

ND2L02E8

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press [Exit].

The error display closes.

⇒ P.24 “MEMORY TRANSMIS-

SION”

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

ERROR MESSAGES AND THEIR MEANINGS

If there is an error, one of the following messages may appear on the display. It

might just flash up briefly, so if you are watching for errors, stay by the machine

and check the display.

Message

Problem and Solution

Clear Misfeed(s)

• Original misfeed

Remove originals from the Document

Feeder.

• Remove originals from Document

Feeder.

• Set any pages of the original that were

not scanned and send again.

Reset originals and press Start.

Original jammed during Memory Trans-

mission. Reset originals that haven't been

scanned.

Error. Transmission has been cancelled.

A document jam occurred during Imme-

diate Transmission. Press [OK] and resend

the page which has been not sent.

An error occurred during Immediate

Transmission. Press [OK] and re-send the

original.

Note

❒ There may be a problem with the ma-

chine or the telephone line (e.g. noise

or cross talk). If the error re-occurs fre-

quently, contact your service represen-

tative.

Cannot detect original size. Reset origi-

nal(s) and press Start key.

The machine failed to detect the size of the

original. Press < or > to select the size

and press the {Start} key again.

<FAX>

Personal Codes Access are switched on.

You need to enter a previously pro-

grammed 4 digit ID code. For more infor-

mation, see P.166 “Personal Codes”.

Personal Code Access. Please enter your

Personal Code.

LService call

There is a problem with the fax function.

Contact your service representative and

tell the code number shown in the dis-

play. The copier function will still work

normally.

Functional problem with the fax. Please

contact your service representative.

Memory is full. Cannot store additional

If you press OK, the machine returns to

originals. (Stored original(s) will be trans- the standby mode and start transmitting

mitted.)

pages which has been scanned.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

This table lists some common problems and their solutions.

Problem

Solution

Refer to

Image background

appears dirty when

received at the other

end.

Adjust the scan density.

P.38 “Image Density (Con-

trast)”

Printed or sent im-

age contains spots.

The Document Feeder (ADF) or

exposure glass is dirty. Clean

them. See the Copy Reference

---

Make sure that ink or eraser is dry

before setting the original.

Received image is

too light.

Request the sender to increase the P.14 “ACCEPTABLE

image density.

TYPES OF ORIGINALS”

When using moist, rough or pro-

cessed paper, the printed image

may be partly invisible. Only use

recommended paper.

When D is blinking, toner is be- ---

ginning to run out. Replace the

toner cartridge soon. ⇒See the

Copy Reference.

Message appears

blank at the other

end.

The original was set upside down. P.18 “HOW TO SET AN

Set it properly.

ORIGINAL”

You want to cancel a If the original is being stored,

P.4 “OPERATION PANEL”

Memory Transmis- press the {Clear/Stop} key.

sion.

If the original is being sent, use

P.18 “HOW TO SET AN

“Check/Cancel TX Files” in the

ORIGINAL”

Information menu.

You want to cancel Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

an Immediate Trans-

P.4 “OPERATION PANEL”

mission.

You cannot add any 99 (with the Fax Feature Expander P.44 “Restrictions When Di-

destinationinGroup it is 999) destination has been pro- aling with the Number Keys”

though it does not

grammed with the number keys.

reach the maximum Program it with the Quick Dial

number.

key or Speed Dial instead.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

Solution

Refer to

Immediate transmis- Use memory transmission while P.24 “MEMORY TRANS-

sion error occurs

while copying in

multiple numbers.

copying in multiple numbers.

MISSION”

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDICATORS

When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or Flashing

If the Receive File indicator is blinking, a message has been received and stored

in memory with Memory Lock. You need to print it out manually. ⇒ P.114

“PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”

If the Receive File indicator is lit, a message has been received but could not be

printed for some reason. The message was stored in memory (Substitute Recep-

tion). When you solve the problem, the message will be automatically printed

out. The table below lists some problems that could have caused Substitute Re-

ception to take place and their solutions.

Reference

P.114 “PRINTING A FILE RECEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”

Why Substitute Reception Indication/Status

Occurred

Solution

Paper has run out

Toner is empty

Paper is jammed

B and/or {Fax} key is lit

in red.

Add paper.

⇒See the "Loading Paper"

in the Copy Reference."

D is lit

Replace the toner cartridge.

⇒See the "Adding Toner"

in the Copy Reference.

x is lit

Remove the jammedpaper.

⇒See the "Clearing Mis-

feed" in the Copy Refer-

ence.

Cover is open

The message “Doors/Cov- A cover other than the Doc-

ers open” appears.

ument Feeder (ADF) or

front cover is open.

⇒Close the cover.

Machine is busy printing

with another function

The machine is printing

with another function.

The message will be print-

ed after the current job fin-

ishes automatically.

Output Tray is full.

The Ouput Tray is full. Re- Remove paper from the

move paper. Output Tray.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

When the Confidential File Indicator is Lit

If this indicator is lit, a message has been received into memory with Confiden-

tial Reception. You need to print it out manually. ⇒ P.112 “PRINTING A CON-

FIDENTIAL MESSAGE”

When the Fax key is Lit in Red

{ }

If this key is lit, refer to the table below and take the appropriate action.

Problem

Solution

Paper has run out.

Add paper.

⇒See the Loading Paper in the Copy Reference.

The paper output tray is full.

Remove the paper from the tray.

The machine is in RDS (Remote Wait with the main power switch on. Machine will

Diagnositc System) mode.

go to the standby mode after it exits from the RDS

mode.

A facsimile error has occurred. The facsimile has a problem. Contact a service rep-

resentative. The copier will still function normally.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEN AN ERROR REPORT IS PRINTED

An error report is printed when a message could not be successfully sent or re-

ceived.

Possible causes include a problem with your machine or the receiver's, noise on

the telephone line etc. If an error occurs during transmission, re-send the origi-

nal. If an error occurs during reception, ask the sender to re-send the message.

Note

❒ If the error happens frequently, contact your service representative.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

WHEN POWER IS TURNED OFF OR FAILS

Even if the main power switch is turned off, the contents of the machine's mem-

ory (programmed numbers etc.) will not be lost. However, if power is lost for

more than 1 hour through the main power switch being turned off, a power cut

or the power cable being removed, memory contents will be lost. Lost items will

include any fax messages stored in memory using Memory Transmission or Re-

ception.

If a file has been deleted from memory, a Power Failure Report is automatically

printed as soon has power is restored. This report can be used to identify lost

files. If an original stored for Memory Transmission was lost, re-send it. If a mes-

sage received by Memory Reception or Substitute Reception was lost, ask the

sender to re-send it. If an Auto Document was lost, you will need to store it in

memory again.

Important

❒ Make sure that 100 % is shown on the display before you unplug the machine.

If a lower value is shown, some data is currently stored in memory.

❒ Right after a power failure, the internal battery needs to be sufficiently re-

charged to guard against future data loss. Please keep the machine plugged

in and the main power switch on for at least one week after the power loss

occurs.

Note

❒ If you install the Hard disk option, all files stored in memory are not erased

even if there is a power failure.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Facsimile User Tools

ACCESSING THE USER TOOLS

The User Tools allow you to program

the machine with your identification,

store frequently used numbers and

settings, and customize the default

settings to match your needs.

❖

Key Op. Settings

Use to program/check: your

name, your fax number, line type,

various ID codes, monitor volume,

date and time, number of docu-

ments transmitted/received

So you can find the User Tool you

want quickly and easily, they are

grouped by function:

Preparation

Some menus will not fit on the dis-

play. Press [↑Prev.] and [↓Next] to

scroll through them if you cannot

see the item you need.

❖

Use to program or delete: Quick

Dials, Groups, Optional Groups,

Speed Dial, Keystroke Programs,

Auto Documents, Irregular scan

Area

Press [PrevMenu] to return to the

Previous menu.

Items that are currently selected

appear highlighted.

❖

Reports/Lists

Press the [OK] key to accept the

new settings.

Use to print: the TCR, Group list,

Keystroke Program list, Speed Dial

list, Auto Document list, Forward-

ing list, Quick Dial list and Auto

Documents, Authorized Reception

list

Note that the changes will not be

made if you do not press the [OK

]

key.

Press [OK] or [Cancel] to return to

the previous display.

❖

Initial Setup TX

Use to set defaults for: Transmis-

sion mode (Memory/Immediate),

scanning conditions (Resolution,

Image Density and Original Type)

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Initial Setup RX

Use to turn on or off: Reverse Or-

der Printing Checkered Mark,

Center Mark, Print RX Time,

Multi-copy Reception, Authorized

Reception, Special RX NOS., For-

warding, 2-sided printing.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

❖

User Functions

Use to program settings you fre-

quently use into the User Function

Keys

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ Function numbers are different

depending on the machine

model and options attached.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

F Follow the instructions on the

User Tools / Counter

display.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

For more details on each User

Tool, see the relevant pages of this

manual.

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Exiting User Tool mode

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

A When you have made your chang-

es and pressed [OK], press the {Us-

er Tools/Counter} key to return to

standby mode.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Note

❒ To exit “Key Op. Settings”, you

need to return to the Facsimile

User Tools initial display. Press

D Enter the number that matches

the category you require.

[

PrevMenu] on each display until

you reach the main menu, then

press the {User Tools/Counter

}

key.

Note

❒ If you select “Key Op. Settings,”

you must enter the function

number for “Key Op. Settings”

with number keys and press the

{

} (Enter) key within 3 sec-

onds.

E Enter the function number of the

User Tool you require.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

Registering Quick Dials

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

To save time, you can program a fax

number that you use often into a

Quick Dial key. Then, whenever you

are sending a message to that loca-

tion, just press that Quick Dial key to

dial.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

Use the following steps to program a

new Quick Dial or to edit or overwrite

existing Quick Dials. There are 56

Quick Dials available.

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

You can register the following items

in each key:

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

• Destination fax number (up to 254

digits)

• Destination name

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Important

❒ We recommend that you print the

Quick Dial list and keep it when

you program or change fax num-

bers. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Limitation

❒ When a registered Quick Dial key

is being used for a standby Memo-

ry Transmission, the message

“This destination is in use for

standby transmission file. Please

modify/delete after transmis-

sion.” is shown and you cannot

change the destination for this key.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

E Enter the function number for

“Reg. Quick Dial” using the num-

ber keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

F Press the Quick Dial key which I Enter the destination name.

you want to register.

Note

❒ If you press a wrong key, press

ND1X03E0

[

PrevMenu] then try again.

Note

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which Quick Dial keys have

been programmed.

❒ If a destination name is already

registered in this Quick Dial

key, the name is shown on the

display. If you wish to change

this name, press the {Clear/Stop

key and enter another name.

}

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

G Enter a fax number using the

number keys.

J Press [OK].

The fax number and name are dis-

played.

K Press [OK] to register the new set-

Note

ting.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ If a fax number is already regis-

tered in this Quick Dial key, the

number and communication

type are shown on the display.

If you wish to change the fax

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered

values are canceled and the dis-

play shown in step 7 appears

again.

number, press the {Clear/Stop

}

key and enter another number.

❒ You cannot omit the fax num-

ber.

L Press [Exit].

H Press [Name] .

The display shown in step 6 ap-

pears again.

Note

❒ If you wish to omit the destina-

M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

tion name, go to step 11.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”

Quick Dial List

mode.

Printing the Quick Dial list allows

you to check destinations registered

in Quick Dial keys. ⇒ P.158 “RE-

PORTS/LISTS”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Deleting Quick Dials

Reference

This procedure describes how to find

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

a programmed Quick Dial and delete

it.

Limitation

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ When a Quick Dial key is being

used for a standby Memory Trans-

mission, the message “This desti-

nation is in use for standby

transmission file. Please modify/

delete after transmission.” is

shown and you cannot delete the

destination for this key.

E Enter the function number for

“Delete QuickDial” using the

number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Press the Quick Dial key which

you want to delete.

The current contents of the key are

displayed.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Note

❒ If you press the wrong key,

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

press [No] then try again.

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

❒ You can press [Status] to see

Quick Dial keys that have been

already programmed.

names of functions assigned to User

Function keys.

Limitation

❒ Print the template on A4 label pa-

per that can be peeled and stuck on

the operation panel.

Note

❒ You can print the template from

the Bypass Tray.

❒ You can choose whether to print

on transparent or non-transparent

label paper with the User Parame-

ters. ⇒ P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”By default the setting is

“Non-transparent”.

G Press [Yes].

❒ To print the label template, see

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press [No], the destination

is not deleted and the display is

shown in step 6 appears again.

H Press [Yes] to delete the destina-

tion stored in this Quick Dial.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the destination

is not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Quick Dial Key and Function

Key Label (Dial label)

You can print a template that can be

used to make labels for Quick Dial

and User Function keys. The template

will have destination or Group names

programmed in Quick Dials, and the

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Non-transparent label paper

Dial label (Jan. 9. 1998 2:14PM)

ABC COMPANY

01 NEW YOR 02 GTRONT 03 P SEND L 04

05 *LONDON 06 PARIS O 07 MAIN OF

NEW YORK O

TRONT OFF

SEND LATE

LONDON OFF PARIS OFFI MAIN OFFIC

01-07

08-14

15-21

22-28

29-35

36-42

43-49

50-56

TX Flles

Status

F Code

TEL Mode G4

Stamp

Please cut and stick on above the One Touch key

ND0X03E6

1. Quick Dial key number

2. Destination name

3. Group name (G)

4. Program name (P)

5. Programmed contents of User Function keys

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Transparent label paper

Dial label (Jan. 9. 1998 2:14PM)

ABC COMPANY

NEW YORK O

TRONT OFF

SEND LATE

LONDON OFF PARIS OFFI MAIN OFFIC

01-07

08-14

15-21

22-28

29-35

36-42

43-49

50-56

TX Flles

Status

F Code

TEL Mode G4

Stamp

Please cut and stick on above the One Touch key

ND0X03E5

1. Quick Dial key number

1. Destination name

1. Group name (G)

1. Program name (P)

1. Programmed contents of User Function keys

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❒ If you register a Group with the

number keys when a file is waiting

to be transmitted, a message is

shown. You sometimes cannot reg-

ister any more destinations even

when the number of specified des-

tinations is 99 or less. This is be-

cause a fax number is stored in

memory for the file to be transmit-

ted. When the transmission is com-

pleted and the fax number is

deleted, you can register the

Group.

Registering Groups

If you send the same message to sev-

eral destinations at the same time on a

regular basis, program these destina-

tion numbers as a Group. This allows

you to dial these destinations with a

single key press.

Use these steps to program a new

Group or to edit or overwrite an exist-

ing Group.

You can register the following items

in a Group:

❒ When a lot of destinations are reg-

istered in a Group using number

keys, you sometimes cannot enter

a destination for a Memory Trans-

mission with the number keys.

• Destination fax numbers (up to 200

numbers for each group, up to 254

digits for each number)

• Group name (up to 20 characters)

❒ When a registered group is being

used for a standby Memory Trans-

mission, the message “This desti-

nation is in use for standby

transmission file. Please modify/

delete after transmission” is

shown and you cannot change des-

tinations for this Group.

You can enter destination numbers

with Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or

the number keys.

Important

❒ It is recommend that you print the

Group Dial list and keep it when

you register or change destina-

tions. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Limitation

❒ The maximum number of Groups

you can register is 9.

❒ The maximum number of destina-

tion you can register in a Group is

200. This 200 can be composed of

up to 55 Quick Dial numbers, 100

Speed Dial numbers and 98 num-

bers entered directly with the

number keys. The maximum num-

ber of the destination you can reg-

ister in all group is 255.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

❒ The number of destinations that

can be registered with the number

keys depends on how the machine

is used. You can register up to 99

destinations for all the Groups.

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which Quick Dial keys are cur-

rently programmed.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Enter the first fax number then

press [Add] before you enter the

next.

C Enter the number of the Fax.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Note

❒ Enter a destination in any of the

Reference

following three ways:

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

• Enter the fax number using

the number keys.

• Press a Quick Dial key in

which the destination is reg-

istered.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

• Press the {Speed Dial} key

and enter a Speed Dial code.

E Enter the function number for

“Reg. Group Dial” using the

number keys.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and re-enter

the correct Group number.

❒ If destinations are already regis-

tered, they are shown on the

display. Press the < or > key

to scroll through the destina-

tions on the display. If you want

to change a destination, select it

and press the {Clear/Stop} key.

Press the {Clear/Stop} key once

to erase a Quick Dial or Speed

Dial number, or press it repeat-

edly to erase a number entered

with the number keys. When

you specify the destination us-

ing the number keys, the digit

will be erased one by one. When

F Press the Quick Dial key in which

you want to register the Group.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

[

Cancel] then try again.

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

using Quick dial or Speed dial,

they will be erased at once.

L Press [OK] to register the Group.

❒ You cannot omit the fax num-

ber.

H Repeat step 7 for all the destina-

tions you want registered in the

Group.

I Press [Name].

ND1X03E0

J Enter the Group name.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the Group

is not programmed and the dis-

play shown in step 6 appears

again.

Note

M Press [Exit].

❒ If the Group name is already

registered, it is shown on the

display. If you wish to change

the Group name, press the

The display shown in step 6 ap-

pears again.

N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter an-

other name.

Group Dial list

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

The Group list allows you to print

and check destinations registered in

Groups and Optional Groups. ⇒

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

K Press [OK].

The entered fax numbers and

Group name are shown on the dis-

play.

Deleting Groups

Note

This function deletes all destinations

registered in a Group.

❒ Press the < or > key to scroll

through the destinations on the

display. If you want to change a

destination, select it and press

the {Clear/Stop} key. Press the

Limitation

❒ When a registered Group is being

used for a Memory Transmission

on standby, the message “This des-

tination is in use for standby trans-

mission file. Please modify/delete

after transmission.” is displayed

and you cannot delete destinations

for this Group.

{

Clear/Stop} key once to erase a

Quick Dial or Speed Dial num-

ber, or press it repeatedly to

erase a number entered with the

number keys.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

The registered Group is shown on

the display.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

Note

[

No] and press the correct key.

❒ If the standby display is not

❒ You can press [Status] to see

Quick Dial keys are pro-

grammed with Group.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

G Press [Yes].

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X03E0

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Note

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ If you press [No], the Group is

not deleted and the display is

shown in step 6 appears again.

H Press [Yes].

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Group Dial” using the

number keys.

The Group is deleted.

F Press the Quick Dial key whose

Group you wish to delete.

ND1X03E0

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2000; 56 in quick dial keys, 1000

speed dials, and 999 numbers en-

tered directory with the number

keys.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the Group is

not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

❒ The number of destinations that

can be registered with the number

keys depends on how the machine

is used. It is possible to register 999

destinations for all the Optional

Groups. If you register 999 destina-

tions with the number keys, how-

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Registering Optional Groups

An optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

ever, you cannot perform

Memory Transmission or specify a

Group. When you register destina-

tions on the number keys, the

number of destinations must be

998 or less. ⇒ P.43 “Number Keys”

Installing the Fax Feature Expander

option enables you to store more

Groups. These extra Groups are re-

ferred to as Optional Groups.

Use these steps to program a new Op-

tional Group or edit or overwrite an

existing one. You can register the fol-

lowing items in each Optional Group:

❒ If you register an Optional Group

with the number keys when a file

is waiting to be transmitted, the

message “You have exceeded the

maximum machine specifications.

No additional entry with number

keys” is shown and you sometimes

cannot register any more destina-

tions even when the number of

specified destinations is 998 or

less. This is because a fax number

is stored in memory for the file to

be transmitted. When the file

transmission is completed and the

fax number is deleted, you can reg-

ister a Group.

• Destination fax numbers (up to 200

numbers for each group, up to 254

digits for each number)

• Group name (up to 20 characters)

To specify destinations you can use

Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials, or the

number keys.

Important

❒ We recommend that you print the

Optional Group Dial list and keep

it when you register or change des-

tinations. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/

LISTS”

❒ When a lot of destinations are reg-

istered in the number keys for an

Optional Group, you sometimes

cannot dial a destination for a

Memory Transmission with the

number keys.

Limitation

❒ The maximum number of Optional

Groups you can register is 21.

❒ Before you can use this feature you

must program a User Function

Key with the Optional Group func-

tion. ⇒ P.164 “ASSIGNING USER

FUNCTION KEYS”

❒ When a previously registered Op-

tional Group is being used for a

standby transmission, the message

“This destination is in use for

standby transmission file. Peace

modify/delete after transmission”

❒ The maximum number of destina-

tions you can register in Groups is

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

is shown and you cannot change

destinations for this Group.

E Enter the function number for

“Reg. Opt. G.Dial” using the

number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Enter the Optional Group num-

ber (10 to 30) you want to register

using the number keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Note

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

❒ If you make a mistake with the

first digit, press the {Clear/Stop

}

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

key and enter a correct number.

If you make a mistake with the

second digit, press [Cancel] and

enter the number again.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”

❒ You can press [Status] to see the

currently registered Optional

Groups.

mode.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

G Enter the first destination, then

press [Add] before entering the

next.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ You can enter destinations in

any of the following three ways:

• Enter a fax number with the

number keys.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Press a Quick Dial key in

which a destination is regis-

tered.

The entered fax numbers and Op-

tional Group name are shown on

the display.

• Press the {Speed Dial} key

Note

and enter a code.

❒ If destinations are already regis-

tered, they are shown on the

display. Press the < or > key

to scroll through the destina-

tions on the display. If you

want to change a destination,

select it and press the {Clear/

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and try again.

❒ If destinations are already regis-

tered, they are shown on the

display. Press the < or > key

to scroll through the destina-

tions on the display. If you want

to change a destination, select it

and press the {Clear/Stop} key.

Press the {Clear/Stop} key once

to erase a Quick Dial or Speed

Dial number, or press it repeat-

edly to erase a number entered

with the number keys.

Stop} key. Press the {Clear/Stop

}

key once to erase a Quick Dial

or Speed Dial number, or press

it repeatedly to erase a number

entered with the number keys

L Press [OK] to store the information

you have just entered.

Note

❒ You cannot omit a fax number.

H Repeat step 7 for all the destina-

tions to be registered in the Op-

tional Group.

I Press [Name].

ND1X03E0

J Enter the name.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the Op-

tional Group is not registered

and the display shown in step 6

appears again.

M Press [Exit].

Note

The display shown in 6 appears

again.

❒ If a Group name is already reg-

istered, it is shown on the dis-

play. If you want to change the

name, press the {Clear/Stop} key

and enter another name.

N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

K Press [OK].

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

-Checking the Contents of

Optional Groups

Print the Optional Group dial list (see

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”).

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

Deleting Optional Groups

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

This function deletes all destinations

registered in an Optional Group.

Limitation

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ If a registered Optional Group is

being used for a standby Memory

Transmission, the message “This

destination is in use for a

standby transmission file.

Please modify/delete after

transmission”is shown and you

cannot change destinations for this

Group.

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Opt.G.Dial” using the

number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Enter the Optional Group num-

ber (10 to 30) you wish to delete

using the number keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

Note

shown, press the {Fax} key.

❒ If you make a mistake with the

first digit, press the {Clear/Stop

}

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

or [Cancel] and enter the correct

number. If you make a mistake

with the second digit, press No

and enter the number again.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which Optional Groups are pro-

grammed.

Registering Speed Dials

If you register a destination in a

Speed Dial, you can dial that number

by just pressing the {Speed Dial} key

followed by a two or three digit code.

Use these steps to program a new

Speed Dial or overwrite an existing

one. You can register the following

items in a Speed Dial:

G Press [Yes].

Note

❒ If you press [No], the Optional

Group is not deleted and the

display shown in step 6 appears

again.

• Destination fax number (up to 100

numbers, up to 254 digits for each

number)

• Destination name

❒ The registered destinations are

• A Telephone Directory search let-

ter (A to Z)

shown.

Important

❒ It is recommended that you print

the Speed Dial list and keep it

when you register or change a des-

tination. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/

LISTS”

ND1X03E0

Limitation

❒ When a registered Speed Dial is

being used for a standby Memory

Transmission, the message “This

destination is in use for

standby transmission file.

Please modify/delete after

transmission”is shown and you

cannot change the destination for

this Quick Dial.

H Press [Yes] to delete the Optional

Group.

❒ You can specify codes 00 to 99.

ND1X03E0

❒ If you install the Function Upgrade

Card (option), you can register up

to 1,000 numbers in Speed Dials.

In this case codes 000 to 999 are

used.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the Optional

Group is not deleted and the

display shown in step 6 appears

again.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

A Make sure that the machine is in F Enter the Speed Dial code you

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

want to register using the number

keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

shown, press the {Fax} key.

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the

correct number.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which Speed Dials are pro-

grammed.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Enter a fax number using the

number keys, and select the com-

munication type.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Note

Reference

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the

correct number.

❒ If a fax number is already regis-

tered in this Speed Dial, the

number is shown on the dis-

play. If you wish to change the

fax number, press the {Clear/

Stop} key and enter another

number.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

E Enter the function number for “

Reg. Speed Dial” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ You cannot omit the fax num-

ber. Be sure to register it.

H Press [Name].

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

L Enter a search letter (A to Z) for

the Telephone Directory.

❒ If you wish to omit the destina-

tion name, go to step 11.

I Enter the destination name.

Reference

⇒ P.213 “Entering Text”

M Press [OK].

The search letter you entered is

shown.

ND1X03E0

N Press [OK].

Note

❒ If a destination name is already

registered in the Speed Dial, the

name is shown on the display. If

you wish to change the destina-

tion name, press the {Clear/

Stop} key and enter another

name.

The fax number, destination name,

and search letter are registered.

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

ND1X03E0

J Press [OK].

Note

The entered destination number

and name are shown on the dis-

play.

❒ If you press [Cancel], the Speed

Dial is not registered.

O Press [Exit].

K Press [Tel.Dir.].

P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Speed Dial list

Print this list to check which destina-

tions are programmed. ⇒ P.158 “RE-

PORTS/LISTS”

ND1X03E0

Deleting Speed Dials

Use this procedure to delete any

Speed Dials you are not using any-

more.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Limitation

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ If a registered Speed Dial is being

used for a standby Memory Trans-

mission, the message “This des-

tination is in use for

standby transmission file.

Please modify/delete after

transmission.” is shown and

you cannot change the destination

for this Speed Dial.

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Speed Dial” using the

number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Enter the Speed Dial code you

wish to delete.

The registered destination is

shown on the display.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake before en-

Note

tering the first digit, press the

❒ If the standby display is not

{

Clear/Stop

} key and enter the

shown, press the {Fax} key.

correct number. If you make a

mistake after entering the last

digit, press [No] and enter the

number again.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which Speed Dials are currently

programmed.

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

G Press [Yes].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Note

Reference

❒ If you press [No], the Speed Dial

is not deleted and the display

shown in 6 appears again.

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Program name (up to 20 charac-

ters)

H Press [Yes].

Important

❒ We recommend that you print the

Keystroke Program list and keep it

when you register or change a

function. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/

LISTS”

ND1X03E0

Limitation

❒ The maximum number of pro-

The Speed Dial is deleted.

grams you can register is 56.

Note

❒ You cannot register a program in a

Quick Dial key used for another

function.

❒ If you press [No], the Speed Dial

is not deleted and the display

shown in 6 appears again.

❒ When a registered program key is

being used for a Memory Trans-

mission on standby, the message

“This destination is in use

for standby transmission

file. Please modify/delete

after transmission” is dis-

played and you cannot change the

function for this key.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Storing Keystroke Programs

If you regularly send messages to a

particular destination or transmit us-

ing the same features, you can save a

lot of repetitive keypad operations by

storing this information in a Key-

stroke Program.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Keystroke Programs can then be re-

called by just pressing a Quick Dial

key. The following procedure can be

used to program a new Keystroke

Program or overwrite an old one.

You can register the following items

in Keystroke Programs:

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

• Memory Transmission, Immediate

Transmission, destinations (up to

200 numbers), Resolution, Original

Type, G3 or G4 communication

mode, Stamp, Send Later, Confi-

dential Transmission, Personal

Code transmission, Auto Docu-

ment, Book Fax, Irregular Scan Ar-

ea, Transmission Deadline, Polling

Transmission, Polling Reception,

Transfer Request, and optional

functions

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

G Press [Feature].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

ND1X03E0

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

H Carry out the sequence of opera-

tions you wish to store in this pro-

gram, then press the [OK] key you

selected in step 6.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

E Enter the function number for

“Store Program” using the num-

ber keys.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press the {Clear Modes/En-

ergy Saver} key, the display re-

turns to the steps before

keystroke programming.

F Press a Quick Dial key you want

to register.

The “Store Program” display is

shown.

❒ For example, say you wish to

use Send Later to destination

number 0123456789. The se-

quence of operations would be:

• Enter “0123456789” using the

number keys.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

• Press [Mode].

[

Cancel] and press the correct

• Enter the function number

for Send Later using the

number keys.

key.

❒ You can press [Status] to see

Quick Dial keys with Keystroke

Programs already in them.

• Set Send Later ⇒ P.74

“SEND LATER”.

❒ If a program is already stored in

the Quick Dial key, the function

name is shown on the display. If

you want to change the pro-

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

gram, press the {Clear Modes/En-

ergy Saver} key and program

function again.

The program is stored.

I Press [OK].

J Press [Name].

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the Key-

stroke Program is canceled and

the display shown in step 6 ap-

pears again.

N Press [Exit].

The screen shown in step 6 appears

again.

ND1X03E0

Note

O Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ You cannot omit a program

name. Be sure to register it.

Keystroke program list

K Enter the program name.

The Keystroke Program list allows

you to print and check functions reg-

istered in keystroke programs.⇒

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

Using a Keystroke Program

Note

❒ If a program name is already

registered in the Quick Dial key,

the name is shown on the dis-

play. If you wish to change the

program name, press the {Clear/

Stop} key and enter another

name.

E.g., execute a program using Send

Later for the fax number

“0123456789.”

A Set your original.

Note

Reference

❒ If the destination, resolution,

contrast and/or original type

are not registered in the pro-

gram, carry out these opera-

tions now.

P.213 “Entering Text”

L Press [OK

]

The function and program name

are shown on the display.

M Press [OK].

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

B Press the Quick Dial key pro-

grammed with the Keystroke Pro-

gram.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

In this example, the fax number

and program name “Send Later”

are shown on the display.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Press the [OK] key then the {Start

}

key.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The machine starts scanning the

original.

The message will be sent at the

specified time.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Deleting a Keystroke Program

Reference

Limitation

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ When a registered program is be-

ing used for a standby Memory

Transmission, the message “This

destination is in use for

standby transmission file.

Please modify/delete after

transmission”is shown and you

cannot delete the program.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber key.

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Program” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If you delete a program, the regis-

tered program name is also delet-

ed.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Press the Quick Dial containing

the program you wish to delete.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The contents of the program are

shown on the display.

Registering Auto Documents

Note

If you find that you often have to send

a particular page to people (e.g., a

map, a standard attachment, or a set

of instructions), store that page in

memory as an Auto Document. This

saves re-scanning the original every

time you wish to send it.

❒ If you make a mistake, press

[

No] and the correct key.

❒ You can press [Status] to see the

Keystroke Programs currently

programmed.

Use the following procedure to pro-

gram a new Auto Document or over-

write an existing one.

Important

G Press [Yes].

❒ You can store the following items

in an Auto Document:

• Original (up to 6 documents/

with optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander, 18), one page for each

message)

• Scanning conditions (Resolu-

tion, Original Type, and Image

Density)

ND1X03E0

Note

• Irregular Scan Area

❒ If you press [No], the program is

not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

• Document name (up to 10 char-

acters)

❒ We recommend that you print the

Auto Document list and keep it

when you register or change a doc-

H Press [Yes].

ument.

LISTS”

⇒

P.158 “REPORTS/

Limitation

❒ You can only send one Auto Docu-

ment per transmission.

❒ If you install the optional Fax Fea-

ture Expander, you can store up to

18 Auto Documents.

ND1X03E0

The program is deleted.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the program is

not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

A Make sure that the machine is in F Enter the number of the Auto

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Document you want to register

using the number keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

❒ If you make a mistake with the

shown, press the {Fax} key.

first digit, press the {Clear/Stop}

key and enter the correct num-

ber. If you make a mistake for

digit, press [Cancel] key and en-

ter the correct number.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

❒ If a document is already regis-

tered with that Auto Document

number, the name is shown on

the display.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Press [Name].

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

ND1X02E7

Reference

Note

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ You cannot omit a document

name. Be sure to register it.

H Enter the Auto Document name.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

E Enter the function number for

"Reg. Auto Doc." using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If the Name is already regis-

tered, it is shown on the display.

If you want to change the docu-

ment name, press the {Clear/

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stop} key and enter another

The Auto Document is stored. The

display shown in step 6 appears

again.

name.

Reference

N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

P.213 “Entering Text”

I Press [OK].

Auto Document list

Note

The Auto Document list allows you to

print and check stored Auto Docu-

ment names. To print this list, follow

the steps shown in “Reports/Lists”.

⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

❒ If you are storing a standard

size document, go to step 12.

J Press [Size].

Deleting an Auto Document

Limitation

❒ You cannot delete an Auto Docu-

ment waiting to be transmitted.

Delete it after the transmission or

delete the Auto Document after

deleting the file waiting to be

transmitted.

ND1X02E8

K Select a size using the < and >

keys and press [OK].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ND1X03E0

The document name and original

size are shown on the display.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

L Set your original and press the

{

Start} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

The machine starts scanning the

original.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

M When the original has been com-

pletely scanned in, press [Exit].

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

G Press [Yes].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

ND1X03E0

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the document

is not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

H Press [Yes].

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Auto Doc.” using the

number keys.

ND1X03E0

F Enter the number of the Auto

Document you want to delete us-

ing the number keys.

The Auto Document is deleted.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the document

is not deleted and the display

shown in step 6 appears again.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

The stored document is shown on

the display.

Registering Irregular Area

Note

When you select Irregular Area to

scan a non-standard size original, two

custom sizes of original are available

(Area 1 and Area 2). Use this function

to register these custom sizes in ad-

vance.

❒ If you make a mistake with the

first digit, press the {Clear/Stop

}

key and enter the correct num-

ber.

To change an existing Irregular Scan

size, just use the following procedure

to overwrite it.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important

Reference

❒ When registering or changing an

original size, we recommend that

you make a memo of the new size.

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Limitation

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ For the vertical length (width), se-

lect “Auto,” “A4 (210 mm),” “B4

(257 mm),” “A3 (297 mm),” “8 ¹/₂

inch,” or “11 inch.”

E Enter the function for “Reg. Irreg.

Area” using the number keys.

❒ For the horizontal length, specify

from 128 to 432 mm or from 5.5 to

17 inches. You cannot set a length

less than 128 mm or longer than

432 mm.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

F Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

ND1X03E6

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Note

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

❒ If a size is already registered, it

is shown on the display.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

G Press [Vert.].

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X02E7

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

H Select a size you want to register

using the < or > key and press

❒ Each time you press [mm

↔

[

OK].

inch], the units change between

“inch” and “mm” alternately. If

you enter a length and change

the unit by pressing [mm

↔

inch], the length is converted au-

tomatically according to the

unit (fractions are rounded off).

For example, when you enter

{

2 5 0

}, { }, and { } in millimeters

ND1X03E0

and change to “inch,” the length

“9.8 inch” is shown on the dis-

play. If you press “mm” again

“249 mm” is displayed.

The specified size is shown on the

display.

K Press [OK].

Note

❒ When you select “[Auto]”, “---”

is shown on the display.

I Press [Horiz.].

The display shown in 6 appears

again.

L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Deleting an Irregular Area

ND1X02E8

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

J Enter a length using the number

keys and press [OK].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

ND1X03E0

The specified size is shown on the

display.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

F Press [Area 1] or [Area 2].

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

ND1X03E6

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

No] and choose a correct one.

[

G Press [Yes].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

ND1X03E0

The Irregular Area is deleted.

Note

E Enter the function number for

“Delete Irreg.Area” using the

number keys.

❒ If you press [No], the Irregular

Area is not deleted and the dis-

play shown in step 6 appears

again.

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Note

❒ If the appropriate display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

The registered sizes are displayed.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

REPORTS/LISTS

This function allows you to print the

following reports and lists manually.

Select a report or list as needed.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

• TCR (Transaction Confirmation

Report) ⇒ P.116 “PRINTING THE

TCR”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

• Quick Dial list ⇒ P.131 “Quick Dial

List”

Reference

• Group Dial list ⇒ P.137 “Group

Dial list”

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

• Keystroke Program list ⇒ P.149

“Keystroke program list”

• Speed Dial list ⇒ P.145 “Speed Dial

D Enter the function number for

“Register/Delete” using the num-

ber keys.

list”

• Auto Document list ⇒ P.153 “Auto

Document list”Auto Document list

E Enter the Reports/Lists number

you want to print out using the

number keys.

• Authorized Reception list ⇒ P.191

“Sender/Authorized Reception List”

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you can't see the item you

need, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

[

Cancel] and enter the correct

❒ If the standby display is not

number.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

F Press the {Start} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

When printing is completed, the

display shown in step 5 appears

again.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

Note

User Tools / Counter

❒ If you press Cancel before print-

ing starts, the printing stops and

the display shown in step 5 ap-

pears again.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INITIAL SETUP TX

When you turn on the machine or re-

turn to Copy mode, the machine re-

turns to the home settings. You can

change these home settings so that

the machine starts with your most fre-

quently used features selected.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

This procedure can be used to change

the home settings for the transmis-

sion mode (Memory/Immediate

Transmission) and scanning condi-

tions (Resolution, Original Type, Im-

age Density, and Auto Image

Density).

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Initial Setup TX” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ You can also choose whether the

machine returns to the home set-

tings after each communication. ⇒

P.203 “Changing the User Parame-

ters”

The “Initial Setup TX” menu is

shown on the display.

E Enter a function number using

the number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

Cancel and enter the correct

number.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

F Select the mode you want to

change using the < or > keys

then press [OK].

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

❖

Transmission Mode Example

ND1X03E0

❖

Resolution Example

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you want to change other set-

tings, repeat steps 5 and 6.

G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INITIAL SETUP RX

The Initial Setup Reception function

allows you to turn the following re-

ception functions on or off.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

• Reception Mode P.59 “SELECT-

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

ING THE RECEPTION MODE”

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

• Checkered Mark P.64 “Checkered

Mark”

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

• Center Mark P.64 “Center Mark”

• Print RX Time P.64 “Reception

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Time”

• Multi-copy Reception P.65 “Multi-

copy Reception”

• 2-sided Printing P.65 “2-Sided

Printing”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

• Reverse Order Printing P.68 “Re-

verse Order Printing”

Reference

• Authorized RX P.188 “Authorized

Reception”

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

• Special RX Nos. P.182 “Special

Senders to Treat Differently (Special

RX Nos.)”

D Enter the function number for

“Initial Setup RX” using the num-

ber keys. The Initial Setup RX

menu is shown on the display.

• Forwarding P.175 “Forwarding”

• Bypass Paper Size⇒ P.162 “To set

the Bypass Paper Size”

E Enter the function number of the

item you want to change with the

number keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

❒ If the standby display is not

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the

shown, press the {Fax} key.

correct number.

F Change the setting with the <

and > keys and press [OK].

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

❖

Reception Mode Example

To set the Bypass Paper Size

A Press the <and >keys to select

Auto.

ND2C0104

❖

Checkered Mark Example

ND1X03E1

B Press Ppr.Size.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you wish to change other

functions, repeat steps 5 and 6.

ND1X02E6

❒ Select on or off for Checkered

Mark, Center Mark, Print RX

Time, 2-Sided Printing, Autho-

rized RX, Special RX Nos., and

Reverse Printing.

C Press Vert..

❒ For Multi-copy Recp., enter the

number of copies using the

number keys.

❒ For Forwarding, select the mes-

sages to forward, either from all

the senders, from specified

senders or nothing.

ND1X02E7

D Press the < and > keys to select

size and press [OK].

G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

ND1X03E5

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INITIAL SETUP RX

E Press Horiz..

ND1X02E7

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS

You can program each of the User

Note

Function keys ({F1} –{F5}) with a

❒ If the standby display is not

function that you use frequently.

When you wish to use that function,

instead of having to search through

several menus to find it, just press the

appropriate User Function key. This

procedure can be used to edit, delete

or change the contents of the User

Function keys.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Note

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

❒ At default the following functions

are programmed by default. Tel

mode cannot be programmed in

F1/F2 keys.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Key Standard

With Options

Start Manual

←

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Transmission

Result Display

←

Reference

TEL Mode

←

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

G3/G4 Mode

Selection (with

ISDN option)

D Enter the function number for

“User Functions” using the num-

ber keys.

Stamp with

Stamp option

E Press the User Function key you

Storing/Editing the Contents

of a User Function Key

want to use.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

Cancel and press the correct

key.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ASSIGNING USER FUNCTION KEYS

❒ You can press [Status] to see

how the User Function keys are

currently programmed.

❖

E.g., “Print TCR”

❒ If you have the optional ISDN

unit installed, you can not re-as-

sign User Function key {F4}.

❒ If you have the optional stamp

unit installed, you can not re-as-

sign User Function key {F5}.

F Enter the function number you

want to register into the User

Function key using the number

keys and press [OK].

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ To see a function number not

displayed on the display, press

[↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

❒ If you wish to store more func-

tions, repeat steps 5 and 6 for

other keys.

❒ If you press Cancel, the function

is not stored and the display

shown in step 5 appears again.

G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Using a User Function

A Press the User Function Key

({F1}–{F5}) in which the function

you want to use is stored.

The stored function's display is

shown.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

the maximum number of personal

codes you can register is 50.

Personal Codes

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

This function allows you to keep

track of machine usage. When Per-

sonal Codes are programmed and

Personal Code Access is turned on us-

ers have to enter their Personal Code

before they send a fax. ⇒ P.207

“Printing the User Parameter List”

Important

Note

❒ We recommend that you print the

Personal Code list and keep it

when you register or change a Per-

sonal Code. ⇒ P.158 “REPORTS/

LISTS”

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Note

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

❒ To enter a Personal Code when

send a fax, follow the steps shown

in “Personal Code Transmission”.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

⇒

P.78 “PERSONAL CODE

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

TRANSMISSION”

❒ If Personal Code Access is

switched on, users cannot use the

facsimile feature unless they enter

their Personal Code. ⇒ P.169 “Per-

sonal Code Access”

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Registering Personal Codes

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

You can register the following items

in a Personal Code:

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

• Personal Code (any 4 digit number

except 0000)

• Name (up to 20 characters)

D Enter the function number for

To change an existing Personal code,

just overwrite it with a new one.

“Key Op. Settings” using the

Limitation

❒ On a standard model you can reg-

ister up to 20 codes. If you install

the Fax Feature Expander option,

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

play. If you wish to change the

name, press [Name] and enter

another name. If you wish to

program another code, press

[

Cancel] and enter the new code.

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which codes have been already

programmed.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Personal Code” using the num-

ber keys.

H Press [Name].

F Enter the function number for

“Reg. Pers. Code” using the num-

ber keys.

ND1X02E7

I Enter the name.

G Enter a Personal Code using the

number keys.

Note

❒ If the name has already been

programmed, it appears on the

display. If you wish to change

the name, press the {Clear/Stop

}

Note

key and enter another name.

❒ If you enter a wrong number for

the first, second, or third digit,

press the {Clear/Stop} key and

enter a correct number. If you

enter a wrong value for the

fourth digit, press Cancel and

enter the correct number from

the first digit.

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

J Press [OK].

The entered Personal Code and

name are shown on the display.

❒ If you enter a Personal code that

has already been programmed,

the contents appear on the dis-

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

K Press [OK] to register the code and B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

name.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered

Personal Code is canceled and

the display shown in step 7 ap-

pears again.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

L Press [Exit].

Reference

The display shown in step 7 ap-

pears again.

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

M Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

D Enter the function number for

N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

}

Deleting a Personal Code

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Personal Code” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

The Personal Code is deleted.

F Enter the function number for

"Delete Pers. Code" using the

number keys.

ND1X03E0

G Enter the Personal Code you want

to delete using the number keys.

Note

❒ If you press [No], the Personal

Code is not deleted and the dis-

play shown in step 7 appears

again.

Note

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the

correct code.

❒ You can press [Status] to see

which codes have been already

programmed.

Personal Code Access

The machine can be set up so that us-

ers cannot use it without entering a

registered Personal Code. This pre-

vents an unauthorized person from

sending a fax message and helps

track the activity of each user.

H Press [Yes].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ND2C0104

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

If you press [No], the Personal

Code is not deleted and the display

shown in step 7 appears again.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

I Press [Yes].

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

F Enter the number for “Pers.Code

Access” using the number keys.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Switch access on or off using the

< or > key and then press [OK].

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

ND1X03E0

Reference

Note

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ If you press [Cancel], the previ-

ous setting is not changed and

the display shown in step 6 ap-

pears again.

D Enter the number for “Key Op.

Settings” using the number keys

and press the { } key within 3

seconds.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

The display returns to the Personal

Code screen.

Printing the Personal Code List

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

Print this list to find out the registered

Personal Codes and their names.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the number for “Personal

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Code” using the number keys.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Note

F Enter the function number for

“Print Pers. Code” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

G Press the {Start} key.

User Tools / Counter

When printing is completed, the

display shown in step 4 appears

again.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel] before

printing starts, the printing

stops and the display shown in

step 6 appears again.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

ECM

If a part of a transmission fails be-

cause of a line problem, the lost data

is automatically resent. For this fea-

ture to work, the other machine must

have ECM. By default, ECM is turned

on, but you can change this with the

following procedure.

D Enter the number for “Key Op.

Settings” using the number keys

and press the { } key within 3

seconds.

When ECM is off data transmission

speed shifts down below 14.4 Kbps

and JBIG compression is not avail-

able.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the number for “Personal

Code” using the number keys.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

F Switch ECM on or off using the

< or > key and press [OK].

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

ND1X03E0

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the previ-

ous setting is not changed and

the display shown in step 5 ap-

pears again.

C Enter the number of the Fax

mode.

G Press [PrevMenu].

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Memory Lock

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

The optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

When you switch Memory Lock On,

received messages are stored in mem-

ory and not printed automatically.

When a message is received in Mem-

ory Lock mode, the Receive File indi-

cator blinks. To print this message,

enter the Memory Lock ID. A user

who does not know the ID cannot

print the message. This prevents an

unauthorized person from seeing the

message.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

To use Memory Lock, program the

Memory Lock ID and switch it on.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“ECM” using the number keys.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

A Make sure that the machine is in E Enter the function number for

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

“Memory Lock” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

F Switch Memory Lock on or off us-

ing the < and > keys and press

OK.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

ND1X03E0

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Note

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

❒ If you press Cancel, Memory

Lock is not switched on and the

display shown in 5 appears

again.

G Press [PrevMenu].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Multistep Transfer

The optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

This machine can be used to build up

a multi-step facsimile network that al-

lows messages to be sent via multiple

Transfer Stations and achieve greater

efficiency in processing Transfer Re-

quests.

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

The following procedure describes

how to program a Transfer Station

number into a Group. Providing this

Group contains the appropriate End

Receiver Information (Group codes),

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

when your machine receives a Trans-

fer Request, it will pass the message

to the Transfer Station(s) you specify.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

E Enter the function number for

“Multistep Transf” using the

number keys.

Note

F Press the Quick Dial key you

want to store this Transfer Group

in.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

Note

User Tools / Counter

❒ You can press [Status] to see the

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

current status of the Group.

ND2L01E0

❒ If the machine has the Optional

Group feature (optional Fax

Feature Expander is required),

you can register a Transfer Sta-

tion. Select the Group type you

wish to register using the num-

ber keys. To select a Group,

press a Quick Dial key. To select

an Optional Group, enter the

Optional Group code using the

number keys. In this example,

Optional Group is selected.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

This is useful if, for example, you are

visiting another office and would like

a copy of your messages sent to that

office so you can read them.

G Specify a Transfer Station.

In this section, the machines that mes-

sages are forwarded to are referred to

as Forwarding Stations. The locations

from which you would like messages

forwarded from are referred to as

Specific Senders.

Note

❒ Enter the Transfer Station's fax

number using a Quick Dial key,

Speed Dial or the number keys.

You can register:

⇒

P.46 “Quick Dials”, P.47

“Speed Dials”, P.43 “Number

• 5 Forwarding Stations (up to 32

digits for each number)

Keys”

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

• 30 Specific Senders (maximum 10

per Forwarding Station, up to 20

characters each with G3 and 24

with G4)

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter the

correct number.

❒ If you press Cancel, the setting

is canceled and the display

show in 6 appears again.

• Wild Cards ⇒ P.213 “Wild Cards”

Important

H Press [OK].

❒ It is recommended that you print

the Forwarding/Sender list and

keep it when you register or

change a receiver or sender. ⇒

P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

Limitation

❒ This feature only works if the in-

coming message is from another

party that has been programmed

as a Specific Sender.

ND1X03E0

I Press [OK].

❒ The Forwarding function does not

forward messages received with

Confidential Reception, Memory

Lock, Polling Reception mode, or

messages received by Transfer Re-

quest.

J Press [PrevMenu].

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Forwarding

❒ You cannot register a sender who

does not have an RTI or CSI.

The optional Fax Feature Expander is re-

quired to use this function.

❒ You can register up to 30 Specific

Senders for Forwarding, Special

RX Nos., and Authorized Recep-

tion functions. You sometimes can-

not register 30 senders depending

on the number of senders regis-

Using this feature, you can select

messages from Specified Senders to

be printed on your machine and then

sent on to another fax machine.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

tered with other functions. If you

install the optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander, you can register up to 50

senders.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Note

❒ You can print a forwarding mark

on forward messages. ⇒ P.207

“Printing the User Parameter List”

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or

CSI. When you communicate with

a sender using G4, register the G4

TID.

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

❒ You can find out the RTI or CSI of

a sender by looking in the destina-

tion name column of the TCR.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

❒ Before using the Forwarding func-

tion, register Forwarding Stations

and select the messages to for-

ward. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SETUP

RX”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

❒ You can specify whether or not to

send received messages on to an-

other fax machine automatically.

See “Changing User Parameters”

⇒ P.203 “Changing the User Param-

eters”. This feature is called “For-

warding”. The default setting is

“Off”.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

key within 3 seconds.

}

❒ You can specify whether or not to

print forwarded messages. This

feature is called “Local Printing”.

The default setting is on. ⇒ P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

Note

Registering Forwarding Stations

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

E Enter the function number for

“Forwarding” using the number

keys.

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

F Enter the function number for I Press [Exit].

“Reg. Receiver” using the num-

ber keys.

G Choose a receiver (Forwarding

Station) to program be entering

the its code number.

ND1X03E0

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Deleting a Forwarding Station

Note

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

❒ If you make a mistake, press

[

Cancel] and enter a correct

number.

H Enter the Forwarding Station's

fax number using the number

keys and select the communica-

tion type, then press [OK].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

ND1X03E0

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Note

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

ND2L01E0

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter a cor-

rect number.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

❒ If you have the optional ISDN

unit, select the line type to be

used before specifying a fax

number. ⇒ P.41 “CHANGING

LINE TYPE”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Reference

Note

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ If you press No, the Forwarding

Station is not deleted and the

display shown in 5 appears

again.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the I Press [Yes].

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

The Forwarding Station is deleted.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

ND1X03E0

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

Note

E Enter the function number for

“Forwarding” using the number

keys.

❒ When you press [No], the For-

warding Station is not deleted

and the display shown in 5 ap-

pears again.

F Enter the function number for

“Delete Receiver” using the num-

ber keys.

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

G Choose the receiver (Forwarding

Station) to delete by entering its

code number.

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Registering Specific Senders

(Forwarding)

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

[

No] and enter a correct number.

H Press Yes.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

ND2C0104

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

G Choose a Specific Sender to regis-

ter by entering its code number.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter a cor-

C Enter the number of the Fax

rect number.

mode.

H Press [RTI/CSI].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

ND2C0101

I Register an RTI or CSI of a sender

and press [OK].

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

Reference

⇒ P.213 “Entering Text”

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Forwarding” using the number

keys.

J Select whether or not to register a

sender as a wild card. ⇒ P.213

“Wild Cards”.

F Enter the function number for

“Register Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

K Press [Receiver].

N Press [Exit].

ND1X02E8

ND1X03E0

L Choose the Forwarding Station O Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

you want to assign this Specific

Sender to: enter its code and press

P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

[

OK].

Deleting a Specific Sender (Forwarding)

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ND1X03E0

M Press [OK].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

ND1X03E0

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the sender

is not registered and the display

shown in 7 appears again.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Reference

H Press [Yes].

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 7 appears again.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

I Press [Yes].

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

The sender is deleted.

E Enter the function number for

“Forwarding” using the number

keys.

F Enter the function number for

“Delete Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

G Choose the Specified Sender you

want to delete by entering its code

with the number keys.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 5 appears again.

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

Note

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter a cor-

Specified Sender/Forwarding Station list

rect number.

❒ If you have a mistake with the

second digit, press [No] and en-

ter the number again.

Print this list to find out which Specif-

ic Senders are assigned to which For-

warding Stations.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

A Make sure that the machine is in E Enter the function number for

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

“Forwarding” using the number

keys.

F Enter the function number for

“Print Sender List” using the

number keys.

G Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

❒ If you press [Cancel] before

printing starts, the printing

stops.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Special Senders to Treat

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Differently (Special RX Nos.)

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Special Reception numbers (Special

RX Nos.) allow you to treat incoming

messages from certain locations dif-

ferently.

For example, you might want mes-

sages from your branch offices print-

ed on a different color paper to

identity them at a glance. In this case,

program the branch office RTI/CSI's

as Specific Senders and select a paper

tray loaded with colored paper.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

• Multi-copy

setting).

(Number of prints

D Enter the function number for

You can have several copies of

messages printed.

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

• Cassette Select (tray from which

messages are printed).

You can choose the paper cassette

used when printing messages. If

you set different color paper in this

cassette, you will be able to recog-

nize messages from certain send-

ers at a glance.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Note

Limitation

❒ If you receive a fax with a paper

size different from that set in the

paper cassette, the printout will

be split across several pages or

reduced to fit on the paper.

❒ The Special Reception Numbers

function cannot used to treat mes-

sages received from a Specific

Senders if they are received with

Polling Reception or Free Polling.

❒ If you choose the optional By-

pass Feed Tray, make sure the

size you programmed for this

tray matches the paper size in

this tray. For more details, P.14

“Acceptable Original Sizes”.

❒ You cannot register a Specific

Sender who does not have an RTI

or CSI.

❒ You can register up to 30 senders

for Forwarding, Special Reception

Numbers, and Authorized Recep-

tion functions. You sometimes can-

not register 30 senders depending

on the number of senders regis-

tered with other functions. If you

install the optional Fax Feature Ex-

pander, you can register up to 50

senders.

• Memory Lock ^*1

You can have messages received

into memory. To print them out,

P.114 “PRINTING A FILE RE-

CEIVED WITH MEMORY LOCK”.

• 2-Sided Printing

Print on both sides of the paper.

Note

Limitation

❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or

CSI. When you communicate with

a sender using G4, register a G4

TID

❒ The function requires both the

optional Duplex Unit and Fax

Memory Board.

• Reverse Printing

❒ You can find the RTI or CSI of a

sender by looking in the destina-

tion name column of the TCR

You can have pages printed in the

opposite order in which they were

received.

You can adjust the following set-

tings for this function:

❒ Before using the Special RX Nos.

function, switch this function to

On by following the steps shown

in Initial Setup RX. ⇒ P.161 “INI-

TIAL SETUP RX”

• Specified Senders (maximum of

30, up to 20 characters each with

G3, up to 24 characters each

with G4)

Registering Specific Senders (Special X

Nos.)

• Wildcards P.213 “Wild Cards”

The optional Fax Feature Expander is

required.

Duplex Tray option and Fax Feature

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Expander are required

Important

❒ It is recommended that you print

the Sender/Specified Number list

and keep it when you register or

change a sender. ⇒ P.158 “RE-

PORTS/LISTS”

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

F Enter the function number for

“Register Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

G Choose a number where you want

User Tools / Counter

to program a Specific Sender.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and reenter a

correct value. If you enter a

wrong value for the second dig-

it, press [Cancel] and enter it

again.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

H Press [RTI/CSI].

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X02E7

I Enter an RTI or CSI of a sender

and press [OK].

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Special RX Nos.”. using the

number keys.

ND1X03E0

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

❖

Memory Lock

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

J Select whether or not to register

the sender as a wild card. ⇒ P.213

“Wild Cards”.

ND1X03E0

Reverse Printing

2-Sided Printing

Note

K Press [RX Mode].

ND1X02E8

L Select any features for this Specif-

ic Sender. You can scroll through

them by pressing [↑Prev.] or [↓N-

ext]. Then press [OK].

❖

Multi-copy

❒ Select only items you want to

change.

❒ If you press [Cancel], the speci-

fied setting are canceled and the

display shown in 11 appears

again.

ND1X03E0

❖

Tray Select

ND1X03E0

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

M Press [OK].

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

ND1X03E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

N Press [Exit].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

ND1X03E0

O Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

D Enter the function number for

P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

}

Deleting a Specific Sender

key within 3 seconds.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Special RX Nos.” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

F Enter the function number for

“Delete Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

G Choose a sender number you

want to delete by entering its code

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

with the number keys. The regis-

tered RTI or CSI is flash up.

Specified Sender List

Print this list to see the currently pro-

grammed Specific Senders.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter a cor-

rect value.

H Press [Yes].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

ND1X03E0

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Note

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 5 appears again.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

I Press [Yes].

The sender is deleted.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

ND1X03E0

Note

D Enter the function number for

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 5 appears again.

“Key Op. Settings” using the

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

Important

❒ It is recommended that you print

the Sender/Authorized Reception

list and keep it when you register

or change a sender. ⇒ P.158 “RE-

PORTS/LISTS”

Note

Limitation

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

❒ You cannot register a Specified

Sender who does not have an RTI

or CSI.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Special RX Nos.”. using the

number keys.

❒ You can register up to 30 senders

for Forwarding, Special RX Nos.,

and Authorized Reception func-

tions. You sometimes cannot regis-

ter 30 senders depending on the

number of senders registered with

other functions. If you attach the

optional Fax Feature Expander to

the machine, you can register up to

50 senders.

F Enter the function number for

“Print Sender List” using the

number keys.

G Press the {Start} key.

When the printing job is complet-

ed, the display shown in 6 appears

again.

Note

❒ To register a sender, use an RTI or

CSI. If you communicate with a

sender using G4, register the G4

TID.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel] before

printing starts, printing stops

and the display shown in 6 ap-

pears again.

❒ To find out a senders RTI/CSI,

check the TCR.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

❒ You need to switch Authorized Re-

ception on. ⇒ P.161 “INITIAL SET-

UP RX”

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ You can specify whether to receive

messages from only Specified

Senders or to exclude messages

from Specified Senders. The de-

fault setting is “Receive from Au-

Authorized Reception

This feature helps you to reject junk

mail. It lets you specify which termi-

nals you wish to receive fax messages

from; the others will be shut out. This

is useful if you are very annoyed with

someone.

thorized Senders”.

⇒

P.203

“Changing the User Parameters”

You can register the following:

• 30 Specified Senders (up to 20

characters for each sender with G3,

24 with G4)

• Wild Card ⇒ P.213 “Wild Cards”

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Note

Programming Specified Senders

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

E Enter the function number for

“Authorized RX” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

F Enter the function number for

“Register Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

G Choose a sender number you

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

wish to register.

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

{

Clear/Stop} key and reenter a

correct value.

Reference

H Press [RTI/CSI].

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X02E7

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

I Enter an RTI or CSI of a sender

Deleting a Specific Sender (Authorized

Reception)

and press [OK].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ND1X03E0

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

J Select whether or not to register

the sender on a P.213 “Wild Cards”.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

K Press [OK].

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X03E0

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

L Press [Exit].

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E0

M Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

N Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

The sender is deleted.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Authorized RX” using the num-

ber keys.

F Enter the function number for

“Delete Sender” using the num-

ber keys.

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 5 appears again.

G Choose the sender to delete by en-

tering its code. The RTI/CSI will

flash up.

J Press [PrevMenu] 3 times.

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sender/Authorized Reception List

Note

❒ If you make a mistake, press

Print this list to find out which Specif-

ic Senders are currently programmed.

{

Clear/Stop} and enter a correct

number.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

H Press [Yes].

Note

ND1X03E0

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

Note

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ If you press [No], the sender is

not deleted and the display

shown in 7 appears again.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

I Press [Yes].

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Monitor Volume

You can change the volume of the fol-

lowing sounds the machine makes.

❖

On Hook

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

When you press the {On Hook Dial

key.

}

Reference

Transmission

When the machine send a mes-

sage.

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Reception

When the machine receive a mes-

sage.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

DiallingDialing

After pressing the {Start} key, this

sound is output until the line con-

nects to the destination.

❖

Printing

Note

Sounds when a received message

has been printed. See P.64 “Print

Completion Beep”.

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Authorized RX” using the num-

ber keys.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

F Enter the function number for

“Print Sender List” using the

number keys.

G Press the {Start} key.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

❒ When you press [Cancel], the

printing stops and the display

shown in 4 appears again.

B Press the {

User Tools/Counter

} key.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

❖

On Hook

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

ND1X03E6

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

G Adjust the volume using the < or

> key and press [OK].

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E5

Note

❒ When you press [Cancel], the

volume setting is canceled and

the display shown in 5 appears

again.

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Monitor Volume” using the

number keys.

❒ Lowest = OFF

H Press [PrevMenu].

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

RTI/TTI

F Select an item you want to adjust

An RTI (Receive Terminal Identifica-

tion) is passed to a receiver or sender

when you send or receive a fax. When

the RTI is received, it is shown on the

display and printed in a report at the

other end.

pressing [↑Prev.] and [↓Next].

Note

❒ On Hook, Transmission, Recep-

tion, Dialling, and Printing are

shown in that order.

The TTI (Transmitter Terminal Identi-

fication) is printed on the header of

every fax you send.

You usually should contain your

name in both of these identifications.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Limitation

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

❒ The RTI does not work unless the

other party has the same make ma-

chine with the RTI feature.

number keys and press the {

}

key within 3 seconds.

❒ You can program up to 20 charac-

ters in a RTI and 32 in a TTI.

❒ You can program letter, symbols,

number, and spaces in an RTI and

TTI.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“RTI/TTI” using the number

keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

F Press [ RTI].

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

ND1X02E7

G Enter an RTI and press [OK].

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

ND1X03E0

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

when you phone rates are cheaper. ⇒

P.74 “SEND LATER”

H Press [TTI].

Limitation

❒ You can program only one Econo-

my Transmission time.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ND1X02E8

I Enter a TTI and press [OK].

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

ND1X03E0

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

J Press [OK] to confirm.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered

characters are canceled and the

display shown in 3 appears

again.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

K Press [PrevMenu].

L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

Registering The Economy

Transmission Time

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Economy Transmission allow you to

take advantage of off-peak line rates

by delaying transmission of messages

until a later time.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

Use the procedure below to program

the Economy Transmission Time for

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

“PRINTING A CONFIDENTIAL

MESSAGE”

❖

Polling ID

This ID is required for using Trans-

fer Request ⇒ P.96 “TRANSFER

REQUEST”, Transfer Station ⇒

P.60 “Transfer Station”, Default ID

Polling Transmission ⇒ P.90 “Free

Polling Transmission”, Default ID

Polling Reception ⇒ P.94 “Default

ID Polling Reception (Free Polling

Reception)”, ID Transmission ⇒

P.52 “ID Transmission”, ID Recep-

tion ⇒ P.61 “ID Reception”func-

tion.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Economy TX” using the number

keys.

❖

Memory Lock ID

This ID is required for printing a

message received using Memory

Lock. ⇒ P.114 “PRINTING A FILE

F Enter an economy transmission

time using the number keys and

press [OK]. To change AM/PM,

RECEIVED

LOCK”

WITH

MEMORY

press the [AM

America only)

↔

PM] key (North

Limitation

❒ A Polling ID can be any combina-

tion of digits (0 - 9) and letters (A -

F) except for 0000 and FFFF. When

you use Transfer Request, Transfer

Station, or ID Transmission, regis-

ter the same ID code as that regis-

tered on the sender's machine.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered

time is canceled and the display

shown in 5 appears again.

❒ A Confidential ID and Memory

Lock ID can be any a four digit nu-

meric code except for 0000.

G Press [PrevMenu].

❒ For Confidential ID and Memory

Lock ID, the optional Fax Feature

Expander is required.

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

ID Code

Use this procedure to register the fol-

lowing kinds of ID codes.

❖

Confidential ID

This ID is usually required for

printing a message received in the

Confidential Reception. ⇒ P.112

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Note

F Choose the ID you wish to pro-

gram using the number keys.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

G Enter an ID code and press [OK].

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ For a Confidential ID and Mem-

ory Lock ID, use the number

keys to enter an ID code. For a

Polling ID, use the number keys

and letter keys (A to F).

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

❒ If you make a mistake, press the

{

Clear/Stop} key and enter a cor-

Reference

rect code.

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ If you press [Cancel], the entered

ID is canceled.

❖

Confidential ID

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E0

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

❖

Memory Lock ID

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“ID Code” using the number

keys.

H Press [PrevMenu] twice.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

G3 Analog Line

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

This function must be set up before

you connect the machine to a G3 ana-

log line.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

You can register the following items

with a G3 analog Line:

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

• PSTN Line Type (Dial Pulse/Tone)

• CSI (up to 20 digits)

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

• Own Analog Number (up to 16

digits)

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

Note

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

❒ A CSI (Called Station Identifica-

tion) is notified to a receiver or

sender when you send or receive a

fax. When the CSI is received, it is

shown on the display or printed in

a report by the receiver's or send-

er's machine. The CSI works even

if the receiver or sender uses a dif-

ferent make machine.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

❒ The CSI can contain numerals, a

plus sign (+), and spaces. You usu-

ally should register your country

code, area code (minus the leading

zero) and your fax number in that

order.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

❒ Specify your own analog number

(the telephone number to which

your machine is connected) so that

the transfer station can return the

Transfer Result report to you. You

can program numbers and a pause

in your own number. Be sure to en-

ter a pause after the area code.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

E Enter the function number for

“G3 Analog Line” using the num-

ber keys.

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

F Enter the function number for K Enter an own analog number us-

“PSTN Line Type” using the

number keys.

ing the number keys and press

[OK].

G Select the desired line type and

press [OK].

ND1X03E0

L Press [PrevMenu] twice.

M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

G3 Digital Line

ND1X03E0

This function must be set when you

connect the machine to an ISDN G3

digital line.

H Enter the function number for

“CSI” using the number keys.

You can register the following items.

• CSI (up to 20 digits)

I Enter CSI and press [OK].

In some countries, you can not use

this function.

• Own Digital Number (up to 29

digits)

Note

❒ Optional ISDN required.

❒ You need to register a CSI and

your own digital number. ⇒ P.198

“G3 Analog Line”

❒ If you wish to change your subad-

dress, contact your service repre-

sentative.

ND1X03E0

J Enter the function number for

“Own Analog Number” using the

number keys.

❒ Program a User Function key for

the subaddress function.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Note

F Enter the function number for

“CSI” using the number keys.

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

G Enter the CSI and press [OK].

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X03E0

H Enter the function number for

“Own Digital Number” using the

number keys.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

I Enter your own digital number

Reference

using the number keys and press

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

[OK].

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

ND1X03E0

J Press [PrevMenu] twice.

Note

K Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

G4 Digital Line

E Enter the function number for

“G3 Digital Line” using the num-

ber keys.

This function must be set when you

connect the machine to the ISDN dig-

ital line.

You can register the following items:

• TID (up to 24 digit)

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

• Own Digital Number (up to 29

digit)

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

Note

❒ Optional ISDN unit is required.

❒ You can use a G4 TID if you use the

ISDN. The G4 TID is information

to be printed on a destination ma-

chine when you send a fax using

G4 down the ISDN.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“G4 Digital Line” using the num-

ber keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

F Enter the function number for

“TID” using the number keys. In

some countries, you can not use

this function.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

G Enter the number for “Country

Code”.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

H Enter your Country Code using N Enter the function number for

the number keys and press [OK].

“Own Digital Number ” using the

number keys.

O Enter your own digital number

using the number keys and press

ND1X03E0

[OK].

I Enter the number for “Own Digi-

tal Number” using the number

keys.

J Enter your fax number and press

[

OK].

ND1X03E0

P Press [PrevMenu] twice.

Q Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

ND1X03E0

K Enter the number for “Terminal

Name.”

L Enter your terminal name and

press [OK].

ND1X03E0

Reference

P.213 “Entering Text”

M Press [PrevMenu].

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Changing the User Parameters

The User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to match your

needs.

To change the function settings, set the user parameter switches.

Preparation

Access to some User Parameter Settings requires installation of optional

equipment or that other settings be made beforehand.

-Switches and Bits

User Parameters are divided into Switches and each switch is divided into eight

bits. The right most bit is bit 0 and the left most is bit 7.

Switch

↓

-User Parameter List

Switch

Bit

Item

Stamp home position

Image density adjustment level home position

The higher the level, the greater the image density.

Off

3,2,1

000: Auto Image Density, 001: Level 1 (lightest), 010: Level 2, 011:

Level 3, 100: Level 4, 101: Level 5 (darkest)

5,4

Character size (resolution) home position

00: Standard, 01: Detail, 10: Super fine

Transmission Mode home

position

Memory Trans- Immediate

mission Transmission

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Switch

Bit

Item

Label Insertion home posi-

tion

Off

ID Transmission home posi- Off

tion

Auto Reduction home posi- Off

tion

4,3

Original type home position

00: Text, 01: Photo/Text, 10: Photo

TTI Print home position

Off

Return the machine to the

initial settings after each

communication

Forwarding Mark

Center Mark

Print RX Time

TSI Print

Off

Checkered Mark

CIL Print

TID Print

Printing a Transmission Re- Off

sult Report (Memory Trans-

mission) automatically

Printing a Memory Storage Off

Report automatically

Printing a Polling Reserve

Report automatically

Off

Printing a Polling Result Re- Off

port

Printing a Transmission Re- Off

sult Report (Immediate

Transmission) automatically

Printing a Polling Clear Re- Off

port automatically

Printing a TCR automatical- Off

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Switch

Bit

Item

Printing a Confidential File Off

Report automatically

Containing an image in a

Transmission Result Report

(Memory Transmission),

Memory Storage Report,

Communication Failure Re-

port, or Transfer Result

Off

Receiving in Service Call

(SC) Condition

Possible (Sub- Not possible

stitute Recep-

tion)

2,1

Receiving when the machine can not print.

00: Enabled unconditionally, 01: Enabled for RTI/CSI is re-

ceived, 10: Enabled for Polling ID match, 11: Disabled

Personal Code Access

Just Size Printing

Off

Scanning in Mixed Paper

Size Available

Empty cassette alert

Off

Fax communication mode

home position

Selecting the Sheet to Print

the a Quick Dial Label

Paper label

sheet

Transparent la-

bel sheet

Scanning Start Page of the

Book Original

From the left

page

From the right

page

Parallel Memory Transmis- Off

sion

Authorized Reception condi- Receive from

tion

Receive from

other than au-

thorized Send-

ers

authorized

Senders

Two in One

Off

Auto Reduction in printing Off

Send PB/UUI to ISDN UUI

Local Printing at Forwarding Off

Polling file after sending

Delete

Standby

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

Switch

Bit

Item

Printing a document re-

ceived with Auto Power-On printing

Reception

Immediate

When turning

on the opera-

tion

Batch Transmission

Off

Clear modes when switching Off

the application

Manual Service report

Transmission

Off

2,1,0

Paper feed Tray

001: First, 010: Second, 011: Third, 100: 4th, 101:LCT

Fixed Input tray

Off

Paper Size Priority when re- A3

ceiving A4

1,0

Storing a message in memory which could not be transmitted

00: Off, 01: Store for 24 hours, 11: Store for 72 hours

Summer Time

Off

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

How to Specify a User Parameter

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

• It is recommended that you print

the User Parameter list and keep it

when you register or change a user

parameter. ⇒ P.207 “Printing the

User Parameter List”

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

• Do not change any bit switches

other than those shown on the pre-

vious pages.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

D Enter the function number for I Press [PrevMenu].

“Key Op. Settings” using the

J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

number keys and press the {

}

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

Printing the User Parameter List

Print this list to see the current User

Parameter settings.

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“User Parameters” using the

number keys.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

F Select a number for a switch you

wish to change by pressing

[↑Switch] or [↓Switch].

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

ND1X03E6

G Press a number key correspond-

ing to the bit number you wish to

change e.g., press { } to change

bit 0.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

H When you have finished, press

Reference

[

OK].

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel], the speci-

fied settings are canceled and

the display shown in 3 appears

again.

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

number keys and press the {

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

}

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

Note

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

E Enter the function “Prt.U.Parame-

ters” using the number keys.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

F Press the {Start} key to print the

list.

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Note

❒ If you press [Cancel] before

printing starts, the printing

stops and the display shown in

3 appears again.

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

G Press [PrevMenu].

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

D Enter the function number for

Date/Time

“Key Op. Settings” using the

number keys and press the {

}

Use this function to set your ma-

chine's internal clock to the current

time and date. This time is shown on

the display, printed on pages and

used for various features, such as

Send Later.

(Enter) key within 3 seconds.

If the current date and time are

wrong, use this procedure to correct

them.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

E Enter the function number for “

Date/Time” using the number

keys.

Counters

This function allows you to check the

total number of transmitted, received,

scanned, and printed pages on the

display.

• Transmissions

: Total number of transmitted pag-

F Select an item you want to change

using the < and > keys, enter

• Receptions

the month using [↑Prev.] or [↓Next

]

: Total number of received pages

and enter the correct date or time

using the number keys. Then

press [OK].

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

Note

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press the {Fax} key.

Note

❒ When you enter a date, the day

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

is set automatically.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

❒ Depending on your area, your

machine will either except the

date in 12 hours format or 24

hours format.

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

G Press [PrevMenu].

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

ND2L01E0

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

Summer Time

Whenever local custom requires ad-

vancing the clock or setting the clock

back, use this feature. You can easily

move the clock forwards when day-

light saving time begins, and back

when it ends. To turn this feature on,

change the User Parameter Switch 25

digit 7. ⇒ P.207 “Printing the User Pa-

rameter List”

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

Reference

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

• 5 minutes

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

A Make sure that the machine is in

Facsimile mode and the standby

display is shown.

number keys and press the {

}

(Enter) within 3 seconds.

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

❒ If the standby display is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

shown, press the {Fax} key.

E Enter the function number for

“Counters” using the number

keys.

B Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Sort

1-Sided 2-Sided

Book

2-Sided

Staple

Stack

2-Sided 2-Sided

User Tools / Counter

Enhanced

Auto Reduce/

The totals are displayed.

ND2L01E0

F When you have checked the total

C Enter the number of the “Fax”.

pages, press [OK].

The Facsimile User Tool main

menu appears.

G Press [PrevMenu].

Reference

H Press the {User Tools/Counter

}

For how to use the System User

Tools, refer to the System Set-

tings manual.

key.

Auto Reset

D Enter the function number for

“Key Op. Settings” using the

If the machine is not used for a while,

the display will return to the Ready

condition. By default, the time that

must elapse before this happens is 30

seconds. If you wish, you can change

this interval to one of the following

settings:

number keys and press the {

}

within 3 seconds.

• 1 minute

• 3 minutes

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEY OPERATOR SETTINGS

Note

❒ If “Key Op. Settings” is not

shown, press [↑Prev.] or [↓Next].

E Enter the function number for

“Auto Reset” using the number

keys.

The totals are displayed.

F Select the interval with the < and

> keys. Then press [OK] key.

G Press [PrevMenu].

H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.

Paper Feed Selection

Using this feature, you can select

which tray to print out the message. If

you wish to use this feature, change

User Parameter Switch digits 0 to 2.

RDS (Remote Diagnostic

System)

If your machine has a problem, a ser-

vice representative can perform vari-

ous diagnostic tasks over the

telephone line from the service sta-

tion to try to find out what is wrong

with your machine. The service tech-

nician can also use RDS to change

some of your machine's settings if

you request it.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FACSIMILE USER TOOLS

This page is intentionally blank.

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Entering Text

ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT

This section describes how to enter

characters. When you enter a charac-

ter, it is shown at the position of the

cursor. If there is a character at the

cursor position, the entered character

is shown before the character.

❖ < and

Use to move the cursor left or

right.

❖ {Insert

key

}

Press if you wish to insert charac-

ters.

Note

Available Characters

❒ If you wish to enter symbols, use

• Alphabetic characters

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU-

VWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstu-

vwxyz

the [Symbols] key.

• Symbols

• Numerals

0123456789

ND2C0102

Keys

❒ Flip the plate to access Quick Dial

keys not shown.

❖

Number keys

Use to enter numbers.

❒ Quick Dial 01/29 means Quick

Dial key 01 or 29.

❖

Quick Dial 01/29 to Quick Dial 28/56 (A

to Z)

Press these keys to enter upper and

lower case letters.

-Wild Cards

When you register RTIs or CSIs for

multiple destinations, you can regis-

ter a sequence of characters common

to these identifications as a wild card

instead of registering every identifi-

cation.

❖ [

←→

]

key

Use to switch between upper and

lower case.

❖

Quick Dial 27/55

Press to enter a space.

If a destination has an RTI or CSI con-

taining a wild card, the machine de-

termines that the destination matches

the registered destination.

❖ {Clear/Stop

key

}

Deletes a character at the cursor

position. You can delete a charac-

ter at the right end of a line even if

the cursor is placed to the right of

the character.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENTERING TEXT

❖

Not using a wild card

How To Enter Text

Destination to be Number of regis-

registered (RTI)

tered identifica-

tions

Entering letters

NEW YORK

BRANCH

A Press [

←→

a] to switch between

Uppercase and Lowercase.

HONG KONG

BRANCH

SYDNEY

BRANCH

❖

Using a wild card

Destination to be Number of regis-

registered (RTI)

tered identifica-

tions

ND2C0101

BRANCH

B Press a Quick Dial key.

A letter is entered and the cursor

moves.

Limitation

❒ You can register up to 30 wild

Note

cards.

❒ If you wish to you enter another

character continuously, repeat

step 2.

Note

❒ Compare identifications by ne-

glecting spaces.

❒ You can use wild cards for the fol-

Entering symbols

lowing functions:

• P.175 “Forwarding”

A Press [Symbols].

• P.182 “Special Senders to Treat

The available symbols are shown

on the display.

Differently (Special RX Nos.)”

• P.188 “Authorized Reception”

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENTERING AND MODIFYING TEXT

The numeral is entered and the

cursor moves.

B Select the desired symbol by

pressing [↑Prev.] and [↓Next].

Deleting characters

A Press the < and > keys to move

the cursor to a character you want

to delete.

ND2C0102

ND2C0110

ND2C0101

B Press the {Clear/Stop} key.

The character at the cursor posi-

tion is deleted .

Note

❒ If you wish to delete another

character, repeat steps 1 and 2.

C Enter the number for the symbols

using the number keys.

The symbols is entered and the

cursor moves.

Note

❒ If you wish to you enter another

symbol, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Entering numbers

A Press a number keys.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENTERING TEXT

This page is intentionally blank.

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Maintaining Your Machine

CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A

TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE

Connecting The Telephone Line

To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connec-

tor.

Important

❒ Make sure the type of modular connector.

❖

Where to connect the machine

Analog

External

Telephone

ISDN

ND8A02E0

❖

When using a modular type connector

External

Telephone

ND8F01E0

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

Connecting The Machine To The ISDN

Connect the machine to the ISDN if you have the optional ISDN unit. Use a mod-

ular type connector for the ISDN.

Important

❒ When you connect the machine to the ISDN, contact your service representa-

tive.

ND8F03E1

Connecting The Optional External Telephone

You can connect the handset and an external telephone to the machine. You can

use them for telephone calls.

Note

❒ Some telephone may not be connected or may suffer reduced functionality.

❖

Specifying the handset line type

ND1X00E0

The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Dial-

ing) or DP (Pulse Dialing).

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONNECTING THE MACHINE TO A TELEPHONE LINE AND TELEPHONE

❖

Adjusting the handset bell volume

Ringer

ND1X00E1

Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.

Selecting The Line Type

Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone

and pulse dial.

Select the Line Type using “PSTN Line Type” in ”Key Operator Settings”.⇒

P.198 “G3 Analog Line” The default settings is ”Tone”.

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE

Stamp option is option.

When the stamp is getting to become lighter, replace the cartridge.

Note

❒ Use the cartridge specified for this machine.

A Lift the document feeder and press the tab to open the stamp cover.

Limitation

❒ Do not pull the stamp cover strongly because cords are attached.

NDID05E0

B Pull out the cartridge.

NDID06E0

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE

C Set a new cartridge.

New Cartridge

NDID06E2

D Replace the stamp cover until it clicks.

NDID05E1

E Close the document feeder.

Note

❒ Hold down the center part of the cover to make sure that it is closed com-

pletely.

Stamp Cover Layout

Stamp

Cartridge

Tabs

Catch

ND1D07E1

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

This page is intentionally blank.

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. Appendix

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Fax Feature Expander and Hard Disk

A Fax Feature Expander and a 130-Mbytes hard disk can be added. By installing

them, you can increase the memory capacity and use the following features.

With the Fax Feature Expander, features of Multicopy RX, 2-Sided Printing,

Confidential reception, Memory Lock, Multi-Step Transfer, Forwarding, Memo-

ry Lock ID, Confidential ID are available.

-Memory Capacity

• With Fax Feature Expander Type 450 ( + 4MB, total 6MB):

480 pages

• With Fax Feature Expander and 130-Mbytes hard disk:

3,000 pages

Measured using a ITU-T#1 chart (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution.

Note

❒ If you would like to install both of these, please contact your service represen-

tative.

-Extended Features

You can use the optional Group dial and extend the following features.

Function

Without Fax Feature Ex- With Fax Feature Expander

pander

Speed dial code

Personal code

100

1000

Memory Capacity for

Memory Transmission

160 sheet

480 sheet (with Fax Feature

Expander) 3000 sheet (with

Fax Feature Expander and

Hard Disk)

Memory Transmission file 200

1000

Auto Document

Communication Result

last 200 communication

last 900 communication

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

Function

Without Fax Feature Ex- With Fax Feature Expander

pander

Specific Sender

400 dpi High Resolution Option (FAX 400dpi Option Type 450)

This allows you to send and receive the fax messages at high resolution. JBIG

compression is also available with this option.

ISDN Unit (ISDN Option Type 450)

This allows you to send and receive messages using the ISDN (Integrated Ser-

vice Digital Network).

Stamp (FAX STAMP TYPE 450)

Single-sided documents you send from the Document Feeder (ADF) have a

mark stamped on the top of the scanned side after they are scanned in. Double-

sided documents you send from the Document Feeder (ADF) have a mark

stamped on top and bottom of one scanned side. Use these marks to check

whether a document was properly stored in memory when using Memory

Transmission, or if the originals was properly sent when using Immediate

Transmission.

Duplex Unit (AD340)

With Duplex Unit, 2–sided printing is available.

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Standard

G3, G4 (option)

G3:

Resolution

8 × 3.85/mm•200 × 100 dpi (Standard), 8 × 7.7/mm•200

× 200 dpi (Detail), 8 × 15.4/mm•200×400 dpi (Fine), 16 ×

15.4/mm•400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine: 400dpi Option Re-

quired)

G4:

200 × 100 dpi (Standard), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail), 400 × 400

dpi (Super Fine: 400dpi Option Required)

Transmission Time

G3: 3 seconds at 28,800bps, Standard resolution

G4: 3 seconds, Detail resolution

Data Compression

MH, MR, MMR, SSC, JBIG (400dpi Option Required)

Maximum Original Size

Standard size: A3/DLT Irregular size: 304 × 432 mm

Maximum Scanning Size 294 mm × 432 mm/11" × 17"

Print Process

Printing on standard paper using the laser

Transmission Speed

G3:

33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/

16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,200/4,800/2,400 bps (auto

shift down system)

G4:

64/56 kbps (auto speed matching)

❖

Power Consumption

Type1•Type2 (35 copy per Type 3 (45 copy per

minute) model

Transmission

255W

270W

Reception

235W

250W

Printing (Average)

Standby mode

Energy Saving mode

365W

555W

265W

280W

13W

Maximum power con-

sumption

1440W

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

FUNCTION LIST

Advanced Transmission Features

Feature name

Description

Reference

Send Later

Sets the machine to auto-

matically start transmis-

sion or polling reception at

an appointed time.

P.74 “SEND LATER”

Confidential Transmission Sends a confidential mes-

P.76 “CONFIDENTIAL

sage. This feature is divid- TRANSMISSION”

ed into Default ID

Confidential Transmission

and Override ID Confiden-

tial Transmission.

Personal Code TX

This will help you to check P.78 “PERSONAL CODE

up on who has been using TRANSMISSION”

the machine and how of-

ten.

Auto Document

Stores a commonly used

original and prints or sends DOCUMENT”

P.80 “SENDING AN AUTO

it directly.

2-Sided Transmission

Use to send 2-Sided origi- P.82 “2-SIDED TRANS-

nals (double-sided origi-

nal) from the Document

Feeder (ADF).

MISSION (DOUBLE-SID-

ED TRANSMISSION)”

Book Fax

When sending a book-type P.84 “BOOK FAX”

original, this feature scans

and sends the right and left

pages one by one.

Irregular Scan Area

When sending a non-stan- P.86 “CHOOSING THE

dard size original, this fea- AREA TO BE SCANNED

ture specifies the length

and width. The machine

scans the original in the

specified size.

YOURSELF (IRREGULAR

SCAN AREA)”

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST

Feature name

Description

Reference

Transmission Deadline

You specify the deadline

for the transmission and,

when it cannot be sent be-

cause the line to the desti-

nation is busy, the machine

redials any number of

times until the specified

time is reached.

P.88 “TRANSMISSION

DEADLINE (TRD)”

Polling Transmission

Polling Reception

Transfer Request

Upon request from a desti- P.90 “POLLING TRANS-

nation, the machine sends MISSION”

an original stored in mem-

ory. This feature is divided

into Free Polling, default

ID Polling Transmission,

and Override ID Polling

Transmission.

Sends a transmission re-

P.94 “POLLING RECEP-

quest to the other party and TION”

receives a message from

the receiver. This feature is

divided into Default ID

polling Reception and ID

Override Polling Recep-

tion.

Sends an original to a desti- P.96 “TRANSFER RE-

nation via a facsimile

equipped with the transfer

station capability.

QUEST”

Options

Description

Reference

TTI Print

You can print a message including P.99 “TTI (Transmit Termi-

the name registered as a TTI on

the received message for each file.

nal Identification) Print”

Label Insertion

If you register the receiver's name P.99 “Label Insertion”

in a Quick dial or speed dial,

something followed by the receiv-

er's name is automatically printed

at the top of the received message.

Auto Reduction

ID Transmission

If the receiver uses paper narrow- P.99 “Auto Reduction”

er than the message, it is sent re-

duced to the receiver paper.

Sends an original only to the ma- P.100 “ID Transmission”

chine of the same Polling ID as

that registered in the machine.

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

Communication Information

Feature name

Description

This feature cancels, con-

firms, or changes a file (res- CANCELING TRANSMIS-

Reference

Checking and Canceling

the Transmission Files

P.103 “CHECKING AND

ervation) for Memory

SION FILES”

Transmission,Confidential

Transmission, Transfer Re-

quest, Polling Reception, or

Polling Transmission.

Printing the TX File List

The transmission file list

can be manually printed.

This list allows you to

know the files stored in

memory or the file num-

bers.

P.109 “PRINTING A LIST

OF FILES IN MEMORY

(PRINT TX FILE LIST)”

Displaying the Transmis-

sion Result

Part of the TCR can be

P.110 “CHECKING THE

shown on the display. The TRANSMISSION RESULT

results of the last 50 trans- (TX STATUS)”

missions are displayed

from the latest one.

Displaying the Reception

Result

Part of the TCR (Transac-

tion Confirmation Report) RECEPTION RESULT (RX

can be shown on the dis-

play. The results of the last

50 receptions are displayed

from the latest one.

P.111 “CHECKING THE

STATUS)”

Printing a Confidential

Document

Prints messages receivedin P.112 “PRINTING A CON-

Confidential Reception

mode.

FIDENTIAL MESSAGE”

Printing the Memory Lock Prints messages receivedin P.114 “PRINTING A FILE

Memory Lock mode.

RECEIVED WITH MEMO-

RY LOCK”

Printing the TCR

The TCR (Transaction Con- P.116 “PRINTING THE

firmation Report) can be

manually printed. This re-

port shows the results of

the last 50 communica-

tions.

TCR”

Displaying the Memory

Status

The status of the memory is P.117 “DISPLAYING THE

shown on the display.

MEMORY STATUS”

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST

User Tools

Feature name

Description

Reference

nation in a Quick Dial, you als”

can specify the destination

only by pressing the Quick

Dial key.

Dial

When you register several P.135 “Registering Groups”

destinations as a group in a

quick dial, you can specify

all the destinations by just

pressing a quick dial key.

Group Dial

When you register several P.139 “Registering Optional

destinations as an optional Groups”

group, you can specify all

the destinations by enter-

ing the two-digit group

number after pressing the

optional group dial key

(F1–F5).

nation in a speed dial, you als”

can specify the destination

by entering the two-digit or

three-digit speed dial code

after pressing the Speed

Dial key.

Store/Delete Keystroke

Program

Allows you to store a fre-

quently used function or

destination in a Quick Dial.

P.147 “Storing Keystroke

Programs”

P.151 “Registering Auto

Documents”

ument

quently used original in.

You can print or send the

original directly as neces-

sary.

Area

Registers a frequently used P.86 “CHOOSING THE

original size in advance

AREA TO BE SCANNED

when you send a message YOURSELF (IRREGULAR

with the Irregular Scan

SCAN AREA)”

Area function.

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

Feature name

Description

Reference

REPORTS/LISTS

This feature allows you to P.158 “REPORTS/LISTS”

print various reports and

lists manually. You can

print the following reports

and lists:

• TCR (Transaction Con-

firmation Report)

• Quick Dial list

• Group Dial list

• Keystroke Program list

• Speed Dial list

• Auto Document list

• Sender/Forwarding list

INITIAL SETUP TX

INITIAL SET UP RX

Setting the default setting P.159 “INITIAL SETUP

for the transmission mode TX”

and scanning conditions.

When you switch the pow-

er on, the machine settings

the items specified with

this feature.

Allows you to switch the

following reception func-

tions to On/Off:

P.161 “INITIAL SETUP

RX”

• Reception Mode

• Checkered Mark

• Center Mark

• Print RX Time

• Multi-copy Reception

• Authorized RX

• Special RX Nos.

• Forwarding

• 2-Sided Printing

• Reverse Order Printing

• Bypass Paper Size

Assigning User Function

Keys

Stores a frequently used

function in a User Function FUNCTION KEYS”

Key ({F1} to {F5}).

P.164 “ASSIGNING USER

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST

Feature name

Description

Reference

Key Operator Settings /

Personal Code

Registers personal code for P.166 “KEY OPERATOR

each person. When every

user enters a personal

SETTINGS”

codes in sending messages,

you can check the usage

status for each person.

ECM

If a part of transmission

fails due to a telephone line

fault, this feature resends

the failed part automatical-

ly.

P.171 “ECM”

Memory Lock

Multistep Transfer

Switch the Memory Lock

On or Off. To use it, register

an ID for printing a mes-

sage received in Memory

Lock mode.

P.172 “Memory Lock”

Registers a transfer station P.173 “Multistep Transfer”

in a group dial. This allows

the message to be transmit-

ted via multiple transfer

stations more efficiently

when the requesting party

sends a transfer request to

your machine.

Forwarding

Transfers received messag- P.175 “Forwarding”

es to a registered receiver

(forwarding destination).

Special RX Nos.

Authorized Reception

Allow messages from spec- P.182 “Special Senders to

ified senders to be treated Treat Differently (Special RX

differently.

Nos.)”

When you register specific P.188 “Authorized Recep-

senders in advance, you

can restrict senders from

whom you receive mes-

sage.

tion”

Monitor Volume

Adjusts the volume of

monitoring and beeper

sounds from the speaker

inside the machine.

P.192 “Monitor Volume”

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX

Feature name

Description

Reference

RTI/TTI

Registersinformation(RTI) P.193 “RTI/TTI”

to be shown on the display

and printed in a report by a

receiver's or sender's ma-

chine. This feature also reg-

isters information (TTI) to

be printed from a destina-

tion machine when you

send a fax.

Economy Transmission

means to send a fax when omy Transmission Time”

communication charges

are lower. The Economy

TX feature registers this

time.

P.195 “Registering The Econ-

ID Code

Registers an ID required

for Transfer Request,

P.196 “ID Code”

Transfer Station, Default

ID Polling Transmission,

Default ID Polling Recep-

tion, or ID Transmission.

G3 Analog Line

Registers an own analog

number, line type, and CSI

when you connect the ma-

chine to the G3 analog line.

P.198 “G3 Analog Line”

G3 Digital Line

G4 Digital Line

Registers own digital num- P.199 “G3 Digital Line”

ber and CSI, when you con-

nect the machine to a ISDN.

Registers an own digital

number, TID (Terminal ID)

and subaddress when you

connect the machine to a

G4 digital line.

⇒ P.200 “G4 Digital Line”

Changing User Parameters Allows you to change the

function settings to meet

P.203 “Changing the User

Parameters”

your needs.

Printing User Parameter

List

Allows you to print and

check User Parameters set- rameter List”

tings.

P.207 “Printing the User Pa-

Date/Time

Adjusts the date and the

time as a reference.

P.208 “Date/Time”

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST

Feature name

Description

Reference

Counters

Check the transmission, re- P.209 “Counters”

ception, and totals on the

display.

Auto Reset

Set the interval returning to ⇒ P.210 “Auto Reset”

the standby mode.

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

Clear/Stop key, 6

Communicating Indicator, 4

Communication Failure Report, 29

Components, 1

Confidential File Report, 113

Confidential ID, 196

Confidential Reception Indicator, 4

Confidential Transmission, 76, 226

Counters, 209, 233

180 Degree Rotation Printing, 66

2-Sided Printing, 56, 65, 185, 161

2-Sided Transmission, 14, 15, 28, 82, 226,

Acceptable types of Originals, 14

Analog Line Connector, 3

Authorized Reception, 188, 231

Authorized Reception List, 158, 191

Authorized RX, 161

Auto Document, 80, 151, 226, 229

Auto Document List, 153, 158

Auto Identification, 42

Auto Image Density, 39

Automatic Power Reception Function, 12

Automatic Redial, 26

Auto Reduction, 99, 227

Date/Time, 208, 232

Default ID Polling Reception, 62, 94, 95

Default ID Polling Transmission, 90, 91

Density key (Contrast key), 6

Detail, 37

Dialing, 43

Dial label, 132

Display, 10

Auto Reset, 210

Displaying the Memory Status, 117, 228

Displaying the Reception Result, 228

Displaying the Transmission Result, 228

Document Feeder (ADF), 1

Dual Access, 12

Batch Transmission, 27

Book Fax, 84, 226

Broadcasting, 24

Bypass Paper Size, 161, 162

Bypass Tray, 2

ECM, 27, 33, 171, 231

Economy Transmission Time, 74, 195,

232

End Receiver, 60, 96, 98

Entering letters, 214

Entering numbers, 215

Entering symbols, 214

Entering Text, 213

Error Messages, 120

Error Report, 125

Canceling a Transmission, 103

Center Mark, 64, 161

Chain Dial, 46

Changing a Destination, 107

Changing Line Type, 41

Changing the Transmission Time, 106

Checkered Mark, 64, 161

Checking and Canceling the Transmission

Files, 228

Checking and Editing a File, 105

Checking Destinations (Destination List),

106

Checking the Reception Result (RX Sta-

tus), 111

Checking the Transmission Result (TX

Status), 110

CIL/TID Print, 69

Exposure Glass, 1

Fax Feature Expander, 223

Fax key, 6

Fax Mode (Auto Reception Mode), 59

F Code (PWD), 54, 63

F Code (SEP), 61

F Code (SUB), 53

Forwarding, 161, 175, 231

Forwarding Stations, 176

Clear Modes/Energy Saver key, 5

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Free Polling Transmission, 90, 91

Function List, 226

Function Map, iv

Keystroke Program List, 149, 158

Label Insertion, 99, 227

Letters, 214

G3, 41

G3 Analog Line, 198, 232

G3 Digital Line, 199, 232

G3/G4 Mode Selection, 164

G4, 41

G4 Digital Line, 200

Group Dial, 229

Main Power Switch, 2

Maintaining Your Machine, 217

Manual Dial, 35

Manual Image Density, 39

Memory Lock, 172, 185, 231

Memory Lock ID, 196

Group Dial List, 137, 158

Groups, 48, 135

Memory Reception, 56

Memory Storage Report, 28

Memory Transmission, 10, 23

Monitor Volume, 192, 231

Multi-copy, 56, 185

Hard Disk, 223

High Resolution Option, 5, 224

How to Set an Original, 18

Multi-copy Reception, 65, 161

Multistep Transfer, 60, 173, 231

ID Code, 196, 232

ID Override Polling Reception, 62, 95

ID Override Polling Transmission, 91

ID Reception, 61

ID Transmission, 52, 100, 227

Image density, 37

Image Density (Contrast), 38

Image Rotation, 67

Immediate Reception, 55

Immediate Transmission, 10, 23, 32

Indicators, 123

Initial Setup RX, 127, 161, 230

Initial Setup TX, 127, 159, 230

Internal Tray, 1

Number key, 6, 43

Numbers, 215

On-hook Dial, 34

On Hook Dial key, 5

Operation Panel, 4

Operation Switch, 2

Opt. Group Dial, 229

Optional Group Dial, 49

Optional Groups, 139

Original Type, 37, 38

Original Type key, 6

Override ID Polling Reception, 94

Override ID Polling Transmission, 90

Interrupt key, 6

Irregular Area, 154, 229

Irregular Scan Area, 86, 226

ISDN, 218

ISDN Line connector, 2

Page Reduction, 68

Page Separation and Length Reduction,

JBIG Reception, 63

JBIG Transmission, 54

Paper Feed Selection, 211

Parallel Memory Transmission, 28

Pause, 44

Pause/Redial key, 6

Personal Code, 166, 231

Personal Code Access, 12, 169

Key Operator Settings, 127, 166

Keystroke Program, 147, 229

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Personal Code List, 170

Personal Code Transmission, 78

Personal Code TX, 226

Selecting the Reception Mode, 59

Selection keys, 6

Sender/Authorized Reception List, 191

Send Later, 74, 226

Photo, 38

Photo/Text, 38

Polling ID, 196

Solving Problems, 121

Special Reception numbers, 182

Special RX Nos., 161, 183, 231

Specifications, 225

Specific Senders (Forwarding), 178

Specified Sender/Forwarding Station list,

181

Specified Sender List, 187

Speed Dial, 43, 47, 143, 229

Speed Dial keys, 5

Polling Reception, 94, 227

Polling Reserve Report, 95

Polling Result Report, 95

Polling Transmission, 90, 227

Polling Transmission Clear Report, 92

Print Completion Beep, 64

Printing a Confidential Document, 228

Printing a Confidential Message, 112

Printing a File, 104

Speed Dial List, 145, 158

Stamp

, 52, 220

Standard, 37

Printing a File Received with Memory

Lock, 114

Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print

TX File List), 109

Printing Functions, 64

Start key, 6

Subaddress, 45

Substitute Reception, 56, 57, 123

Summer Time, 209

Super Fine, 37

Switches and Bits, 203

Symbols, 214

Printing the TCR, 228

Printing the Memory Lock, 228

Printing the TX File List, 228

Print RX Time, 161

Quick Dial, 43, 46, 129, 229

Quick Dial Flip Plate, 6

Quick Dial keys, 6

TCR, 228

TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report),

116, 158

Telephone Directory, 47

Telephone Line, 217

Quick Dial List, 131, 158

Telephone Mode, 59

Text, 38

Tonal Signals, 45

Tone, 45

Tone key, 6

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 211

Receive File Indicator, 4, 123

Reception Functions, 60

Reception Mode, 161

Toner, 119

Reception Time, 64

Transfer Request, 96, 227

Transfer Result Report, 61

Transfer Station, 60, 96

Transmission Deadline (TRD), 88, 227

Transmission Features, 52

Transmission Mode, 159

Transmission Mode key, 5

Transmission Options, 99

Transmission Result Display, 164

Transmission Result Report (Immediate

Transmission), 33

Redial, 50

Reports/Lists, 127, 158, 230

Requesting Party, 60, 96

Re-sending a File, 106

Resolution, 37, 159

Resolution key, 5

Reverse Order Printing, 56, 68, 161

Reverse Printing, 185

RTI/TTI, 193, 232

Transmission Result Report (Memory

Transmission), 29

Transmission With Image Rotation, 12

Scan Settings, 37

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tray Select, 185

Troubleshooting, 119

TSI Print, 69

TTI Print, 99, 227

Two In One, 67, 56

User Function Keys, 4, 164, 230

User Functions, 127

User Parameter List, 203, 232

User Parameters, 203, 232

User Tools, 5, 127, 229

When the Confidential Reception Indica-

tor is Lit, 124

When the Fax key is Lit, 124

When the Receive File Indicator is Lit or

Flashing, 123

Wild Cards, 213

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printed in Japan

UE USA A6938607

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Radio Shack CD Player PT 668C User Guide
RCA TV DVD Combo 24F500TDV User Guide
Reebok Watch W 113 User Guide
Rondo Coffeemaker SUP021YO User Guide
Rosewill Network Card N900UBE User Guide
Ryobi Lawn Mower 136 User Guide
Samsung Cell Phone DFX 5000 User Guide
Samsung Computer Monitor 152MP User Guide
Samsung Laptop X460 User Guide
Seagate Computer Drive ES2 User Guide